HP Color LaserJet 4700 4700 laser printer Software Technical Reference
Pubblicità
Pubblicità
HP Color LaserJet 4700 Printer
Software Technical Reference
HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer
Software Technical Reference
Copyright and license
©2005 Copyright Hewlett-Packard
Development Company, L.P.
Reproduction, adaptation or translation without prior written permission is prohibited, except as allowed under the copyright laws.
The information contained herein is subject to change without notice.
The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein.
Edition 1, 8/2005
Trademark credits
Adobe®, Adobe Photoshop®, Acrobat®,
PostScript®, and the Acrobat logo® are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Apple and the Apple logo are trademarks of
Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S.
and other countries.
EnergyStar® and the Energy Star logo® are
US registered marks of the United States
Environmental Protection Agency.
Java™ is a US trademark of Sun
Microsystems, Inc.
Linux is a U.S. registered trademark of Linus
Torvalds
Microsoft®, Windows®, and Windows NT® are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation.
PANTONE*® is *Pantone, Inc.'s checkstandard trademark for color.
Pentium® is a trademark or registered trademark of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries.
UNIX® is a registered trademark of The
Open Group.
Table of contents
Printing-system software .....................................................................9
Software component availability ..........................................................9
HP LaserJet software CD, Windows partition ...................11
HP LaserJet software CD, Macintosh partition .................11
HP Color LaserJet 4700 printing-system software CD for
Windows systems ..............................................................................24
HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation drivers ....................................27
ENWW iii
iv
Print-driver version numbers for Windows operating systems ..........28
Configurable ordering information for consumables [INTERNAL] ......................54
ENWW
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Access to print drivers in Windows 98 and Windows Me ...................................76
Default Print Settings .........................................................................80
User Guide Print Settings ..................................................................83
Print on Both Sides ............................................................................84
Automatically printing on both sides ..................................................84
Manually printing on both sides .........................................................84
Flip Pages Up ....................................................................................86
Booklet Printing .................................................................................87
Book and Booklet Printing .................................................................87
Pages per Sheet ................................................................................88
Print Page Borders ............................................................................89
Print Quality Details for the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver ...................................90
Current Setting ..................................................................................90
Graphic Settings ................................................................................90
Output Settings ..................................................................................91
Print Quality Details for the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver ...................................91
Current Setting ..................................................................................92
Graphic Settings ................................................................................92
Output Settings ..................................................................................92
Print Document On setting ................................................................94
Scale to Fit option ..............................................................................94
% of Normal Size option ....................................................................95
Watermarks drop-down menu ...........................................................96
First Page Only check box .................................................................96
Current Watermarks ..........................................................................97
ENWW v
vi
Watermark Message .........................................................................98
Message Angle ..................................................................................98
Document preview image ..................................................................98
Name ...............................................................................102
Save, Delete, or Rename ................................................103
Custom size (width and height controls) .........................104
Custom width and height control limits ............................104
Dynamic measurement units ...........................................105
Close ...............................................................................105
Other Pages ....................................................................................109
Back Cover ......................................................................................111
Proof and Hold .................................................................................117
Quick Copy ......................................................................................118
Using Job Storage features when printing .......................................................120
Releasing a Job Storage print job ...................................................120
Deleting a Job Storage print job ......................................................120
ENWW
ENWW
Default (sRGB) ................................................................................128
Image Optimization (sRGB) .............................................................128
Adobe RGB (1998) ..........................................................................128
Custom Profile .................................................................................129
Duplexing unit ..................................................................................132
Allow Manual Duplexing ..................................................................132
Mopier Enabled ...............................................................................132
Mopier mode and collation ..............................................132
Optional Paper Destinations ............................................................133
Optional Paper Sources ..................................................................133
Allow Scaling from Large Paper ......................................................136
Alternative Letterhead Mode ...........................................................136
Ignore Application Collation .............................................................136
Printer memory ................................................................................136
Include types in application source list ............................................136
vii
viii
Send TrueType fonts to printer according to the Font Substitution Table ........147
Font Substitution Table ....................................................................147
Always use built-in printer fonts instead of TrueType fonts ..............................148
Send Fonts As .................................................................................148
HPPJLEncoding ..............................................................................151
Job Storage .....................................................................................151
User Name ......................................................................................153
PIN digit 1 (for Private Job) .............................................................153
Print Color as Gray ..........................................................................153
Stapling Options ..............................................................................154
Color Options ...................................................................................154
Color Themes for RGB Color ..........................................................154
Color Themes for CMYK Color ........................................................155
Edge Control ....................................................................................155
Text Neutral Grays ..........................................................................155
Text Halftone ...................................................................................156
Graphic Neutral Grays .....................................................................156
Graphic Halftone ..............................................................................156
Photographs Neutral Grays .............................................................156
Photographs Halftone ......................................................................156
Watermark (Pages per Sheet) .........................................................156
Print Watermark ...............................................................................156
Watermark .......................................................................................157
Watermark Font ...............................................................................157
Watermark Size ...............................................................................157
Watermark Angle .............................................................................157
Watermark Style ..............................................................................158
Watermark Color .............................................................................158
Watermark Intensity .........................................................................158
Tray 3, Tray 4, Tray 5, and Tray 6 ...................................................159
Accessory Output Bin ......................................................................159
Mopier Mode ....................................................................................159
Printer Hard Disk .............................................................................159
ENWW
Job Storage .....................................................................................159
Duplex Unit (for 2-sided Printing) ....................................................160
PostScript Language Level ..............................................................162
Bitmap compression ........................................................................163
Send CTRL+D before job ................................................................163
Send CTRL+D after job ...................................................................163
4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows
Custom width and height control limits ............................................185
ENWW ix
x
ENWW
ENWW
PS Emulation Unidriver Device Settings ..........................................................231
Available PostScript Memory ...........................................................231
Output Protocol ................................................................................231
Send Ctrl-D Before Each Job ..........................................................231
Send Ctrl-D After Each Job .............................................................231
Job Timeout .....................................................................................232
Wait Timeout ...................................................................................232
Minimum Font Size to Download as Outline ....................................232
Maximum Font Size to Download as Outline ...................................232
Automatic Configuration ..................................................................233
Tray 3, 4, 5, and 6 ...........................................................................233
Accessory Output Bin ......................................................................233
Duplex Unit (for 2-Sided Printing) ....................................................233
Allow Manual Duplexing ..................................................................233
Printer Memory ................................................................................233
Printer Hard Disk .............................................................................234
Job Storage .....................................................................................234
Mopier Mode ....................................................................................234
Mopier mode and collation ..............................................................234
Postscript Passthrough (PS Emulation Unidriver only) ...................235
xi
5 Installing Windows printing-system components
General installation for Windows 98, Me, 2000, and XP operating systems ....................246
Installing from a network or from downloaded files ..........................................246
Using the Help, Back, Next, and Cancel buttons .............................................247
Installer Customization Wizard for Windows ....................................................269
Running the Installer Customization Wizard ....................................269
Point and Print installation for Windows 98, Me, 2000, XP, and Server
6 Installation for Macintosh operating systems
Installing the HP LaserJet printing-system software for the Macintosh OS ......................285
xii ENWW
ENWW
Remote firmware update by using FTP on a direct network connection ..........................318
Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003
Remote firmware update by using the HP LaserJet Utility (Mac OS 9.x only) ..................324
Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003
xiii
xiv ENWW
List of tables
ENWW xv
xvi ENWW
List of figures
ENWW xvii
xviii ENWW
ENWW xix
xx ENWW
1 Purpose and scope
Introduction
This software technical reference (STR) provides information about and troubleshooting tips for the
HP Color LaserJet 4700 printing-system software.
This document is prepared in an electronic format to serve as a quick-reference tool for Customer Care
Center (CCC) agents, support engineers, system administrators, management information systems
(MIS) personnel, and HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer end users, as appropriate.
The following information is included in this technical reference:
● Descriptions of drivers and platforms, with system modifications
● Procedures for installing and uninstalling software components
● Descriptions of various topics that are associated with the HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer, including engineering details
The following table describes the structure of this software technical manual.
Table 1-1 Software technical reference overview
Chapter
Chapter 1, Purpose and Scope
Chapter 2, Software description
Content
This chapter contains basic information about the HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer and its software:
● Overview of the HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer
● Printing-system software overview, including the following topics:
● System requirements
● Supported operating systems
● availability
● HP LaserJet software documentation
This chapter provides an overview of the printing-system software installer and print drivers:
● Windows software CD
ENWW Introduction 1
Table 1-1 Software technical reference overview (continued)
Chapter Content
Chapter 3, HP traditional print drivers for
Windows
Chapter 4, HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows
Chapter 5, Installing Windows printingsystem components
Chapter 6, Installation for Macintosh operating systems
Chapter 7, Engineering details
The chapter also contains general information about other software features, including the following topics:
● Driver configuration for Windows
● HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool
● International Color Consortium profiles
● PANTONE* color profiles
● HP Embedded Web Server
● HP Printer Utility for Macintosh (a new HP software feature)
● HP Web Jetadmin
This chapter provides detailed descriptions of the HP traditional PCL 6, PCL 5, and postscript emulation print drivers for Windows 98 and Windows Me.
This chapter provides detailed descriptions of the HP traditional PCL 6, PCL 5, and postscript emulation print unidrivers for Windows 2000, Windows XP, and
Windows Server 2003.
This chapter provides instructions for installing the HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer in Windows operating systems by using various installation methods
This chapter provides Instructions for installing the HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer in Macintosh operating systems
This chapter contains information about special topics that are either too about the following topics:
● [INTERNAL] Disabling Enterprise Autoconfiguration
● Media attributes
● [INTERNAL] HP Standalone Scrubber
● [INTERNAL] HP System Diagnostics
● Remote firmware update
● Printing print-ready documents
● Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems
For additional information about the location of information within these chapters, see the table of contents. An index is provided in the back of the manual.
Additional detailed information about the HP Color LaserJet 4700 printing-system software is published in an addendum to this STR. Information that is available only in the addendum includes:
● Lists of installed files
● System-modification information, such as changes to the registry and registry keys
● Descriptions of known software issues and solutions
2 Chapter 1 Purpose and scope ENWW
HP Color LaserJet 4700
The following table contains descriptions of the HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer features that are discussed in this STR. Product configurations might vary among countries/regions.
Table 1-2 HP Color LaserJet 4700 features
Models
Performance
Memory
User interface
Supported printer personalities
● Base model: HP Color LaserJet 4700 (part number
Q7491A)
● HP Color LaserJet 4700n (part number Q7492A)
● HP Color LaserJet 4700dn (part number Q7493A)
● HP Color LaserJet 4700dtn (part number Q7494A)
● HP Color LaserJet 4700ph+ (part number Q7495A)
● Prints up to 31 pages per minute (ppm) for letter-sized paper and up to 30 ppm for A4-sized paper
● First page prints in 10 seconds or less. The printer can be set to wake from sleep mode at a specific time each day.
● 160 megabytes (MB) of memory for the
HP Color LaserJet 4700 and HP Color LaserJet 4700n;
288 MB for the HP Color LaserJet 4700dn; 544 MB for the and HP Color LaserJet 4700dtn and HP Color
LaserJet 4700ph+.
NOTE Memory specification: The
HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer models use 200pin small outline dual inline memory modules
(SODIMM) that support 128 or 256 MB of random-access memory (RAM).
● Two open EIO slots
● Can be expanded to 544 MB: 512 MB of double data-rate synchronous random access memory (DDR-SRAM) plus
32 MB of memory on the formatter board
● Optional hard-disk drive can be added in an EIO slot (an internal hard-disk drive is included with the HP Color
LaserJet 4700ph+)
● Four-line back-lit graphical display on control panel
● Enhanced Help with animated graphics
● Embedded Web server to gain access to support and order supplies (network-connected printers)
● HP PCL 6
● HP PCL 5c
● PostScript® (PS) 3 emulation
● Portable document format (PDF)
ENWW HP Color LaserJet 4700 3
4
Table 1-2 HP Color LaserJet 4700 features (continued)
Hard-disk features ● Full job-storage features
● Proof and hold
● Private jobs
Environmental features
Font
Paper handling
● Quick copy
● Stored jobs
● Mopier mode
● Personal identification number (PIN) printing
● Fonts and forms
● Sleep-mode setting
● High content of recyclable components and materials
● Energy Star® compliant
● Restrictions of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Directive compliant
● Internal fonts are available for both printer command language (PCL) and postscript emulation
● Printer-matching screen fonts in TrueType format are available with the software solution
● HP Web Jetadmin-supported forms and fonts are on the disk
● Prints on media sizes from 77 mm x 127 mm (3 inches x
5 inches) up to 216 mm x 356 mm (8.5 inches x
14 inches) (Legal size)
● Tray 1 can process heavy-weight media from 60 g/m 2 to
220 g/m 2 (16 lb to 60 lb), as well as standard 80-lb cover stock.
● Tray 2 and the optional trays can process media up to
120 g/m 2 (32 lb) in weight
● Prints on a wide range of media types, including HP photo media, glossy papers, transparencies, heavy stock, labels, and envelopes
● Features adjustable gloss level on page by choosing the appropriate glossy media type
● Standard 100-sheet multipurpose paper tray (tray 1) supports Letter, Legal, Executive, 8.5 x 13, B5 (JIS),
Executive (JIS),16K, A4, A5, and custom media
● Standard 500-sheet paper feeder (tray 2) supports Letter,
Legal, Executive, 8.5 x 13, B5 (JIS), Executive (JIS),
16K, A4, A5, and custom media
● Up to four additional 500-sheet paper feeders (trays 3, 4,
5, and 6) support letter, legal, executive, 8.5 x 13,
B5 (JIS), Executive (JIS), 16K, A4, A5, and custom media
● Standard 500-sheet face-down output bin
Chapter 1 Purpose and scope ENWW
ENWW
Table 1-2 HP Color LaserJet 4700 features (continued)
● The duplexing unit for automatic two-sided printing
(duplexing) is standard on the HP Color
LaserJet 4700dn, HP Color LaserJet 4700dtn, and
HP Color LaserJet 4700ph+ printers.
Accessories
● Automatic duplexing of 120-g/m 2 (32-lb) paper at full speed produces up to 30 sides (15 sheets) per minute.
● The HP 750-Sheet Stapler/Stacker prints up to
750 sheets with job offset and staples up to 30 sheets
(optional for the HP Color LaserJet 4700dn and the
HP Color LaserJet 4700dtn; standard on the HP Color
LaserJet 4700ph+).
● Printer hard disk, which provides storage for fonts and macros as well as additional features for Job Storage; standard on the HP Color LaserJet 4700ph+
● Small outline dual inline memory modules (SODIMMs)
● Flash memory slots for additional fonts and firmware upgrades
● Printer stand
● The HP 750-Sheet Stapler/Stacker (standard on the
HP Color LaserJet 4700ph+)
Connectivity
Supplies
NOTE The HP 750-Sheet Stapler/Stacker is optional for the HP Color LaserJet 4700dn and
HP Color LaserJet 4700dtn. It can be installed only on printers that are equipped with the automatic duplexing unit.
● Up to four additional 500-sheet paper feeders (trays 3, 4,
5, and 6)
● Enhanced input/output (EIO) card slots for optional connectivity. (Network connection through an
HP Jetdirect embedded print server is standard on the
HP Color LaserJet 4700n, HP Color LaserJet 4700dn,
HP Color LaserJet 4700dtn, and HP Color
LaserJet 4700ph+ models.)
● Universal serial bus (USB) 2.0 connection
● HP Jetdirect embedded print server for network connectivity without using an EIO slot
● Standard bidirectional parallel cable interface (IEEE
1284-C compliant)
● Both USB and parallel connections are supported, but cannot be used at the same time.
● The supplies status page contains information about toner level, page count, and estimated pages remaining.
● High-capacity no-shake cartridge with automatic tonerseal removal feature
● The printer checks for authentic HP print cartridges when a cartridge is installed.
HP Color LaserJet 4700 5
Table 1-2 HP Color LaserJet 4700 features (continued)
● High-capacity (5,000) staple cartridge with staples-low and staples-out messaging
● Internet-enabled supply-ordering capabilities through the
HP Embedded Web Server
6 Chapter 1 Purpose and scope ENWW
Printing-system software
This section contains information about the following topics:
●
●
●
System requirements
The section lists system requirements for installing and using the HP Color LaserJet 4700 printingsystem software on each of these supported operating systems:
●
●
●
●
Windows
The following list shows the system requirements for installing and using the HP Color LaserJet 4700 printing-system software on each of the supported operating systems:
● Pentium® or compatible processor
● Minimum 16-color/grayscale display with 640-by-480 pixel resolution (video graphics array [VGA])
● Same amount of RAM as the minimum requirements for the operating system
● 93 MB of available hard-disk space (on the same partition as the operating system) for full installation
● Onboard parallel port, USB port, or network connection
Macintosh
● PowerPC processor
● Mac OS 9 V9.2.2 or Mac OS X V10.1.5 and later.
● 256 MB RAM
● 110 MB available disk space
Linux
For information about Linux support for the printer, see the HP Linux Web site:
● www.hp.com/go/linux .
ENWW Printing-system software 7
UNIX
For information about UNIX support for the printer, see the following Web site:
● www.hp.com/go/jetdirectunix_software
Supported operating systems
Windows operating systems provide full-featured support for the HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer.
Operating systems that are not described in this document provide varying levels of functionality.
Throughout this manual, Windows XP is used to denote Windows XP Home Edition, Windows XP
Professional, and Windows Server 2003 unless noted otherwise.
Information relating to networking functions is specific to products that have network capabilities.
If your computer is running a 64-bit Windows operating system, you must install the corresponding 64bit print driver. For instructions, see
Installing print drivers by using Add Printer
The HP Color LaserJet 4700 has not been tested with and is not supported in the Windows 3.1x or
Windows 95 operating systems.
The Windows NT 4.0 operating system does not support the HP Color LaserJet 4700. Print drivers for the printer are not included on the printing-system software CD and are not available on the Web. Other drivers might work on the printer, but printing quality might be compromised and their use is not supported by HP.
For more information about the HP Color LaserJet 4700, go to: www.hp.com/support/clj4700
Standalone drivers
The following operating systems support the HP Color LaserJet 4700 printing-system software, including the HP traditional PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation drivers and unidrivers:
● Windows 98
● Windows Me
● Windows 2000 (Service packs 1 and 2)
● Windows XP Home Edition (32-bit)
● Windows XP Professional (Service Pack 1 and later; 32-bit and 64-bit)
● Windows Server 2003 (32-bit and 64-bit)
Print driver support in other operating systems
The HP Color LaserJet 4700 is also supported in the following operating environments:
● Mac OS 9 V9.2.2
● Mac OS X (V10.1.5 or later)
● Linux (available at www.hp.com/go/linuxprinting )
● UNIX (available at www.hp.com/go/jetdirectunix_software )
● UNIX model scripts. Availableonly on the Web: www.hp.com/go/unixmodelscripts .
8 Chapter 1 Purpose and scope ENWW
ENWW
● Windows Terminal Server
● Citrix Terminal Server
● Windows Cluster Server 8
● HP OpenVMS (available at h71000.www7.hp.com/openvms/print/ )
● Tru64 UNIX printing. For further information, go to h30097.www3.hp.com/printing/ .
● SAP printing. For further information, go to www.hp.com/go/sap/print .
● HP Install Network Printer Wizard (INPW). Available only from the Web site: www.hp.com/go/ inpw_software .
Availability
This section provides information about the availability of the HP Color LaserJet 4700 printing-system software and related software and firmware. Printing-system software on a CD is available from
HP fulfillment centers.
Printing-system software on the Web
All software that is contained on the installation CD is also available on the Web.
Web deployment is the preferred method for obtaining the latest software. The Web site offers an option for automatic e-mail notification about new software releases.
NOTE This STR describes drivers that are shipped with the printing-system software CD. This
STR does not describe drivers that might be released for use by support personnel.
Printing-system software
The HP Color LaserJet 4700 printing-system software is available for download from www.hp.com/go/ clj4700_software .
NOTE Only 32-bit print drivers are available on the printing-system software CD. If your computer is running a 64-bit operating system, you must install a 64-bit print driver. The 64-bit print drivers for Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 are available on the Web at www.hp.com/go/clj4700_software .
For information about driver support in various operating systems, see
For more information about installing printer drivers for Windows, see
Installing Windows printingsystem components .
Software component availability
The following table lists the availability of HP LaserJet software components by operating system.
These drivers are available on the HP Web site: www.hp.com/go/clj4700_software
Printing-system software 9
NOTE All components listed below are available both on the printing-system software CD and on the Web, except for Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 64-bit drivers and components, which are available only on the Web.
Table 1-3 Software component availability for HP Color LaserJet 4700
Component Windows 98 and
Windows Me
Windows 2000 and
Windows XP
(32-bit)
Windows XP and
Windows Ser ver 2003 (64bit)
Macintosh
Drivers
HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver and HP Traditional
PCL 6 Driver
HP PCL 6 Unidriver and HP PCL 5 Unidriver x
PS Emulation Unidriver
PS Emulation Driver (Windows 98 and
Windows Me)
HP Driver Preconfiguration
Installer
Common Windows Installer
Customization Utility Wizard x x
CD Browser
Add Printer Wizard install
Web Registration
Mac OS 9 V9.2.2 PPDs x
1
Mac OS X V10.1.5 and later
This information also applies to Windows Server 2003.
x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
In-box printing-system software CDs
The software CD for the HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer contains a variety of files for installing the printing-system software on your computer. This section describes the files that are available on the software CD and provides additional information about support and availability.
CD structure
The HP Color LaserJet 4700 printing-system software CD is divided into two partitions: one for installing the product in Windows operating systems, and the other for Macintosh operating systems. The files include documentation files and files that are required to install and uninstall the printing-system components.
10 Chapter 1 Purpose and scope ENWW
ENWW
HP LaserJet software CD, Windows partition
The root directory in the Windows partition of the software CD contains the AUTORUN.EXE file,
SETUP.EXE file, and the following directories and support files:
● 0000
● autorun
● Drivers
● Fonts
● HW
● Manuals
● System32
● Temp
● WebReg
The printing-system files for each language reside in the following directories:
● Drivers
● Manuals
File layouts differ by language for each regional version of the software CD.
To view the files, insert the HP Color LaserJet 4700 printing-system software CD, right-click Start, click
Explore, and then select the CD-ROM drive.
HP LaserJet software CD, Macintosh partition
The files contained in the Macintosh partition of the HP LaserJet software CD are grouped by language and reside in the following directories:
● Mac OS X (installer for Mac OS X operating system)
● Mac OS 9 (installer for Mac OS 9 operating system)
File layouts differ by language for each regional version of the software CD.
CD versions
The HP Color LaserJet 4700 printing-system software CD is available in five versions, each of which contains printing-system software in various languages, as follows:
● CD AM – Americas and Europe (Part No. Q7491-60101):
● DE = German (Deutsch)
● EN = English
● ES = Spanish (Español)
● FR = French (Français)
Printing-system software 11
● IT = Italian (Italiano)
● NL = Dutch (Nederland)
● PT = Brazilian Portuguese (Português)
● CA = Catalan (Català)
● CD WE – Western Europe and Arabic (Part No. Q7491-60102):
● AR = Arabic
● DN = Danish (Dansk)
● EN = English
● FR = French (Français)
● CD NE – Northern Europe and Russian (Part No. Q7491-60103):
● EN = English
● FI = Finnish (Suomi)
● NO = Norwegian (Norsk)
● RU = Russian (Russ)
● SV = Swedish (Svenska)
● TR = Turkish (Turkçe)
● CD EE – Eastern Europe (Part No. Q7491-60104):
● CZ = Czech (Cesky)
● EL = Greek
● EN = English
● HE = Hebrew
● HU = Hungarian (Magyar)
● PL = Polish (Polski)
● CD AS – Asia (Part No. Q7491-60105):
● EN = English
● JA = Japanese
● KO = Korean
● TH = Thai
● ZHCN = Simplified Chinese
● ZHTW = Traditional Chinese
Each of the following tables lists one of the software CD versions, along with the printing-system software components that are supported in each language.
12 Chapter 1 Purpose and scope ENWW
ENWW
NOTE Drivers for various languages do not necessarily correspond to geographic countries/ regions. European languages, for instance, are distributed on three CDs.
Table 1-4 CD AM – Americas and Europe
Component CA
HP Traditional Postscript 3
Emulation Driver
HP Traditional
PCL 6 Driver
HP Traditional
PCL 5 Driver
HP PCL 6 Unidriver
HP PCL 5 Unidriver
PS Emulation Unidriver
Common Windows
Installer x x x
Add Printer Wizard
Installer
Customization Utility
Wizard
CD Browser
HP Preconfiguration
HP Color LaserJet 4700
User Guide (.PDF)
HP Color LaserJet 4700
User Guide (.CHM)
HP Jetdirect
Administrator's Guide
HP Color LaserJet 4700
Printing System Install
Notes
HP Embedded Web
Server User Guide
HP Device Installer
Customization Wizard x x x x x x x x
DE x x x x x x x x x x
EN x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
ES x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
FR x x x x x x x x x x
IT x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
NL x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
PT x x x x x x x x x x
Table 1-5 CD WE – Western Europe and Arabic
Component AR
HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver x
HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver x
DN x x
EN x x
FR x x
Printing-system software 13
Table 1-5 CD WE – Western Europe and Arabic (continued)
Component AR DN
HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver
HP PCL 6 Unidriver
HP PCL 5 Unidriver
PS Emulation Unidriver
Common Windows Installer
Add Printer Wizard Installer
HP Device Installer Customization Wizard
CD Browser
HP Driver Preconfiguration Support Guide
HP Color LaserJet 4700 User Guide (.PDF)
HP Color LaserJet 4700 User Guide (.CHM) x x x
HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide
HP Color LaserJet 4700 Printing System
Install Notes
HP Embedded Web Server User Guide
HP Device Installer Customization Wizard x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
Table 1-6 CD NE – Northern Europe and Russian
Component
HP Traditional Postscript 3
Emulation Driver
HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver
HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver x x
EN x x x
FI x
HP PCL 6 Unidriver
HP PCL 5 Unidriver
PS Emulation Unidriver
Common Windows Installer
Add Printer Wizard Installer
HP Device Installer
Customization Wizard
CD Browser
HP Driver Preconfiguration
Support Guide
HP Color LaserJet 4700 User
Guide (.PDF) x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
NO x x x x x x x x x x x x
RU x x x x x x
EN x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
SV x x x x x x x x x x
FR x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
TR x x x x
14 Chapter 1 Purpose and scope ENWW
ENWW
Table 1-6 CD NE – Northern Europe and Russian (continued)
Component EN FI NO x x HP Color LaserJet 4700 User
Guide (.CHM) x x HP Jetdirect Administrator's
Guide
HP Color LaserJet 4700
Printing System Install Notes x
HP Embedded Web Server
User Guide
HP Device Installer
Customization Wizard x x x x x x x x x x
Table 1-7 D EE – Eastern Europe
Component CZ
HP Traditional Postscript 3
Emulation Driver
HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver
HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver
HP PCL 6 Unidriver
HP PCL 5 Unidriver x
PS Emulation Unidriver
Common Windows Installer
Add Printer Wizard Installer
HP Device Installer
Customization Wizard
CD Browser
HP Driver Preconfiguration
Support Guide
HP Color LaserJet 4700 User
Guide (.PDF)
HP Color LaserJet 4700 User
Guide (.CHM)
HP Jetdirect Administrator's
Guide x x x
HP Color LaserJet 4700 Printing
System Install Notes x
HP Device Installer
Customization Wizard x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
EL x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
EN x x x x x x x x x x
RU x x x x x x x x x x x
HE x x x x x x
SV x x x x x
TR x x x x x x x x x x x x x
PL x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
HU x x x x x x
Printing-system software 15
Table 1-8 CD AS – Asia
Component EN
HP Traditional Postscript 3
Emulation Driver
HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver
HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver
HP PCL 6 Unidriver
HP PCL 5 Unidriver
PS Emulation Unidriver
Common Windows Installer
Add Printer Wizard Installer x
HP Device Installer
Customization Wizard
CD Browser
HP Driver Preconfiguration
Support Guide
HP Color LaserJet 4700 User
Guide (.PDF) x
HP Color LaserJet 4700 User
Guide (.CHM)
HP Jetdirect Administrator's
Guide x x
HP Color LaserJet 4700 Printing
System Install Notes x
HP Device Installer
Customization Wizard x x x x x x x x x x x
JA x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
KO x x x x
TH x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
ZHTW x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
ZHCN x x
16 Chapter 1 Purpose and scope ENWW
HP LaserJet documentation
The following figure shows the printer documentation screen, which appears when you click printer
documentation on the main screen of the HP Color LaserJet 4700 printing-system software CD.
ENWW
Figure 1-1 Installation software CD printer documentation screen
The following table lists the availability of HP Color LaserJet 4700 printing-system documentation by operating system.
Table 1-9 Documentation availability
Document
HP Color LaserJet 4700 User Guide (.PDF file)
HP Color LaserJet 4700 User Guide (.CHM file)
HP Color LaserJet 4700 Printing System Install Notes
HP Embedded Web Server User Guide
HP Driver Preconfiguration Support Guide
HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide
HP Device Installer Customization Wizard x x x x x x x
Windows 98/
Me x x x x x x x
Windows 2000/XP/
Server 2003
Macintosh x x x
HP LaserJet documentation 17
Access to HP LaserJet documents depends on the type of document and its location. Some documents can be opened from the CD Browser. Others appear on the software CD and can be opened by navigating to the folder where they reside. Still others are available on the Web through links in the CD
Browser or CD folders. Documents are available in the following file formats:
● Portable Document Format (.PDF). The HP Color LaserJet 4700 printing-system software CD includes Adobe Acrobat Reader for viewing online documentation. If your system does not have
Adobe Acrobat Reader 4.0 or later installed, clicking any of the links to documentation that is provided in the .PDF file format opens a version of Adobe Acrobat Reader software that runs from the HP Color LaserJet 4700 printing-system software CD. The Adobe Acrobat Reader software is
not installed on your computer and can only run while the printing-system software CD is in the
CD-ROM drive.
● Compiled HTML (.CHM). When you click a documentation link to a .CHM document, a Microsoft
HTML Viewer opens the file on your computer screen.
● Hypertext Markup (.HTM). When you click a documentation link to an .HTM document, a Web browser opens the file on your computer screen.
● Rich Text format (.RTF). This is a text file. You can navigate to files and open them in Microsoft
Word or Microsoft WordPad.
HP Color LaserJet 4700 User Guide
The HP Color LaserJet 4700 User Guide describes the basic features of the product.
To view this guide from the software CD, follow these steps:
1.
In the main screen of the CD browser, click printer documentation.
2.
Click view user guide.
The guide opens as a Windows Help file (.CHM file). This readable, onscreen version of the guide is provided in accordance with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
You can also gain access to the file by following these steps:
1.
Insert the software CD into the CD-ROM drive.
2.
Navigate to the Manuals\<language> folder.
3.
Open the file that has the appropriate file name:
CLJ4700_USE_XXWW.CHM
NOTE The "XX" in the file name corresponds to the language. For instance, the file name for the French version of the guide is CLJ4700_USE_FRWW.CHM
The HP Color LaserJet 4700 User Guide is provided as a .PDF file, which you can print. To print the guide, follow these steps:
1.
In the CD Browser, click printer documentation.
2.
Click user guide (printer friendly). The guide opens.
3.
Print the guide.
18 Chapter 1 Purpose and scope ENWW
ENWW
You can also gain access to the file by following these steps:
1.
Insert the software CD into the CD-ROM drive.
2.
Navigate to the Manuals\<language> folder.
3.
Open the file that has the appropriate file name:
CLJ4700_USE_XXWW.PDF
NOTE The "XX" in the file name corresponds to the language. For instance, the file name for the French version of the guide is CLJ4700_USE_FRWW.PDF
When you have the file open, you can click File and then click Save As to save a copy of the file to another location.
HP Color LaserJet 4700 Printing System Install Notes
The HP Color LaserJet 4700 Printing System Install Notes is .HTM file that contains important information about product features, instructions for installing the printing-system software, and technical assistance.
To view this file from the software CD, click printer documentation on the main screen of the CD
Browser, and then click install notes.
To view this guide from the software CD, follow these steps:
1.
In the main screen of the CD browser, click printer documentation.
2.
Click install notes.
You can also gain access to the file by following these steps:
1.
Insert the software CD into the CD-ROM drive.
2.
Navigate to the Manuals\<language> folder.
3.
Open the file that has the appropriate file name:
CLJ4700_INSTALL-NOTE_XXWW.HTM
NOTE The "XX" in the file name corresponds to the language. For instance, the file name for the French version of the document is CLJ4700_INSTALL-NOTE_FRWW.HTM.
HP Embedded Web Server User Guide
The HP Embedded Web Server User Guide (in .PDF format) provides information about device status, settings, and networking for the HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer.
To view this file from the software CD, click printer documentation on the main screen of the CD
Browser, and then click install notes.
To view this guide from the software CD, follow these steps:
1.
In the main screen of the CD browser, click printer documentation.
2.
Click embedded web server guide.
HP LaserJet documentation 19
You can also gain access to the file by following these steps:
1.
Insert the software CD into the CD-ROM drive.
2.
Navigate to the Manuals\<language> folder.
3.
Open the file that has the appropriate file name:
CLJ4700_EWS_XXWW.PDF
NOTE The "XX" in the file name corresponds to the language. In French, the file name is
CLJ4700_EWS_FRWW.PDF.
When you have the file open, you can click File and then click Save As to save a copy of the file to another location.
HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide
The HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide is a network administrator's guide (in .PDF format) that contains information about connecting the product directly to a network.
To view this file from the software CD, click printer documentation on the main screen of the CD
Browser, and then click install notes.
To view this guide from the software CD, follow these steps:
1.
In the main screen of the CD browser, click printer documentation.
2.
Click hp jetdirect guide.
You can also gain access to the file by following these steps:
1.
Insert the software CD into the CD-ROM drive.
2.
Navigate to the Manuals\<language> folder.
3.
Open the file that has the appropriate file name:
HPJDIAG_XXWW.PDF
NOTE The "XX" in the file name corresponds to the language. In French, the file name is
HPJDIAG_FRWW.PDF.
When you have the file open, you can click File and then click Save As to save a copy of the file to another location.
HP Driver Preconfiguration Support Guide
You can gain access to the file by following these steps:
1.
Insert the software CD into the CD-ROM drive.
2.
Navigate to the Manuals\<language> folder.
3.
Open the file that has the appropriate file name:
PRECONFIG_SUPPORT_ENWW.PDF
20 Chapter 1 Purpose and scope ENWW
NOTE The HP Driver Preconfiguration Support Guide is available only in English on the software CD.
When you have the file open, you can click File and then click Save As to save a copy of the file to another location.
HP Device Installer Customization Wizard
The HP Device Installer Customization Wizard (in.RTF format) provides network administrators with information about options and installation settings that can be selected for the Installer Customization
Wizard.
You can gain access to the file by following these steps:
1.
Insert the software CD into the CD-ROM drive.
2.
Navigate to the Manuals\<language> folder.
3.
Open the file that has the appropriate file name:
CUSTOMIZATION_README_XXWW.RTF
NOTE The "XX" in the file name corresponds to the language. In French, the file name is
CUSTOMIZATION_README_FRWW.RTF.
When you have the file open, you can click File and then click Save As to save a copy of the file to another location.
ENWW HP LaserJet documentation 21
22 Chapter 1 Purpose and scope ENWW
2 Software description
Introduction
The HP Color LaserJet 4700 comes with software and installers for Microsoft Windows and Apple
Computer, Inc. Linux and UNIX systems are supported, and software is available on the Web. For information about specific system installers, drivers, and components, see the section that corresponds to that system.
NOTE The HP Toolbox is not available on the HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer.
This chapter contains information about the following topics:
●
●
Driver Configuration for Windows
●
HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool
●
International Color Consortium profiles
●
●
●
HP Printer Utility for Macintosh
●
ENWW Introduction 23
Printing-system software
This section contains information about the following topics:
●
●
Macintosh printing-system software
Windows Software features
This section contains information about the following topics:
●
●
Printing system and installer
The following sections contain information about the printing-system software and the installer on the software CD that came with the product.
HP Color LaserJet 4700 printing-system software CD for Windows systems
For the Microsoft® Windows® environment (Windows 98, Windows Millennium Edition (Windows Me),
Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003), the HP Color LaserJet 4700 printing-system software CD provides an interactive CD browser that you can use to install the print drivers and related components, and to gain access to online user documentation, a customization utility, Adobe® Acrobat®
Reader software, and optional HP software.
The following figure shows the main screen of the HP Color LaserJet 4700 printing-system software
CD, which appears when you insert the printing-system software CD in your CD-ROM drive. If the screen does not appear when you insert the software CD, follow these steps to open the CD browser:
1.
Click Start.
2.
Click Run.
3.
Click Browse.... and navigate to the root directory of the software CD
4.
Double-click the SETUP.EXE file to start the installer.
24 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
ENWW
Figure 2-1 Installation software CD browser
The main screen of the software CD contains installation options in the upper-left panel and documentation options in the lower-left panel. As you move your cursor over each option, a description of the option appears above the product image.
NOTE The options on your product might differ from the illustration.
install printer. The installation wizard guides you through the HP Color LaserJet 4700 printing-system software installation. You are given the choice of performing a Typical Installation, a Minimum
Installation, or a Custom Installation. If you select Typical Installation, only the necessary software is installed. If you select Custom Installation, you can select the components that you want to install.
installer customization wizard. Use this wizard to customize the HP Color LaserJet 4700 installer by presetting the installation options in a response file. The installer that you have customized can then be used for silent, unattended installation.
register product. Use this option to register your product online. After Web registration, you can gain access to support and services, manage your profile, and sign up for free support alerts, driver notices, and personalized newsletters.
printer documentation. Use this option to view the HP Color LaserJet 4700 user documentation. The following document options are available when you click this option:
● user guide (interactive)
● user guide (printer friendly)
Printing-system software 25
● install notes
● embedded web server guide
● hp jetdirect guide
NOTE If your system does not have Adobe Acrobat Reader 4.0 or later installed, clicking any of the links to documentation that is in portable document format (.PDF) opens a version of Adobe
Acrobat Reader that runs from the HP Color LaserJet 4700 printing-system software CD. The
CD Browser version of Acrobat Reader is in English only, but can be used to open localized versions of .PDF documents. The Adobe Acrobat Reader software is not installed on your computer and can only run while the printing-system software CD is in the CD-ROM drive. Adobe
Acrobat Reader is also available at the following Web site: www.adobe.com
.
support. To increase productivity and get the most use from your HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer, you can view a list of optional software programs and links to HP Web sites. The following options are available:
● Click hp web jetadmin to download HP Web Jetadmin software from the Web for a Web browserbased network-management tool.
● Click color matching information for information about simulating PANTONE*® MATCHING
SYSTEM colors and installing International Color Consortium (ICC) color profiles for the
HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer.
● Click supplies for information about ordering HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer supplies.
● Click product information for HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer support information and updates.
● Click hp.com to go to the HP home Web page for information about products and services, support, drivers, and HP online stores.
Installer features
The common installer is designed to provide a simple and consistent installation method for the product.
The common installer is available for the Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and
Windows Server 2003 operating systems.
The common installer offers the following features:
● The HP Color LaserJet 4700 printing-system software CD features an interactive software
interface. See HP Color LaserJet 4700 printing-system software CD for Windows systems .
● Network connection is integrated so that you can install drivers and connect to a networked product in a single process.
● The selection dialog box sets the operating-system language as the default language (for
Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 only). You can use the installer to select any of the languages on the HP Color LaserJet 4700 printing-system software CD.
The HP Color LaserJet 4700 printing-system software CD also includes the following features:
● The HP LaserJet Uninstaller Utility
● The HP Customization Utility for custom installations
26 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
ENWW
All of the Windows system components are installed by using the HP Color LaserJet 4700 series printing-system installer. The installer automatically detects your language of choice and your operating system. You can select the type of installation that you prefer: Typical Installation, Custom Installation, or Minimum Installation.
HP LaserJet print drivers
HP Color LaserJet 4700 print drivers provide the printing features and communication between the computer and the product. The printing system includes software for end users and network administrators who are working in the following operating environments:
● Microsoft Windows 98 and Windows Me
● Windows 2000, Windows XP (32-bit and 64-bit), and Windows Server 2003 (32-bit and 64-bit)
● Apple Mac OS 9.x and later, and Mac OS X (V10.1 and later)
In Windows operating systems, automatic configuration, driver updates after a new configuration, and preconfiguration features are available with the HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer.
NOTE For the latest information about the printing-system software components, see the readme files on the CD. For additional information about installing the printing-system software, see the HP Color LaserJet 4700 Printing System Install Notes on the printing-system software
CD.
All of the drivers provide access to the paper-handling and print-quality features, and are described in chapters 3 and 4 of this manual.
HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation drivers
All of the Windows drivers are supported by Microsoft 32-bit operating systems. Separate versions of the HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers are available for Windows XP and
Windows Server 2003 64-bit operating systems. These 64-bit drivers are not included on the printingsystem software CD, but they can be downloaded from the following HP Web site: www.hp.com/go/clj4700_software
The following drivers are available on the HP Color LaserJet 4700 printing-system software CD:
● The HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver for Windows 98, and Windows Me
● The HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver for Windows 98 and Windows Me
● The HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver for Windows 98 and Windows Me
● The HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation 3 emulation unidrivers for Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003
NOTE If you select a Typical Installation during installation of the printing-system software, the
HP PCL 6 Unidriver is installed by default for Windows 2000, Windows XP, and
Windows Server 2003, and the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver is installed by default for
Windows 98 and Windows Me.
Printing-system software 27
Table 2-1 Print drivers included with the HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer
Operating System 1 PCL 6 PCL 5 PS emulation
Windows 98 and Windows Me
Windows 2000
Windows XP
Windows Server 2003
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1
Macintosh OS X
Not all product features are available from all drivers or operating systems. See the online Help in your driver for information about the features that are available.
Print-driver version numbers for Windows operating systems
The HP Color LaserJet 4700 PCL 6 and PCL 5 traditional print drivers are supported by the Windows 98 and Windows Me operating systems. The PS Emulation Driver software provides postscript feature support for the HP Color LaserJet 4700. The HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers are supported by Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003.
If you are using an HP traditional PCL driver, you can view the print driver version number by clicking the HP logo in the lower-left corner of the following HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver or HP Traditional
PCL 5 Driver tabs:
● Finishing
● Effects
● Paper
● Job Storage
● Basics
If you are using an HP unidriver in a Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 environment, follow these steps to find driver-version information:
1.
Click Start.
2.
Select Settings.
3.
Click Printers and Faxes (in Windows XP and Windows Server 2003) or Printers (in Windows
2000).
4.
Right-click the printer icon.
5.
Click Properties.
6.
Click the About tab.
NOTE For a list of print drivers, updated HP printing-system software, and product-support information, go to: www.hp.com/go/clj4700_software
28 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
ENWW
Macintosh printing-system software
This section discusses the following topics:
●
●
Mac OS 9 Classic support
Mac OS 9 Classic is not fully supported by Hewlett-Packard. It is not a native operating system but a virtual operating system running on top of Mac OS X (HP software is designed and tested for native operating systems). Additionally, no support is offered for Virtual PC, also a virtual operating system.
Information known to HP on specific issues related to the classic environment or driver may be relayed to customers.
At this time, support offered for Mac OS 9 Classic is on a "best effort" basis. HP understands that because certain Apple computers may not offer native Mac OS 9, Classic is the only option. "Best effort" support will attempt the following:
● Installation of the software/hardware
● Test installation to verify software/hardware works
● Limited troubleshooting
When problems arise within the Mac OS 9 Classic environment, approved software or hardware, HP uses the following resources to resolve the problem:
● Internal resources, such as knowledgebase systems, engineers, and resource desk
● Apple support
● The Web
● Known solutions
If these resources do not resolve the problem, contact Apple or the virtual operating system vendor.
While issues occurring with virtual operating systems are not supported, HP continues to offer full support for its products in native Mac OS 9, where the supplied product software is designed to support
Mac OS 9 and is within the normal support period.
Macintosh printing system
The HP Color LaserJet 4700 printing system for Macintosh is composed of the Print Center for
Mac OS X (V10.1.5 and later) and the Apple LaserWriter driver for Mac OS 9.2.2, which are provided with the operating system, and HP-created PPD files. The driver uses these files to determine the features and postscript commands that the product supports. Bidirectional support in AppleTalk connections supports autoconfiguration of the software. The following are components that can be installed:
● The HP Color LaserJet Installer for Mac OS 9 V9.2.2 and Mac OS X V10.1.5 and later
● SYSTEM/EXTENSIONS/PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS (for Mac OS X Classic)
● LIBRARY/PRINTERS/PPDS/CONTENTS/RESOURCES/LANGUAGE.LPROJ (for Mac OS X)
Printing-system software 29
● The HP Printer Selector (for Mac OS X V10.1.5 or later)
● Install notes
30 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
Driver Configuration for Windows
The HP LaserJet PCL 6 and PCL 5 traditional drivers for Windows and the HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers feature bidirectional communication technology which, in supported environments, provide automatic discovery and driver configuration for product accessories at the time of installation.
Some accessories that are automatically discovered and configured include the duplexing unit, optional paper trays, printer hard disk, and dual inline memory modules (DIMMs).
Driver Autoconfiguration
Automatic discovery and driver configuration through bidirectional communication occurs in the following circumstances:
● Upon installation of a print driver, when using Enterprise Autoconfiguration (EAC)
● When using the Update Now feature for a driver that is already installed
However, as shown in the following table, driver autoconfiguration and EAC are not available in
Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 operating systems over a direct connection when the HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer is installed by using the Add Printer Wizard.
Table 2-2 Availability of automatic discovery and driver configuration through bidirectional communication in
Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003
Connection type
Network
Direct connection
Add Printer Wizard install
Yes
No
Common installer
Yes
Yes
Bidirectional communication
In environments that support bidirectional communication, the computer communicates with the product during installation, determines the physical configuration, and then configures the driver accordingly.
Bidirectional communication is the capability of the product to respond to data inquiries from the computer and report information back, such as what type of print media is available or what accessories are connected to the product. Bidirectional communication depends on your network operating system and on the type of connection you have between your computer and the HP Color LaserJet 4700. If the connection does not have this capability (that is, if it has no bidirectional mode), it can only accept commands from the host and cannot report information back to the host computer.
Enterprise AutoConfiguration
Enterprise AutoConfiguration (EAC) uses bidirectional communication to provide autoconfiguration functionality for installation of the print driver over a network, whether you use the installer on your printing-system software CD or the Add Printer wizard to install the driver. Driver installation that includes
EAC is configured with the same settings as the physical configuration of the product. Configuration occurs without user interaction.
If bidirectional-communication software has been installed previously, EAC is not activated, and the preexisting bidirectional-communication software is used to configure the print driver.
If bidirectional communication software has not been installed, EAC installs bidirectional-communication software that allows it to communicate with the product and automatically match the print driver with the
ENWW Driver Configuration for Windows 31
actual product configuration. EAC is activated during installation of the driver or whenever the Update
Now feature is used.
If the configuration of the HP Color LaserJet 4700 changes after installation, the driver can be automatically updated with the new configuration in environments that support bidirectional
communication by using the Update Now feature. For more information, see Update Now .
The following tables show the availability of EAC for various operating systems and network environments that support bidirectional communication.
Table 2-3 EAC availability in Microsoft Windows and Microsoft Share
Method Connection type Microsoft Windows
98 Me 2000 XP
Microsoft Share
2000/XP host with 2000/XP client
Installer Direct connect
Network
Parallel
USB
Jetdirect
Standard
TCP/IP
TCP/IP (HP) x
TCP/IP
(MS) x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
Add Printer Direct connect
Parallel
USB x x x x x x x x
Network Jetdirect TCP/IP x x x x x
Standard TCP/IP (HP) x x x
1
2
TCP/IP
(MS) x x x
This column represents the following Microsoft Share configurations: 1. Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 Server host with Windows NT 4.0, Windows 98, or Windows Me client. 2. Windows NT 4.0 host with Windows 2000, Windows XP,
Windows Server 2003, Windows 98, or Windows Me client. 3. Windows 98 or Windows Me host with any client.
In this environment, client machines use Point and Print to download the configured driver from the host.
Table 2-4 EAC availability in Novell Netware environments
Method Connection type Novell
Netware 4.x
Netware 5.x
Bindery queue NDS queue Bindery queue
Network Jetdirect
Standard
TCP/IP
TCP/IP (HP) x x x
1
Bidirectional functionality is supported only with the client software from Novell. It is not supported with Microsoft Client Service for NetWare.
32 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
ENWW
Update Now
If you have modified the configuration of the HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer since installation, the driver can be automatically updated with the new configuration in environments that support bidirectional communication. Use the Update Now feature to automatically reflect the new configuration in the driver.
For example, if the HP Color LaserJet 4700 is installed and an optional paper-handling accessory is added later, you can use the Update Now feature to query the product and update the settings to match the new product configuration.
The feature automatically updates the registry and changes the configuration information that appears on the Configure tab if you are using an HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver or HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver, and on the Device Settings tab if you are using an HP PCL 6, PCL 5, or PS emulation unidriver.
If you are using an HP PCL 6, PCL 5, or PS emulation unidriver, you must select Update Now through the Automatic Configuration setting in Device Settings tab.
If you are using an HP traditional PCL 6 or PCL 5 driver, you must click the Update Now button on the
Configure tab.
The Update Now feature is not available with the HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver.
NOTE The Update Now feature is not supported in environments where shared Windows 2000 or Windows XP clients are connected to Windows 2000 or Windows XP hosts.
HP Driver Preconfiguration
HP Driver Preconfiguration is a software architecture and set of tools that permits HP printing-system software to be customized and distributed in managed corporate printing environments. Using HP Driver
Preconfiguration, information technology (IT) administrators in corporate and enterprise environments can preconfigure the printing and device defaults for HP print drivers before installing the drivers in the network environment.
HP Driver Preconfiguration is most beneficial when configuring print drivers for multiple workstations or print servers for print queues that share the same configuration. Two types of features can be configured: device settings and printing-preferences settings. The driver is configured to match the product hardware so that gaining access to all of the product accessories through the driver is enabled correctly
(for example, for duplexing units and additional input trays). Most driver feature settings can also be configured.
HP Driver Preconfiguration configures the driver to match the accessories installed on the product, or to match the settings that IT administrators make in the configuration (.CFG) file (for example, optional trays, total amount of memory, job-storage settings, or mopier settings).
The preconfiguration process consists of three basic steps: driver acquisition, driver preconfiguration, and driver installation and deployment. These steps can be accomplished in different ways, depending on the tool that is being used to define the configuration.
The configuration process for driver preconfiguration is supported through three distinct tools. All three are designed with the same basic user-interface (UI) controls for interacting with the .CFG file, but are packaged differently, either to support established product installation workflows or to leave the
Driver Configuration for Windows 33
deployment and installation of the driver entirely up to the user. The following tools support driver preconfiguration:
● HP Driver Configuration Editor. The HP Driver Configuration Editor is a small standalone
Windows software program that the administrator can use to open the .CFG file that is associated with a particular driver and make modifications that are applied when that driver is installed on the target computer. It is intended for use in environments that have an established process for deploying drivers. This is the preconfiguration tool of choice to support any Novell or HP Print Server
Appliance (PSA) Point and Print environments. It is used in the way that any ordinary Windows software program is used.
The HP Driver Configuration Editor is available at the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/ hpdpc_sw
● The HP Web Jetadmin Driver Configuration Plugin. HP Web Jetadmin provides a queuecreation program that can be used to create printer queues on any Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 or workstation. The HP Web Jetadmin Driver Configuration Plugin adds a number of screens to the existing queue-creation workflow from which the drivers that are being installed for the queues can be customized as part of the process. The plug-in is limited to Internet
Explorer browsers. Netscape Navigator is not supported.
The HP Web Jetadmin Driver Configuration Plugin is available at the following Web site: www.hp.com/sbso/tpm/web_jetadminplugin.html
● HP Customization Utility/Silent Installer. The Customization Utility features an install-time mode of HP Driver Preconfiguration. IT administrators can use the utility to preconfigure the drivers for a printing-system software driver installation that uses the silent installer.
Detailed information about gaining access to and installing these tools can be found in the HP Driver
Preconfiguration Support Guide, which is available on the printing-system software CD.
For more information, see the HP Driver Preconfiguration Support Guide at the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/hpdpc_sw
Lockable features
The following driver features can be locked to prevent end-users from changing settings:
● Print on Both Sides (duplex). The options are True or False.
● Print in Grayscale. The options are Disable or Enabled.
● Media Type. The options include all the media types that the HP Color LaserJet 4700 supports
(see
in the Engineering Details chapter of this manual).
● Paper Source. The options are Printer Auto Select, Manual Feed (Tray 1), Tray 1, or Tray 2.
When a feature is locked, the selected default option is the only option that is available to users.
Generally, the feature is unavailable in the driver UI after it has been installed.
Continuous export
The term "continuous export" refers to the ability of the driver to copy the latest driver settings back to the working copy of the preconfiguration file. Using this feature, the exported values can be transferred when a compatible version of the driver is used to upgrade the print driver. For instance, if orientation is set to Landscape in a driver originally installed in Windows 2000, then the orientation setting
34 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
automatically remains Landscape when the operating system is upgraded to Windows XP or
Windows Server 2003. The continuous export feature functions transparently from the user's perspective and works only between drivers of identical product models.
NOTE Not all of the driver parameters can be exported; however, the list is always the same for those that can be preconfigured.
The following table shows drivers and operating systems that support HP Driver Preconfiguration.
Table 2-5 Operating systems that support HP Driver Preconfiguration
Driver Windows 98 Windows Me Windows 2000 Windows XP
N/A
Windows Server 200
3
N/A HP Traditional
PCL 6 Driver
HP Traditional
PCL 5 Driver
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
N/A
N/A
PS Emulation
Driver
HP PCL 6
Unidriver
HP PCL 5
Unidriver
No
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
N/A
N/A
Yes
Yes
1
PS Emulation
Unidriver
N/A N/A Yes
N/A: Not applicable; the driver is not supported in this operating system.
N/A
N/A
Yes
Yes
Yes
N/A
N/A
Yes
Yes
Yes
ENWW Driver Configuration for Windows 35
HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool
The HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool is a Web-based diagnostic software that enables you to determine whether you are using the correct and most current print driver for your
HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer. To gain access to the HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool, go to www.hp.com/go/drivercheck , or go to the HP Business Support Center (BSC) at www.hp.com/go/ bsc , click the self-help resources link on the left navigation bar, and then click automatic driver
checker to run the HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool.
When you run the HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool, the products that are currently installed on your computer appear in a list. When you select the HP product that you would like to check, the
HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool gathers information about your product, drivers, and system setup in order to diagnose your software driver configuration and check your print driver. The tool then verifies whether you are using the latest driver, informs you if you are using an incorrect driver for your
HP product, and lets you know if an updated driver version is available for your product. If an updated driver is available, you can download and install the latest driver version by clicking on it.
The data that the HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool gathers is stored anonymously so that HP can analyze and continuously improve its diagnostic tools. No private data is gathered from your computer.
36 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
International Color Consortium profiles
HP provides cyan-magenta-yellow-black (CMYK) (HP4700C.ICM) and standard red-green-blue (sRGB)
(HP4700R.ICM) International Color Consortium (ICC) profiles with the HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer.
The CMYK profile can only be used with a postscript driver; the sRGB profile can be used with any of the HP Color LaserJet 4700 drivers. The profiles are available at the following HP Web site: www.hp.com/support/clj4700
The ICC profiles describe the way color will be interpreted in the default CMYK and RGB modes. These profiles can be used for color conversions in a color-managed workflow. The sRGB profile matches the default RGB mode (sRGB), which is enabled with the Default (sRGB) or Color setting in either a PCL or postscript driver. The printer interprets CMYK data according to the Specifications for Web Offset
Publications (SWOP) simulation when Default CMYK+is the selected CMYK Color setting in the postscript driver, and a more accurate SWOP rendering can be produced by selecting the SWOP setting.
This standard defines how a particular set of CMYK ink colors should behave. Emulation for Dainippon
Press (DIC) and Euro-standard CMYK inks used in Asia and Europe are also available and can be selected from the printer driver.
ENWW International Color Consortium profiles 37
PANTONE* color profiles
Most software programs that support the use of PANTONE* colors for graphic objects will include the
PANTONE* name in the postscript output along with the color values that are assigned to the object.
For best results, select an application that uses PANTONE* palette in a CMYK workspace and print with the Postscript driver with the SWOP inkset emulation selected.
● PS Emulation Unidriver in Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003
● PS Emulation Driver in Windows 98 and Windows Me
When SWOP is selected as the CMYK Color setting, these CMYK values provides a good reproduction of the PANTONE* 4C spot-color simulations.
PANTONE* provides device- and software-specific palettes for some HP Color LaserJet products. Using the custom colors in these palettes can provide an alternative match to the 4C spot-color simulation.
However, files that use these palettes are not portable to other devices.
PANTONE* Application Palettes are available at the following Web site: www.hp.com/support/clj4700
Vector graphics, such as company logos that are created in PANTONE* Application Palettes, can be imported into Microsoft Word, PowerPoint, or other Microsoft Office software programs. For importation, the color program must create an encapsulated postscript (.EPS) file of the image. By using the Insert
file function, you can then import the file into the Office document.
NOTE Cutting and pasting from the clipboard does not work. These tasks do not preserve the
PANTONE* name or the CMYK palette value.
38 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
HP Embedded Web Server
The HP Embedded Web Server (HP EWS) is a standard feature on the following
HP Color LaserJet 4700 models when they are connected through a network:
● HP Color LaserJet 4700n
● HP Color LaserJet 4700dn
● HP Color LaserJet 4700dtn
● HP Color LaserJet 4700ph+
The base model, HP Color LaserJet 4700 can use the HP EWS if an optional EIO Jetdirect card is installed.
The HP EWS provides a simple, easy-to-use solution for one-to-one product management. Instead of installing management software, such as HP Web Jetadmin, use HP EWS for remote management in offices that have a limited number of products. The only requirement is that the management console have a supported Web browser.
In environments that have a larger number of products, in which one-to-one management is impractical, the HP Embedded Web Server and HP Web Jetadmin work together to provide scalable remote product management. Use HP Web Jetadmin for consolidated management tasks when you want to perform operations on a selected set of products. For such environments, HP provides hooks between the
HP EWS and HP Web Jetadmin so that you can configure HP EWS features on multiple products in one operation. For example, you can set the security password for the HP EWS simultaneously on a cluster of products.
For additional information and a copy of the HP Embedded Web Server User Guide, go to: www.hp.com/ support/clj4700 .
To use the HP EWS to view information about the product, open a supported Web browser and type the product transmission control protocol/internet protocol (TCP/IP) address or host name. To find the
TCP/IP address, look for IP Address on the Embedded Jetdirect page, in the TCP/IP section. To find the host name of the product, look for Host Name in the TCP/IP section.
You also can view information about an installed HP Jetdirect print server by clicking the Networking tab in the HP EWS window.
Use this procedure to print a copy of the Embedded Jetdirect page from the control-panel display:
1.
Press (the select button; the one with the check mark) to open the menus.
2.
Press (the up button) and (the down button) to scroll to INFORMATION, and then press .
3.
Press and to scroll to PRINT CONFIGURATION.
4.
Press to print the configuration page.
The HP EWS frame
Each screen in the HP EWS has a frame that contains a top banner, three category tabs, a left-aligned navigation menu bar, and a main-content area. Selecting one of the category tabs causes the corresponding left-aligned navigation bar to appear. The left-aligned navigation menu includes links to content that is appropriate for that tab. The main-content area shows information and opens options in response to navigation tab selections and menu bar selections.
ENWW HP Embedded Web Server 39
See the following sections for more information about each tab or area:
●
●
●
Information tab
The following information is available on the HP EWS Information tab. To view the information, click the menu items on the left side of the HP EWS Information tab.
NOTE If an HP EWS password has been set, the Information tab is the only visible tab until the user logs in. See
Security for more information.
Not all of the screens on the tab are included in this document. For more information, see the
HP Embedded Web Server User Guide.
● Device Status screen. This screen provides current status information about the product.
● Configuration Page. This screen provides information about the configuration of the product.
● Supplies Status. This screen provides information about the print cartridge and the total pages that have been printed, and the serial number of the product.
● Event log. This screen provides information about reported printer errors.
● Usage page. This screen provides a page count for each size of media that has passed through the device, as well as the number of duplexed pages that have been printed.
● Device Information. This screen shows device information, such as the product TCP/IP address and serial number.
● Control Panel. This screen shows the product control panel.
● Print. Use this screen to print documents that are print-ready, such as those generated by a "print to file" driver option, .PCL documents, .PS documents, .PDF files, and text (.TXT) files.
Links to off-product solutions
Links on the HP EWS screens provide an easy way to locate information or complete tasks.
● hp instant support. This link connects you to a set of dynamic Web resources that help you solve specific problems and determine additional services that might be available for your device.
Specific status and configuration information about the product is retained and directed to the
"Solve a Problem" Web site. This site offers targeted support content and messages to help resolve problems as quickly as possible.
● Order Supplies. This link connects you to an HP product supplies screen from which you can order genuine HP supplies for your product.
● Product Support. This link connects to an HP product-support screen from which you can search for information, contact the HP customer care home page, or find additional resources for your product.
40 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
Device Status screen
Status information, such as whether the product is online or the toner is low, is available through your
Web browser on a computer that is linked directly to the product. You can view this information without going to the product to identify the status. The following figure shows how this information is presented on the product Web page.
ENWW
Figure 2-2 HP EWS Information tab – Device Status screen
Configuration Page
You can gain access to the HP Color LaserJet 4700 configuration page remotely through the HP EWS.
The HP EWS Configuration Page screen provides configuration information about the product in the same way as the configuration page that is printed from the product. The following figures show an example of a configuration page viewed remotely through the HP EWS.
HP Embedded Web Server 41
Figure 2-3 HP EWS Information tab – Configuration Page screen, 1 of 2
NOTE This figure is provided only as an example.
42 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
ENWW
Figure 2-4 HP EWS Information tab – Configuration Page screen, 2 of 2
NOTE This figure is provided only as an example.
Settings tab
The following information is available on the HP EWS Settings tab. To view the information, click the menu items on the left side of the HP EWS Settings tab. The Settings tab is shown in the
HP Embedded Web Server 43
Not all of the screens on the tab are shown in this document. For more information, see the
HP Embedded Web Server User Guide.
● Configure Device. Use the Configure Device screen to print product information pages and configure the product remotely.
● E-mail Server. Use the E-mail Server screen to configure e-mail settings for outgoing e-mail.
● Alerts. IT administrators can configure the product to send alerts in e-mail messages to anyone.
● AutoSend. Use the AutoSend screen to send product configuration and supplies-usage information periodically to your service provider.
● Security. Use theSecurity screen to manage security for the product.
● Edit Other Links. Use the Edit Other Links screen to add or customize up to five links to the Web sites of your choice.
● Device Information. Use the Device Information screen to provide a name of your choice for the product, assign an asset number, and configure the company name, the person to contact about the product, and the physical location of the product.
● Language. Use the Language screen to select the language in which the HP EWS screens appear.
● Date & Time. Use this page to set the correct date and time for the product.
● Wake Time. Wake time can be set to turn on the product at a certain time on a daily basis. Only one wake-time setting can be established per day; however, each day can have a different wake time. The sleep-mode delay can also be set on this page.
Configure device
You can obtain product configuration information through a Web browser by opening the HP EWS screen and changing the basic configuration information on the Settings tab. Security and password controls give MIS managers the level of control that they require within their network environments. The following figure shows an example of product options that can be configured remotely.
44 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
Figure 2-5 HP EWS Settings tab – Configure Device screen
Alerts
The product can automatically send e-mail alerts about printing problems or job status to specified email addresses. For example, if toner is low, the product can notify the person who is responsible for ordering or changing the print cartridge. If a product failure occurs, the product can send an e-mail alert directly to the person who is responsible for fixing the problem. These e-mail alerts can be configured to be sent to any device that can accept e-mail, such as digital phones, pagers, and personal digital assistants (PDAs). In large environments, administrators can route e-mail addresses to list-servers or uniform resource locators (URLs) for expanded notification.
ENWW HP Embedded Web Server 45
Figure 2-6 HP EWS Settings tab – Alerts screen
46 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
NOTE This figure is provided only as an example.
Security
The HP EWS screens that appear, and the settings on them, vary according to how you gain access to the HP EWS: as a general user, an IT administrator, or a service provider. To control access to the
HP EWS screens, set a password on the Security page.
ENWW
Figure 2-7 HP EWS Settings tab – Security screen
In a password-protected HP EWS, only the Information tab is available to users who do not log in by using the password. If no password is set (which is the default configuration), all of the tabs are visible.
If a password has been set, you must log on as an IT administrator or a service provider to gain access to the protected HP EWS tabs (Settings and Networking).
[INTERNAL] See the “HP EWS login process” section for more information about setting up HP EWS logins.
Networking tab
The following options are available on the HP EWS Networking tab.
Not all of the screens on the tab are shown in this document. For more information, see the
HP Embedded Web Server User Guide.
HP Embedded Web Server 47
Figure 2-8 HP EWS Networking tab – Network Settings screen
The menu on the left side of the screen contains other networking options under three categories: configuration, security, and diagnostics. For more information, see the HP Jetdirect Administrator's
Guide.
Configuration section
● Network Settings
● Other Settings
● Privacy Settings
● Select Language
48 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
ENWW
Security section
● Settings
● Authorization
● Mgmt. Protocols
Diagnostics section
● Network Statistics
● Protocol Info
● Configuration Page
Network settings
From the Networking tab, you can enable and configure the following network protocols:
● TCP/IP
● Internetwork packet exchange/Sequenced packet exchange (IPX/SPX)
● AppleTalk
● Data link control/logical link control (DLC/LLC)
● Simple network management protocol (SNMP)
HP EWS login process [INTERNAL]
An administrative user or a service maintenance user can use the login process to access sensitive information and carry out privileged tasks. This process provides a separate access level for a service provider and contains different page content for different users.
The HP EWS supports two administrative accounts. The user names for the accounts are fixed (“service” and “admin”), but the passwords are configurable. Depending on the authentication status (either not logged in, or authenticated service or admin user), HP EWS provides a customized view of the Web content. In a protected system, users who are not logged in will be shown a limited view that does not divulge any sensitive information. After a successful login, HP EWS customizes the view based on the authentication.
In order to maintain backward compatibility with older products, any user name other than “service” is considered to be the admin user. Therefore, if no user name (or any word other than “service”) is typed and the password matches the admin password, the user is logged in as “admin”. For the service user, both user name and password are required.
The HP EWS provides two different ways for the user to perform the login process, depending on the current level of protection:
● If an admin password has been set, the HP EWS presents a Log In link in the upper-right of all pages on the Information tab (the only tab visible to an unauthenticated user) where the user can log in to the system.
● If no admin password has been set, any user can open any page and have the rights of an admin user. In this case, only the service user content is protected. If no admin password has been set and you want to log in to the system as a service user, you have two alternatives: set an admin
HP Embedded Web Server 49
password to make the Log in link visible, or append a special argument (&action=doLogin) onto the URL for the HP EWS.
An HP EWS that has no set admin password is called an "unprotected system." An HP EWS that has the admin password set is called a "protected system". The login process for these two different scenarios is presented in more detail in the following sections.
Protected system [INTERNAL]
When the user first browses to the HP EWS in a protected system, the page shown is the Device
Status page on the Information tab, the only tab visible for an unauthenticated user.
Figure 2-9 HP EWS home page in a protected system [INTERNAL]
All of the pages on the Information tab show the Log In link in the upper right hand corner. When the user clicks that link, an authentication pop-up window appears. To log in as admin, type "admin" as the user name, or any other user name except "service" (for backwards compatibility with Jetdirect and older versions of HP EWS when the user name was not required), and then type the correct password. when
50 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
logged in, you remain on the same page. The Log In link changes to a Log Off link and all of the tabs are now visible.
ENWW
Figure 2-10 HP EWS home page with admin user logged in [INTERNAL]
To log in as the service user, type "service" as the user name and then type the correct password. If the service password has not been set, the admin password can be used.
To log out from the system, click the Log Off link, and close the browser.
Unprotected system [INTERNAL]
When you first browse to the HP EWS in an unprotected system, the same Device Status page is shown on the Information tab but after login all tabs are visible. You have the same access privileges as the admin user, and you can freely browse the content in all of the tabs and perform configuration tasks.
To log in as a service user on an unprotected system you must add the following special argument to the URL in the Address field:
HP Embedded Web Server 51
?nav=DeviceStatus&action=doLogin
When you type this URL, a pop-up window opens and you can log in.
Figure 2-11 HP EWS login – Connect to window [INTERNAL]
You must provide "service" as the user name and type the correct password (if no password has been set, leave the password blank). When logged in as a service user, you will see the Device Status page with a Log Off (service) link in the upper-right corner.
52 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
ENWW
Figure 2-12 HP EWS home page with service user logged in [INTERNAL]
Password behavior [INTERNAL]
The admin password is not set when the device is shipped, which means that the system is unprotected.
Any HP EWS user automatically has all admin privileges until a password is set. After a password is set, only the admin and service users have access to the Security page that is used to configure the password. The admin password can be cleared (set to an empty string) to remove the protection from the system and return it to the default configuration.
The service password functions in a slightly different way:
● No default service password exists (that is, it is empty).
● If the service password is empty, you must use the admin password in order to log in.
● When it is set, the service password cannot be cleared again.
HP Embedded Web Server 53
Configuring service links [INTERNAL]
When logged in, the service user can customize two service-specific links within the Other Links box on the HP EWS screens. Configure these links on the Edit Other Links page on theSettings tab. This section only appears when you are logged in as a service user.
Figure 2-13 HP EWS service links [INTERNAL]
Configurable ordering information for consumables [INTERNAL]
The service user can customize the "Ordering Information" text that appears on the HP EWS Supplies
Status page.
When you are logged in as a service user, an Ordering Information page appears on the Settings tab. This page is only visible to the service user. The service user can use this page to set up the configurable text in the Supplies Status page and to add customized ordering information text for all supplies-related HP EWS alerts. If the configured text contains “http://” , it is considered a Web link. This means that all characters after “http://” and before the next space character are automatically transformed into a Web link that only opens in a new browser window when the user clicks it.
54 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
Figure 2-14 HP EWS Settings tab – Ordering Information screen for the service user [INTERNAL]
ENWW HP Embedded Web Server 55
HP Printer Utility for Macintosh
The HP Printer Utility is a software program that gives you access to your printer in Mac OS X.
The HP Printer Utility is available only in Mac OS X V10.1.5 and later. The HP Printer Utility does not work when it is installed using the AppleTalk protocol; it requires IP, Bonjour or Rendezvous.
The following topics are discussed in this section:
●
Access to the HP Printer Utility
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Access to the HP Printer Utility
Using the Finder, go to and double-click Printers. The Select Printer screen appears.
56 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
Figure 2-15 Select Printer screen
If your printer does not appear (as in the figure, click More Printers... . The Connection Type screen appears. Select your connection type (USB, TCP/IP, or AppleTalk). The product name appears under Device Name.
ENWW
Figure 2-16 Connection Type screen
Select your product and click Launch Utility.
If the HP Printer Utility software detects a condition that might need attention, the Printer Status screen appears.
HP Printer Utility for Macintosh 57
Figure 2-17 Printer Status screen
Address the condition and click OK to close the screen. The HP Printer Utility opens. The following sections describe the screens and features that are available in the HP Printer Utility
Supplies Status
The HP Printer Utility opens on the Supplies Status screen.
58 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
Figure 2-18 Supplies Status screen
Click Detailed Supplies Information... to open the Supplies Information screen. Use the scroll button to see information about the color print cartridges.
ENWW
Figure 2-19 Supplies Information screen
HP Printer Utility for Macintosh 59
If you have Internet access and click Order HP Supplies, a screen appears that explains the ordering process, describes the kind of information that can be sent about your product to facilitate the ordering of supplies, and provides a link to HP's privacy statement.
Figure 2-20 Order Supplies link
You can continue ordering supplies without sending product information by clicking the continue
without sending this information link. You can send a message to HP by clicking the contact HP link.
On the Supplies Status screen, click Media to see the paper status in the trays.
60 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
Figure 2-21 Paper Status screen
You can also order supplies from this screen by clicking Order HP Supplies.
Device Information
Click Device Information in the menu on the left to find the product service ID (if assigned), the firmware version, and the serial number.
ENWW HP Printer Utility for Macintosh 61
Figure 2-22 Device Information screen
The product configuration page has other settings; click Print Configuration Page to print it.
Click the printer icon in the lower left corner to see information about another installed printer. This action relaunches the HP Printer Utility so that you can select another printer.
HP Support
Click HP Support to open the HP Online Support screen.
62 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
ENWW
Figure 2-23 HP Online Support screen
If you have Internet access, you can connect to HP support pages over the Web from this screen.
File Upload
The File Upload command is supported for file types that can be sent directly to the printer without first opening them through a software program. Some files can be uploaded to the product, some cannot.
Documents in the following file formats can be printed by using a command line. That is, they do not need to be opened in a software program that supports the file format (such as the Adobe Acrobat or
Acrobat Reader programs for .PDF files), but can be sent directly to the product by using the File Upload command.
● HP LaserJet Printer Control Language (.PCL)
● Portable Document Format (.PDF)
● Postscript (.PS)
● Text (.TXT)
When you select File Upload, the File Upload screen appears.
HP Printer Utility for Macintosh 63
Figure 2-24 File Upload screen
Click the Choose... button to open a navigation screen. Locate the file you want to upload and click
Open.
Figure 2-25 Locating a file
64 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
On the File Upload screen, click the Display response from the device to see whether the upload was successful.
Update Firmware
Select Update Firmware to locate a firmware upgrade file and install it on your product. Browse to the firmware file in the screen that appears (see
) and click Open. For information about firmware updates in Mac OS 9 operating systems, see
Remote firmware update by using the
HP LaserJet Utility (Mac OS 9.x only) .
Duplex Mode
The Duplex Mode screen is shown in the following figure.
ENWW
Figure 2-26 Duplex Mode screen
Use the Enable Duplex Mode command to print internal diagnostic and test pages on both sides of the page.
1.
Select Duplex Mode to open the Duplex Mode screen.
2.
Select the Enable Duplex Mode check box. This box is clear by default.
3.
Click Apply Now to enable printing on both sides of the page.
Trays Configuration
The Trays Configuration screen is shown in the following figure.
HP Printer Utility for Macintosh 65
Figure 2-27 Trays Configuration screen
1.
Select Trays Configuration to change media size and type for each of the trays installed on your product.
2.
Select a tray, select a media size in the Default Media Size drop-down menu.
3.
To change the media size or type, select a tray and then select a different media size in the Default
Media Size drop-down menu, or select a different media type in the Default Media Type dropdown menu
4.
Click Apply Now to save the settings.
Lock Resources
Select Lock Resources to lock certain features of the HP Color LaserJet 4700
66 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
ENWW
Figure 2-28 Lock Resources screen
In the Control Panel Access Level, select one of the following settings:
● No Locking. This provides full control of the product.
● Minimal Locking. This provides control over paper-handling features.
● Moderate Locking. This blocks changes in the product configuration.
● Maximal Locking. This prevents users from changing product control-panel settings.
In the lower pane, select the Lock check box for the mass-storage unit you want to lock.
WARNING!
Click Initialize selected mass-storage unit only if you want to erase all data that are currently stored on the hard drive. You cannot undo this action.
Stored Jobs
Select Stored Job to change the Enable Job Storing setting.
HP Printer Utility for Macintosh 67
Figure 2-29 Enable Job Storing screen
You can type a PIN for your job in the Enter Secure Job PIN field.
Select the number of copies in the Copies to Print field.
Click Delete to delete the stored job.
E-mail Alerts
Select E-mail Alerts to configure the HP Color LaserJet 4700 to send e-mail notifications to users.
If a user name and password have been set, you might need to obtain them from your IT administrator.
For information about logging on through a password-protected system, see
[INTERNAL] or consult the HP Embedded Web Server User Guide.
The HP EWS opens to the Setup screen on the Alerts tab, where you can set notifications. For
information about configuring notifications, see Alerts
68 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
Figure 2-30 E-mail Alerts screen
Network Settings
Select Network Settings to open the IP Settings screen.
ENWW
Figure 2-31 IP Settings screen
HP Printer Utility for Macintosh 69
Select one of the following options in the Configuration drop-down menu:
● DHCP
● BootP
● Manual
You can also use this screen to modify the following settings:
● Host Name
● IP Address
● Subnet Mask
● Default Gateway
To view and change other network settings, click the Additional Network Settings button.
If a user name and password have been set, you might need to obtain them from your IT administrator.
For information about logging on through a password-protected system, see
[INTERNAL] or consult the HP Embedded Web Server User Guide.
The HP EWS opens to the Network Settings screen. For information about this screen, see
Rendezvous Setting
Select Rendezvous Setting to open the Rendezvous Setting screen. Rendezvous is enabled by default.
To disable Rendezvous, clear the Enable Rendezvous check box and click Apply Now.
Figure 2-32 Rendezvous screen
70 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
The following options are available in the The highest priority service drop-down menu:
● Port 9100 (default)
● IPP
● LPD-RAW
● LPD-TEXT
● LPD-AUTO
● LPD-BINPS
● LPD-Queue5
● LPD-Queue6
● LPD-Queue7
● LPD-Queue8
● LPD-Queue9
● LPD-Queue10
Additional Settings
Select Additional Settings to gain access to the HP EWS. To open the HP EWS, click the Open
Embedded Web Server button.
ENWW
Figure 2-33 Additional Settings screen
HP Printer Utility for Macintosh 71
For information about HP EWS settings see
HP EWS login process [INTERNAL]HP Embedded Web
or consult the HP Embedded Web Server User Guide.
72 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
HP Web Jetadmin
Us the HP Web Jetadmin and a browser to manage HP Jetdirect-connected products within your intranet. HP Web Jetadmin is a browser-based management tool, and should be installed only on a single network-administration server.
To download a current version of HP Web Jetadmin and for the latest list of supported host systems, go to: www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin
ENWW HP Web Jetadmin 73
74 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Introduction
This chapter describes the features of the traditional print drivers for the HP Color LaserJet 4700 in
Windows 98 and Windows Me.
You can control print jobs from several places: the printer control panel, the software program, and the driver user interface. Generally, for features that are common to two or more of these places (for instance, you can select the media input tray from any of them), settings that are established in the software program take precedence over print-driver settings. Print-driver settings override printer control-panel settings.
The chapter contains the following sections:
●
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 driver features
●
HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features
ENWW Introduction 75
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 driver features
When you install the print drivers by using the printing-system installer in Windows 98 or Windows Me, the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver is installed by default. You can install the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver by performing a Custom Installation.
NOTE Windows NT 4.0 does not support the HP Color LaserJet 4700 print drivers, but you can use print drivers for legacy HP products whose feature sets closely matches the feature set of the HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer. For instance, you can use the HP Color LaserJet 4650 drivers; however, color quality may be compromised. HP does not support the use of any print driver other than the driver supplied for the product. When you install the print drivers in
Windows NT 4.0, you must use the Add Printer installation method to install the HP Traditional
PCL 6 Driver and the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver.
This section describes the options that are available on each tab of the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver and
HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver Document Default print-driver interface and on some of the tabs of the
Properties print-driver interface.
This section also describes differences between the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver and the HP Traditional
PCL 5 Driver.
Access to print drivers
Depending on the operating system on which you are installing the print drivers, you can gain access to the print drivers and different print-driver interfaces in several ways.
To gain access to the print-driver settings from within most software programs, follow these steps:
1.
Click File
2.
Click Print.
3.
Click Properties.
The appearance and names of the driver tabs can vary, depending on the operating system. These driver settings apply only while that software program is open.
Access to print drivers in Windows 98 and Windows Me
In Windows 98 and Windows Me, you have access to a single set of driver tabs. To gain access to the print drivers, follow these steps:
1.
Click Start.
2.
Select Settings.
3.
Click Printers.
4.
Right-click the printer name.
5.
Click Properties to gain access to all print-driver tabs.
The settings that you make on these driver tabs control print-job output and become the default settings for all applications. The following print-driver tabs are available in Windows 98 and Windows Me:
● General tab
● Details tab
76 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
ENWW
● Color Management tab
● Sharing tab
● Finishing tab
● Effects tab
● Paper tab
● Output tab (appears only when accessories are installed and configured)
● Job Storage tab (appears only when hard disk is installed and configured)
● Basics tab
● Color tab
● Configure tab
NOTE Only the Finishing, Effects, Paper, Output, Job Storage, Basics, Color and
Configure tabs are described in this manual. These are product-specific HP driver tabs; the other driver tabs are part of the operating system.
The Output tab is available only when an optional paper destination is selected on the
Configure tab. The Job Storage tab is available only when the Job Storage Enable setting is selected on the Configure tab. The settings take effect only after you click OK on the
Configure tab.
Help system
The HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver and the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver include a full-featured Help system to provide assistance with printing and configuration options.
What's this? Help
What's this? Help is supported in Windows 98 and Windows Me. You can gain access to What's this?
Help messages in any of the following ways:
● Right-click a control and then click What's this?. A pop-up Help window appears.
● Click the ? button at the upper-right corner of the frame, next to the X, to change the cursor to an arrow with a question mark. When you use this special cursor to select a control, the pop-up Help window for that feature appears.
● Press the F1 key, and the Help window for the currently selected control appears.
Context-sensitive Help
When you click the Help button on a driver tab or in a dialog box, a context-sensitive Help message appears.
Incompatible Options messages
Incompatible Options settings (constraint) messages are unsolicited messages that appear in response to specific actions that you take. These messages alert you to selections that are illogical or impossible given the capabilities of the printer or the current settings of other controls. For example, if
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 driver features 77
you click Print on Both Sides and then change the media type to Transparency, a message appears asking you to resolve this conflict.
Figure 3-1 A typical constraint message with an OK button
Whenever a constraint message appears with the OK or Cancel button, the interpretation of the button is as follows:
● Clicking OK accepts the change that was just made, and the driver then resets the conflicting control to a setting that is compatible with the new value.
● Clicking Cancel rejects the change that was just made, and the control returns to its previous value.
Bubble Help
Bubble Help features a graphical icon that resembles a cartoon speech bubble with a lowercase "i" in it, representing the international symbol for information. The following figure shows a Bubble Help icon on a driver tab.
Figure 3-2 A typical page with a Bubble Help icon
The bubble typically appears next to a control that is unavailable, although it can also accompany an available control if an important note concerning its use is available within the Help. Moving the pointer
78 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
over the bubble changes the arrow to a gloved hand, which indicates that the area underneath the pointer is selectable. When the bubble is selected by using either the mouse or the keyboard, a message box appears that contains a brief explanation about why the control is disabled and what can be done to enable it. If the control is not disabled, the message is a tip or a precaution that you should be aware of when using that particular feature.
Finishing tab features
To gain access to the Finishing tab in Windows 98 or Windows Me, follow these steps:
1.
Click Start.
2.
Select Settings.
3.
Click Printers.
4.
Right-click the printer name.
5.
Click Properties.
6.
Click the Finishing tab.
Use the Finishing tab to print on both sides of the page, to control the printed output on the page, and to print booklets. The following figure shows the Finishing tab.
ENWW
Figure 3-3 The default Finishing tab
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 driver features 79
The Finishing tab contains the following controls:
● Print Task Quick Sets group box
● Document Options group box
● Document preview image
● Print Quality group box
Print Task Quick Sets
The first group box in the upper portion of the Finishing tab is Print Task Quick Sets. Any change to the Print Task Quick Sets group box that is made on the Finishing tab affects the Print Task Quick
Sets group boxes on all of the Document Defaults driver tabs (Effects Paper, Job Storage, and
Basics ) because they are all the same control.
Use the Print Task Quick Sets setting to store the current combination of driver settings that appear on all of the other print driver tabs. Print Task Quick Sets are either preset by network-administrator settings or user-defined printing specifications (such as media size, pages per sheet, and so on). The
Print Task Quick Sets control does not appear on the driver Properties tabs.
By default, the Print Task Quick Sets menu is set to Type new Quick Set name here. When you change any of the default settings on any of the Document Defaults driver tabs and you want to save the configuration as a Print Task Quick Set, highlight the words Type new Quick Set name here, type the name you want for your new Print Task Quick Set, and then click Save. The Print Task Quick Sets are saved in the system registry. To delete a Print Task Quick Set, select it in the drop-down menu and click Delete.
NOTE Administrators can predefine Print Task Quick Sets for their users. These administrator
Print Task Quick Sets are defined on the server and are available to users, but usually cannot be modified by users. Users can also define Print Task Quick Sets for their own use. User-defined
Print Task Quick Sets are described later in this section.
You can store a maximum of 25 Print Task Quick Sets on a particular system. If you attempt to save too many, a message box appears that reads, "There are too many Print Task Quick Sets defined.
Please delete some before adding new ones."
The following settings are available in the Print Task Quick Sets drop-down menu:
● Default Print Settings
● User Guide Print Settings
Default Print Settings
When you select Default Print Settings, nearly all of the settings are restored to the combination that existed after the driver was installed (the original settings). However, if the attribute combinations that are associated with watermark definitions, custom media sizes, or the other quick sets have been changed or deleted, the original settings for those items are not restored.
The following table shows the default settings for Print Task Quick Sets. See HP Driver
Preconfiguration for information about preconfigurable driver settings.
80 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
ENWW
Table 3-1 Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP Color LaserJet 4700
Driver feature Feature setting location U.S. English Print
Task Quick Sets for
Default values
Preconfigurable
Print on Both Sides
Flip Pages Up
Finishing tab, Document Options group box
Finishing tab, Document Options group box
Watermark message angle (angle)
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box
(Click Edit for Watermark Details.)
Available, not selected
Unavailable, not selected
Yes
Yes
Booklet Printing
Pages per Sheet
Print Page Borders
Page Order
Print Quality
Current Setting
Finishing tab, Document Options group box
Finishing tab, Document Options group box
Finishing tab, Document Options group box
Finishing tab, Document Options group box
Unavailable, Off
1
Unavailable
Unavailable
Finishing tab, Print Quality group box
Finishing tab, Print Quality Details dialog box
(click Details on Finishing tab)
Default
This is the “Default” setting
Finishing tab, Print Quality Details dialog box
(click Details on Finishing tab)
Automatic Raster Compression
(HP Traditional
PCL 6 Driver only)
Rendering Mode
(HP Traditional
PCL 5 Driver only)
Send Truetype as
Bitmaps
Output Settings
Print Document On
Size to print on
Scale to Fit
Watermarks
Finishing tab, Print Quality Details dialog box
(click Details on Finishing tab)
Automatic
Finishing tab, Print Quality Details dialog box
(click Details on Finishing tab)
Available, not selected
Finishing tab, Print Quality Details dialog box
(click Details on Finishing tab)
Scale Patterns
(WYSIWIG) selected
Yes
Effects tab, Fit to Page group box Off - print on the size that is specified on the Paper tab
Yes
Effects tab, Fit to Page group box
Effects tab, Fit to Page group box
Effects tab, Watermarks dialog box
First Page Only
(watermark)
Effects tab, Watermark dialog box
Current Watermarks Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box
(Click Edit for Watermark Details.)
Watermark Message Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box
(Click Edit for Watermark Details.)
Message Angle
(watermark)
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box
(Click Edit for Watermark Details.)
Actual size specified on the Paper tab
Unavailable
Yes
Unavailable, selected Yes
(none) Yes
Yes
(none)
(none)
Diagonal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Unavailable unless
Angle option is selected, 52
Yes
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 driver features 81
Table 3-1 Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP Color LaserJet 4700 (continued)
Driver feature Feature setting location U.S. English Print
Task Quick Sets for
Default values
Preconfigurable
Name (watermark font)
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box,
Font Attributes group box
Color (watermark font)
Shading (watermark font )
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box,
Font Attributes group box
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box,
Font Attributes group box
Size (watermark font) Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box,
Font Attributes group box
Arial
Gray
Very Light
80
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Style (watermark font)
Use Different Paper/
Covers
Size is:
Source is:
Type is:
Unlabeled group box
Job Storage Mode
Job Storage tab Status message about the destination of the job
Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box Off
No
No
Proof and Hold
Private Job
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box,
Font Attributes group box
Paper tab, Paper Options group box
Paper tab, Paper Options group box
Paper tab, Paper Options group box
Paper tab, Paper Options group box
Regular
Off (all of the pages use the same media)
No
Letter Yes
Automatically Select
Unspecified
Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box Available, not selected
Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box Available, not selected
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Quick Copy
Stored Job
Orientation
Landscape
Rotate by 180 degrees
Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box Available, not selected
Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box Available, not selected
Require PIN to print option
PIN to Print
Windows User Name
Job Name
Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box Unavailable, not selected
Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box Unavailable, blank
Job Storage tab, User Name group box
Job Storage tab, Job Name group box
No
Unavailable, selected No
Unavailable,
Automatic selected
No
Unavailable No Display Job ID when printing
Copy
Job Storage tab, Job Notification Options group box
Basics tab, Copies group box 1 Yes
Basics tab, Orientation group box
Basics tab, Orientation group box
Basics tab, Orientation group box
Portrait
Available, not selected
Available, not selected
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
82 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
ENWW
Table 3-1 Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP Color LaserJet 4700 (continued)
Driver feature Feature setting location U.S. English Print
Task Quick Sets for
Default values
Preconfigurable
Automatic (color options)
Manual (color options)
Current Setting
(color)
Edge Control
Neutral Grays (text)
Color tab, Color Options group box
Color tab, Color Options group box
Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click
Settings on Color tab)
Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click
Settings on Color tab)
Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click
Settings on Color tab), General group box
Selected
Available, not selected
This is the
“Automatic” Setting
Normal
Black Only
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Halftone (text)
Neutral Grays
(graphics)
Halftone (graphics)
Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click
Settings on Color tab)
Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click
Settings on Color tab)
Detail
Black Only
Yes
Yes
Neutral Grays
(photographs)
Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click
Settings on Color tab)
Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click
Settings on Color tab)
Detail
4-Color
Yes
Yes
1
2
Halftone
(photographs)
Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click
Settings on Color tab)
Detail Yes
Preconfigurable by using one of the HP Preconfiguration tools. For more information, see
, or go to: www.hp.com/go/hpdpc_sw .
Not supported in Windows 98 and Windows Me.
User Guide Print Settings
The User Guide Print Settings option provides a Print Task Quick Set for optimal printing of the
HP Color LaserJet 4700 User Guide.
When you select User Guide Print Settings, all of the settings are restored to the default settings, except for the following settings:
● Print on Both Sides is set to ON
● Flip Pages Up is set to ON
● Booklet Printingis set to OFF and is unavailable
● Pages per Sheet is set to 2
● Page Order is set to Right then Down
Document Options
The Document Options group box contains the following controls:
● Print on Both Sides check box
● Flip Pages Up check box
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 driver features 83
● Booklet Printing drop-down menu
● Pages Per Sheet spin box
● Print Page Borders check box
● Page Order drop-down menu
Print on Both Sides
The default setting for the Print on Both Sides option is off (not selected). Print on Both Sides is available when the following conditions exist:
● Type is: on the Paper tab is set to any type except Labels, Transparency, or Envelope.
● Size is: is set to any size except for Statement, Envelope #10, Envelope DL, Envelope C5,
Envelope B5, Envelope Monarch, Double Postcard (JIS), or Double Japan Postcard Rotated.
When Paper Size is set to Letter, Legal, or A4, selecting Print on Both Sides makes the Flip Pages
Up and Booklet Printing options available.
Automatically printing on both sides
The duplexing unit in the printer prints on two sides of a sheet of paper when the Print on Both
Sides option is specified in the print job. The HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer comes with a duplexing unit installed in the following models:
● HP Color LaserJet 4700dn
● HP Color LaserJet 4700dtn
● HP Color LaserJet 4700ph+
The HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer supports smart duplexing. The smart duplexing feature increases printing performance by preventing one-page print jobs or single-sided pages of a duplexed print job from going through the duplexing unit even when the duplexing feature has been selected in the driver.
All media types support the smart duplexing feature, except for media types that cannot be printed on both sides, such as labels, and the following media types:
● Prepunched
● Preprinted
● Letterhead
When the media type is set to Unspecified, the smart duplexing feature is disabled.
To achieve the best print quality when printing on the second side of the page, the printer needs to make adjustments to its print modes. When you select a media type, you are, in effect, instructing the printer to use a group of settings, such as fuser temperature and print speed, to produce the best possible quality. This group of settings is known as a mode or print mode, and a different print mode is used with each media type. Print-mode adjustments are automatic when the duplexing unit is used.
Manually printing on both sides
● Manually Print on 2nd Side is not selected
Select the Print on Both Sides (Manually) check box to print on the second side of the media for the HP Color LaserJet 4700 and HP Color LaserJet 4700n printer models, which do not have a
84 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
ENWW duplexing unit installed. Also select Print on Both Sides (Manually) on the other
HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer models for media types that are not available when using the automatic duplexing unit, such as cardstock and thick media.
Manually printing on the second side of a page is available when you are using the HP Traditional
PCL 6 Driver or the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver (the PS Emulation Driver does not support this feature). If a duplexing unit is installed and manual duplexing is enabled in the driver, the printer automatically prints on both sides of media types that are supported for automatic duplexing (Letter,
A4, Legal, 8.5 x 13, and Executive (JIS) only), and forces manual printing on both sides for media types that are not supported.
To make the Print on Both Sides (Manually) check box available in the document options, select the Allow Manual Duplexing check box on the Configure tab in the Properties print-driver tabs.
See
Configure tab features section of this chapter.
If you want to print on both sides manually while using media that is supported by automatic duplexing, you must clear the Duplexing Unitcheck box on the Configure tab.
Select the media type that corresponds to the media you are using for the print job. The following media types have a different print modes when you manually print on the second side:
● Plain
● Preprinted
● Letterhead
● Prepunched
● Bond
● Recycled
● Colored
● Rough
Cardstock media can be manually printed on the second side, but there is no change to the print mode.
Transparencies and labels should not be manually printed on the second side.
To print a multiple-page document, follow these steps:
1.
Select the Print on Both Sides (Manually) check box.
2.
Click OK. The even-number pages of the document print.
3.
When the control panel shows the MANUALLY FEED message, insert the stack of media (on which the even-number pages have been printed) as indicated in the following figure.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 driver features 85
When you have completed the steps that appear in the dialog box, the second half of the print job prints on the back side of the stack of media. The driver does not require the program to specifically support odd- and even-page printing, because the driver coordinates this function.
Flip Pages Up
The Flip Pages Up check box, which is available only when Print on Both Sides is selected, is used to specify the duplex-binding option. By default, the Flip Pages Up check box is not available. The following table demonstrates the results of selecting this box, depending on the media orientation that is selected on the Basics tab.
Table 3-2 Page orientation
Orientation (Basics tab)
Portrait
Landscape
Flip Pages Up selected
Short-edge binding
Long-edge binding
Flip Pages Up not selected
Long-edge binding
Short-edge binding
When Print on Both Sides is selected, the document preview image changes to show a spiral binding along either the left edge or the top edge of the page. In addition, a folded-over corner appears in the lower-right portion of the preview image, indicating that printing occurs on the back side. An arrow on the folded-over corner points in the direction that the pages would be flipped if they were bound together.
Short-side binding is for print jobs with pages that read by flipping over like the pages of a note pad.
Long-side binding is for print jobs with pages that read by turning like the pages of a book.
86 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
ENWW
Booklet Printing
The Booklet Printing drop-down menu is visible when Print on Both Sides is selected and a supported media size is selected in the Size is: drop-down menu on the Paper tab. The Booklet Printing dropdown menu offers choices that are based on the current media size. The default setting is Off. The other settings have the following format, where [paper size] depends on the media size that is set on the
Paper tab.
● [paper size] (Left Binding)
● [paper size] (Right Binding)
When you select [paper size] (Left Binding) or [paper size] (Right Binding), the document preview image changes to show the location of the binding. If you change the Pages per Sheet setting manually
this document for more information.
Booklet printing is disabled when unsupported media sizes (such as envelopes) are selected as the media size, and an incompatibility error message appears when you click OK to close the driver.
The Booklet Printing drop-down menu appears only when the following conditions exist:
● Print on Both Sides (on the Finishing tab) is selected.
● % of Normal Size (on the Effects tab) is 100.
● Pages per Sheet (on the Finishing tab) is 1.
● Size is: (on the Paper tab) is set to Letter, Legal, or A4.
If any of these conditions is not met (except the first), a Bubble Help appears next to Booklet
Printing to tell you why it is disabled.
Book and Booklet Printing
The HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer supports both book and booklet printing.
A book is a print job that consists of at least two pages and that can have a different media type for the front cover, first page, other pages, last page, or back cover. Use the Front Cover, First Page, Other
Pages, Last Page, or Back Cover settings on the Paper tab (available when you select the Use
Different Paper/Covers check box) to select different printing options for the book. For more information, see
of this chapter.
A booklet is a print job that places two pages on each side of a sheet that can be folded into a booklet that is half the size of the media type. Use the Booklet Printing drop-down menu on the Finishing tab to control booklet settings.
To print a booklet
Complete the following steps to print a booklet in most software programs.
1.
In the software program, click File, click Print, and then click Properties.
2.
Click the Finishing tab.
3.
Select the Print on Both Sides check box.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 driver features 87
4.
In the Booklet Printing drop-down menu, select the type of booklet printing that you want. The booklet printing type consists of the media size and the location of the binding (for example, Letter
[Left binding]).
5.
Click OK in the print driver.
6.
Click OK in the print dialog box to print.
Figure 3-4 Printing a booklet
Pages per Sheet
Use the Pages per Sheet option to select the number of pages that you want to print on a single sheet of media. If you choose to print more than one page per sheet, the pages appear smaller and are arranged on the sheet in the order that they would otherwise be printed. The Pages per Sheet dropdown menu provides six settings:
● 1 page per sheet (this is the default)
● 2 pages per sheet
● 4 pages per sheet
● 6 pages per sheet
● 9 pages per sheet
● 16 pages per sheet
88 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
When you select an option other than 1 page per sheet, booklet printing is unavailable.
Print Page Borders
Related controls that are indented beneath the Pages per Sheet edit box are Print Page Borders and
Page Order, which become active when Pages per Sheet is greater than 1.
Print Page Borders sets a line around each page image on a printed sheet to help visually define the borders of each logical page.
Page Order
The Page Order drop-down menu contains four selections:
● Right, then Down
● Down, then Right
● Left, then Down
● Down, then Left
The document preview image changes to reflect alterations in these settings, as shown by the examples in the following figure.
ENWW
Figure 3-5 Page-order preview images
● 2 pages per sheet
● 4 pages per sheet
● 6 pages per sheet
● 9 pages per sheet
● 16 pages per sheet
Document preview image
The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The document preview image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right-side up. The document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the Finishing, Effects, Paper, Output, and Basics tabs.
Switching between tabs does not change the location or appearance of the document preview image.
When you move the mouse over the document preview image, the mouse cursor changes from an arrow to a gloved hand. You can toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by clicking on the image. The dimensions label that appears below the preview image reflects the selected page size. The horizontal dimension is always first, so the order of the numbers reverses when the orientation changes.
Click the dimensions label to toggle between English and metric units.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 driver features 89
Print Quality group box
The HP Color LaserJet 4700 print driver Print Quality group box provides options that control output settings and font settings.
The default setting for Print Quality is Default. To change the default print-quality settings, click the
Details button. Clicking the Details button opens the Print Quality Details dialog box. The Print Quality
Details dialog box has different options depending on the driver that you are using.
Print Quality Details for the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver
The Print Quality Details dialog box provides the options for print-quality settings in the HP Traditional
PCL 6 Driver as shown in the following figure.
Figure 3-6 Print Quality Details dialog box for the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver
The following options are available:
● Current Setting group box
● Graphics Settings group box
● Font Settings group box
● Output Settings group box
Current Setting
The Current Setting group box has two settings in the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver. When you make a change in the Print Quality Details dialog box, the setting changes from This is the "Default"
setting to This is a "Custom" setting.
Graphic Settings
The Graphics Settings group box contains the Raster Compression drop-down menu.
90 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
Use the Raster Compression feature to select the graphics-compression method. The Raster
Compression drop-down menu provides the following settings:
● Automatic. The printer driver determines the best compression method to use. This is the default setting.
● Best Quality. Forces the driver to use a lossless compression method. (Lossless means that no data is lost during compression.)
● Maximum Compression. Where applicable, requires the printer driver to always use a lossy compression method (some data is lost).
Font Settings
In the Font Settings group box, the only available option is Send TrueType as Bitmaps, which provides an alternative for software programs that cannot easily use TrueType fonts for special graphic purposes, such as shading, rotation, or slanting. The Send TrueType as Bitmaps check box is not selected (clear) by default. If you select this option, the driver sends TrueType fonts to the printer as outlines, which retains the standard format (outlines) of the fonts.
Output Settings
The Output Settings group box contains the following controls and default settings:
● Use the Scale Patterns (WYSIWYG) feature to address the moiré effect that is created when certain programs encounter certain patterns. Use this feature to turn off the pattern scaling. What you lose is WYSIWYG with patterns, but the printed result might look better. The feature works only with programs that use vector hatch patterns. This option is selected by default.
● The Print All Text as Black feature is not selected by default. When the feature is selected, the driver prints all text as black regardless of the original document text color. Color text is printed as black, except for white text, which remains white. (White text is a reliable method of printing reverse typeface against a dark background.) This setting does not affect graphic images on the page, nor does it affect any text that is part of a graphic.
Print Quality Details for the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver
The Print Quality Details dialog box provides the options for print-quality settings in the HP Traditional
PCL 5 Driver as shown in the following figure.
ENWW
Figure 3-7 Print Quality Details dialog box for the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 driver features 91
The following options are available:
● Current Setting group box
● Graphic Settings group box
● Font Settings group box
● Output Settings group box
Current Setting
The Current Setting group box has two settings in the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver. When you make a change in the Print Quality Details dialog box, the setting changes from This is the "Default"
setting to This is a "Custom" setting.
Graphic Settings
The Graphic Settings group box in the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver has settings for the graphics rendering mode. The following Rendering Mode: option buttons are available:
● Automatic. This is the default setting.
● Send Graphics as Vector. Select this setting to send graphics to the printer as a combination of
HP Graphics Language, V2 (HP-GL/2) and raster images. This setting might produce higher-quality output.
● Send Graphics as Raster. Select this setting to send all graphics to the printer as images composed of individual dots. This setting might improve printing speed in some cases.
● Send Page as Raster. Select this setting to send all graphics and text (TrueType fonts) to the printer as images composed of individual dots. Use Send Page as Raster if you are experiencing problems with overlapping text and graphics. With this setting, the Send TrueType as Bitmaps option has no effect.
Output Settings
The Output Settings group box contains controls for pattern scaling, and to print all text as black.
The following are default values for the Output Settings:
● Use the Scale Patterns (WYSIWYG) feature to address the moiré effect that is created when certain programs encounter certain patterns. Use this feature to turn off the pattern scaling. What you lose is WYSIWYG with patterns, but the printed result might look better. The feature works only with programs that use vector hatch patterns. This option is selected by default.
● The Print All Text as Black feature is not selected by default. When the feature is selected, the driver prints all text as black regardless of the original document text color. Color text is printed as black, except for white text, which remains white. (White text is a reliable method of printing reverse typeface against a dark background.) This setting does not affect graphic images on the page, nor does it affect any text that is part of a graphic.
Font Settings
In the Font Settings group box, the only available option is Send TrueType as Bitmaps, which provides an alternative for software programs that cannot easily use TrueType fonts for special graphic purposes, such as shading, rotation, or slanting. The Send TrueType as Bitmaps check box is not selected (clear)
92 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
by default. If you select this option, the driver sends TrueType fonts to the printer as outlines, which retains the standard format (outlines) of the fonts.
Effects tab features
To gain access to the Effects tab in Windows 98 or Windows Me, follow these steps:
1.
Click Start.
2.
Select Settings.
3.
Click Printers.
4.
Right-click the printer name.
5.
Click Properties.
6.
Click the Effects tab.
Use the Effects tab to create unique media effects such as scaling and watermarks. The following figure shows the Effects tab.
ENWW
Figure 3-8 Effects tab
The Effects tab contains the following controls:
● Print Task Quick Sets group box
● Fit to Page group box
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 driver features 93
● Document preview image
● Watermarks group box
Print Task Quick Sets
The Print Task Quick Sets control is used to store the current combination of driver settings that appear on all other Document Defaults driver tabs. Print Task Quick Sets are either preset (by the administrator) or user-defined printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet. For more information, see
Fit To Page group box
The Fit To Page group box contains the following controls:
● Print Document on setting
● Scale to Fit check box
● % of Normal Size setting
Print Document On setting
Use Print Document On to format the document for one media size, and then print the document on a different media size, with or without scaling the page image to fit the new media size.
The Print Document On control is disabled by either of the following conditions:
● % of Normal Size is not 100.
● Pages per Sheet (on the Finishing tab) is not 1.
When Print Document On is selected, the drop-down menu shows the media sizes on which you can print. The list contains all of the standard media sizes that are supported by the selected media source, and any custom size that you have created. When Print Document On is selected, Scale to Fit is automatically selected. Clear this check box if you do not want your document reduced or enlarged to fit on the selected media size.
Scale to Fit option
The Scale to Fit option specifies whether each formatted document page image is scaled to fit the target media size. By default, Scale to Fit is selected when Print Document On is selected. If the setting is turned off, then the document page images will not be scaled, and are instead centered at full size on the target media. If the document size is larger than the target media size, then the document image is clipped. If the document size is smaller, then it is centered within the target media. The following figure shows preview images for a document formatted for Legal-size media with the Print Document On option selected, and the target size specified as Letter.
94 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
ENWW
Figure 3-9 Preview images - Legal on Letter; Scale to Fit off (left) and on (right)
When the size for which the document is formatted (that is, the logical size) differs from the target size, the document preview image uses a dashed gray line to show the boundaries of the logical page in relation to the target page size.
% of Normal Size option
The % of Normal Size option provides a slider bar for scaling the percentage setting. The default setting in the entry box is 100% of the normal size. The normal size is defined as the media size that is selected within the driver or what the driver receives from the software program (if the software program does not negotiate the media size with the driver). The driver scales the page by the appropriate factor and sends it to the printer.
The limits of the range are from 25% to 400%, and any values outside the range are adjusted to those limits as soon as the focus is removed from the control (that is, when the Tab key is pressed or another control is selected).
Any change to the scale also changes the document preview image, which increases or decreases from the upper-left corner of the preview.
The slider bar controls the scale directly. The value in the edit box changes as the scroll bar indicator is dragged, and the document preview image is updated to the new image scale. Each click on the scroll bar arrows increases or decreases the scale by 1%. Each click on the slider bar affects the scale by
10%.
You cannot achieve an exact value by dragging the scroll bar indicator at the default Windows resolution; use the scroll bar indicator to approximate the value that you want, and then use the scroll bar arrows to refine the value. Or, type the value into the entry box.
The following settings disable % of Normal Size:
● Print Document On (on the Effects tab) is selected.
● Pages per Sheet (on the Finishing tab) is not 1.
Watermarks group box
Use the Watermarks feature to select a watermark, create your own custom watermarks (text only), or edit an existing watermark.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 driver features 95
The Watermarks group box contains the following controls:
● Watermarks drop-down menu
● First Page Only check box
● Edit button (opens the Watermark Details dialog box)
Watermarks drop-down menu
The following watermarks are preset in the driver:
● (none)
● Confidential
● Draft
● SAMPLE
The drop-down menu shows alphabetically-sorted watermarks that are currently available on the system, plus the string "(none)", which indicates that no watermark is selected. This is the default setting.
Any watermark that is selected from this list appears in the document preview image.
First Page Only check box
When First Page Only is selected, the watermark is printed only on the first page of the document. The
First Page Only check box is not available when the current watermark selection is "(none)".
Watermarks are applied to logical pages. For example, when Pages per Sheet is set to "4" and First
Page Only is turned off, four watermarks appear on the physical page (one on each logical page).
Watermark Details dialog box
Click Edit, and the Watermark Details dialog box appears. The following figure shows the Watermark
Details dialog box.
96 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
ENWW
Figure 3-10 Watermark Details dialog box
The dialog box shows a document preview image and provides options for creating a new watermark and controlling the message angle and the font attributes.
The Watermark Details dialog box contains the following controls:
● Current Watermarks
● Watermark Message
● Message Angle
● Document preview image
● Font Attributes
Current Watermarks
The Current Watermarks group box contains a list of available watermarks, both predefined watermarks that are available in the driver and any new watermarks that you have created.
To create a new watermark, click New. The new watermark appears in the Current Watermarks list and in the Watermark Message edit box as Untitled until you name it.
To name the new watermark, type the selected watermark text in the Watermark Message edit box.
To delete a watermark, select the watermark in the Current Watermarks list and click Delete.
NOTE You can have no more that 30 watermarks in the Current Watermarks list at one time.
When you reach the limit of 30 watermarks, the New button is disabled, and a Bubble Help message appears that explains why the button is disabled and how to make it available.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 driver features 97
To edit an existing watermark, select the watermark in the Current Watermarks list. If you change the
Watermark Message for that watermark, you are, in effect, creating a new watermark.
Watermark Message
The Watermark Message is also the name that identifies the watermark in the Current Watermarks list, except when more than one watermark has the same message. For example, you might want several different watermarks with the message DRAFT, each in a different font or size. When this occurs, the string is appended with a space, a pound sign, and a number (for example, Draft #2). When a number is added, the number two is used first, but if the resulting name is also in the list, then the number increases until the name is unique.
Message Angle
Use the controls in the Message Angle group box to print the watermark in a diagonal, horizontal, or angle (custom) orientation to the text on the page. The default is Diagonal. All three settings automatically center the watermark string within the page; the selection of a particular setting affects only the angle of the string placement. Diagonal places the text along a line that spans the lower-left to upper-right corners of the page.
Document preview image
The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the Watermark Details dialog box. The document preview image changes to reflect the modifications that you make in the Watermark
Details dialog box.
Font Attributes
Use the controls in the Font Attributes group box to change the font and the shading, size, and style of the font.
The Font Attributes group box contains the following controls:
● Name
The Name drop-down menu lists TrueType fonts that are currently installed on the system. The default is language-dependent.
● Color
The Color drop-down menu contains the following selections:
● Gray
● Red
● Yellow
● Green
● Cyan
● Blue
● Magenta
● Shading
98 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
ENWW
The default Shading setting for new and preset watermarks is Very Light. The following range of shades is available from the Shading drop-down menu:
● Lightest
● Very Light (default)
● Light
● Medium Light
● Medium
● Medium Dark
● Dark
● Very Dark
● Darkest
● Size
Font sizes from 1 to 999 points are available from the Size menu. The default point size is languagedependent. The default point size for preset watermarks is language-dependent.
● Style
The choice of Regular, Bold, Italic, and Bold Italic is available from the Style drop-down menu.
The default Style setting for new and current watermarks is Regular.
Default settings
The default settings for new watermarks are Arial font, Gray color, Very Light shading, size of 80, and
Regular style. The default settings for preset watermarks are Arial font, Very Light shading, and
Bold style. The default font name and point size for preset watermarks are language-dependent, and vary.
Click OK to accept all of the changes that have been made in the Watermark Details dialog box. Clicking
Cancel does not cancel all of the changes. If you make changes to a watermark and then select a different watermark or click New, all of the changes are saved, and only the current, unsaved changes can be canceled.
Paper tab features
To gain access to the Paper tab in Windows 98 or Windows Me, follow these steps:
1.
Click Start.
2.
Select Settings.
3.
Click Printers.
4.
Right-click the printer name.
5.
Click Properties.
6.
Click the Paper tab.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 driver features 99
Use the Paper tab to specify the size, type, and source of the media. You can also use this tab to indicate different paper-selection choices for the front cover, first page, other pages, last page, and back cover of the document. The following figure shows the Paper tab.
Figure 3-11 Paper tab
The Paper tab contains the following controls:
● Print Task Quick Sets group box
● Paper Options group box
● Document preview image
● Printer image
Print Task Quick Sets
The Print Task Quick Sets control is used to store the current combination of driver settings that appear on all of the other Document Defaults driver tabs. Print task quick sets are either preset (by the administrator) or user-defined printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet. For more information, see
Paper Options
The settings specified in the Paper Options group box on the Paper tab apply to all of the pages of the document. The following figure shows the Paper Options group box and the selections available by default.
100 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
ENWW
Figure 3-12 Paper Options group box (default)
The appearance of the Paper Options group box changes when the Use Different Paper/Covers check box is selected. For convenience, the settings in the Paper Options group box are described in the following order:
●
●
●
●
●
Size is
The Size is: setting is a drop-down menu that lists all of the supported media sizes.
NOTE When you move the mouse over the dimensions label, the mouse cursor changes from an arrow to a gloved hand. Click the dimensions label to toggle between English and metric units.
You can specify size for all of the settings in the Paper Options group box. When you set the media size in the driver, the entire print-job output uses that media size. That is, if the print job uses Letter-size media, any option that you select from the available Use Different Paper/Covers options must also use Letter-size media.
Because driver settings are overridden by media-size settings in most software programs, it is generally best to use the driver to set media size only for software programs that lack a media-size setting, such as NotePad, or when you are producing a book or a booklet that does not require different media sizes.
NOTE Certain software programs can override the size command and specify different media sizes within a single document.
When you change the print-driver setting to a media size that is not currently loaded in the product, a control-panel message appears that prompts you to load the media size or choose another tray.
For information about media sizes, see the
Media attributes section of this manual.
When the Use Different Paper/Covers check box is selected and different options are configured, the
Size is:, Source is:, and Type is: menus change, offering a variety of options. For more information, see
Custom
The Custom Paper Size dialog box appears when you click the Custom button on the Paper tab. The following figure shows the initial appearance of the Custom Paper Size dialog box.
NOTE The Custom button is not available when Use Different Paper/Covers is selected
and any setting other than First Page is also selected.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 driver features 101
Figure 3-13 Custom Paper Size dialog box
When the Custom Paper Size dialog box appears, the drop-down menu in the Name group contains one of two things, depending on the current paper-size selection on the Paper tab:
● If the paper-size selection is a previously defined custom size, then the drop-down menu contains the name of that custom size.
● If the paper-size selection is a standard media size, then the drop-down menu shows the default name Untitled (plus a number sign "#" and a numerical value) for a custom media size.
NOTE In Windows 98 and Windows Me, two names for the same size media can coexist (for example, "big" and "BIG" can both be used as names for custom-size media measuring 8.4 inches by 11 inches).
The new name is compared only against the list of user-defined custom media-size names, and not against the standard media-size names.
The complete set of titles for this button and the specific characteristics that determine its title and capabilities are discussed in the
Save, Delete, or Rename section.
Name
The Name drop-down menu shows the name of the custom media size that was selected most recently.
Use the Name drop-down menu to select from the list of currently defined custom media sizes, or to type a new name for a custom media size.
102 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
ENWW
The name that appears in the Name drop-down menu is one of three things, depending on the following conditions:
● If a saved custom media size has been selected from the drop-down menu and the other controls in the dialog box have not been changed since, then the Name drop-down menu shows the name of the last selected custom media size.
● If the width or height controls have been changed since a custom size was selected or saved, or if a saved media size has just been deleted, then the Name drop-down menu shows the default name of "Untitled."
● If a new name has been typed into the Name drop-down menu for the purpose of saving a new size or renaming an existing size, then that new name will remain in the drop-down menu until a saved custom media size has been selected from the drop-down menu.
If you type a new name into the Name drop-down menu, but then do not click the Save button, you can change the width and height values without losing the name. However, if a saved media-size name is selected from the drop-down menu, any unsaved name or size values are lost without warning, and replaced by the values of the selected custom media size.
Save, Delete, or Rename
The dynamic command button located under the Name drop-down menu has three possible labels:
Save, Delete, and Rename.
● Save is the button title whenever the height and width values have been changed since the most recent save action or since the selection of an existing custom media size. Clicking the button causes the name in the Name drop-down menu to be compared against each of the saved names.
If a duplicate is found, a dialog box appears, asking if it is okay to replace the existing item. If you click Yes, the old item is updated with the new values. If you click No, the driver returns to the
Custom Paper Size dialog box, where you can type a different name. The new name is compared only against the list of user-defined custom media names, and not against the standard media-size names. Whenever the command button has the Save title, it is the default button.
● Delete is the button title whenever the name of an existing (previously saved) custom media size appears in the Name drop-down menu, such as immediately after selecting an item from the dropdown menu or clicking the Save button. Clicking the Delete button causes the saved custom media size to be deleted, after which the Name drop-down menu changes to Untitled, the height and width controls are unchanged, and the button title changes to Save.
● Rename is the button title when you type something into the Name drop-down menu after selecting an existing custom media size from the drop-down menu. If no duplicate is found, then the name of the stored custom media size changes to match the contents of the Name drop-down menu.
The following table illustrates the relationships between the Name drop-down menu, the command button, and the actions that take users from one state to another.
Table 3-3 Name drop-down menu text strings
State
1
Drop-down menu contents
Untitled
Button label
Save
Action Next state
Click Save.
Type something into the Name drop-down menu.
Change the width or height values.
3
2
1
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 driver features 103
Table 3-3 Name drop-down menu text strings (continued)
State Drop-down menu contents
Button label Action
Select a saved item from the drop-down menu.
2
3
4
<user-typed text>
<name of saved item> Delete
<user-typed text>
Save
Rename
Click Save.
Type something into the Name drop-down menu.
Change the width or height values.
Select a saved item from the drop-down menu.
Click Delete.
Type something into the Name drop-down menu.
Change the width or height values.
Select a saved item from the drop-down menu.
Click Rename (when the name is unique).
Click Rename (when the name is a duplicate).
Type something into the Name drop-down menu.
Change the width or height values.
Select a saved item from the drop-down menu.
Next state
3
1
4
1
3
3
2
2
3
4
2
3
3
4
Custom size (width and height controls)
The width and height values can be changed either by typing numeric strings into the edit boxes, or by using the up and down arrows. The paper and envelope icons visually define width and height.
Any entry that is greater than the maximum limits of the width and height control is rounded down to the maximum valid entry, while any entry that is smaller than the minimum limits of the width and height
control is rounded up to the minimum valid entry. See Custom width and height control limits
.
If units are in millimeters, the custom media-size range minimum is the limit rounded up to the nearest whole millimeter. The custom media-size range maximum is the limit rounded down to the nearest whole millimeter. Any non-numerical entry reverts to the last valid entry. Width and height entries are validated when the focus has changed.
The resolution of each control is one millimeter or one-tenth of an inch, depending on the current measurement units. Clicking the up and down arrows increases or decreases the current value by the increment amount (within the allowed range of values). The computer determines the rate at which the values change.
Unit indicator labels change dynamically to indicate inches or millimeters, depending on the measurement units the driver is currently using. To change measurement units, click the dynamic
Measurement Units button (either Use Inches or Use Metric).
Custom width and height control limits
The minimum media size for the HP Color LaserJet 4700 is 76.2 x 127 mm (3 x 5 inches) and the maximum is 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 inches). The following table summarizes media size limits for each media-handling device.
104 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
ENWW
Table 3-4 PCL 6 custom media sizes
Tray
Tray 1 (100-sheet multipurpose)
Tray 2 (500-sheet)
Tray 3 (500-sheet)
Tray 4 (500-sheet)
Tray 5 (500-sheet)
Tray 6 (500-sheet)
Duplexing unit
Dimensions
Width
Height
Width
Height
Width
Height
Width
Height
Width
Height
Width
Height
Width
Height
Minimum
76.2 mm (3.0 inches)
127.0 mm (5.0 inches)
148.0 mm (5.83 inches)
210.0 mm (8.26 inches)
148.0 mm (5.83 inches)
210.0 mm (8.26 inches)
148.0 mm (5.83 inches)
210.0 mm (8.26 inches)
148.0 mm (5.83 inches)
210.0 mm (8.26 inches)
148.0 mm (5.83 inches)
210.0 mm (8.26 inches)
148.0 mm (5.83 inches)
210.0 mm (8.26 inches)
Maximum
215 mm (8.5 inches)
355.6 mm (14.0 inches)
215.9 mm (8.5 inches)
355.6 mm (14.0 inches)
215.9 mm (8.5 inches)
355.6 mm (14.0 inches)
215.9 mm (8.5 inches)
355.6 mm (14.0 inches)
215.9 mm (8.5 inches)
355.6 mm (14.0 inches)
215.9 mm (8.5 inches)
355.6 mm (14.0 inches)
215.9 mm (8.5 inches)
355.6 mm (14.0 inches)
Dynamic measurement units
Use the Dynamic Measurement Units button to toggle the unit of measurement between standard
(inches) and metric (millimeters) units of measurement. The label on this button is dynamic, depending on the measurement units that are in use. If the custom size currently shows the measurements in inches, the button is labeled Use Millimeters. If the custom size currently shows the measurements in millimeters, the button is labeled Use Inches. Click the button to switch measurement-unit types.
Close
The Close button closes the Custom Paper Size dialog box according to the logic in the following table.
In all cases, any custom media sizes that are successfully saved (and not renamed or deleted) while the dialog box is open will remain in the Size is: drop-down menu on the Paper tab. The following table lists options that appear when you click the Close button.
Table 3-5 Close dialog box text strings
If the drop-down menu contains
Untitled
<user-typed text>
And the button says
Save
Save
Then this happens when the Close button is clicked
The dialog box closes, but you lose the changes that were not saved.
The current media size remains the same as it was when the Custom button was clicked.
The dialog box closes, but you lose the changes that were not saved.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 driver features 105
Table 3-5 Close dialog box text strings (continued)
If the drop-down menu contains And the button says
<name of saved item>
<user-typed text>
Delete
Rename
Then this happens when the Close button is clicked
The current media size remains the same as it was when the Custom button was clicked.
The dialog box closes, and the current media size is set to the size that was last shown in the drop-down menu.
The dialog box closes, but you lose the changes that were not saved.
The current media size remains the same as it was when the Custom button was clicked.
Source Is
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source trays depends on the printer accessories. Any optional source trays that are installed through the
Configure tab also appear here.
The Source is: drop-down menu can contain the following options, depending on what has been installed on the product:
● Automatically select
● Manual Feed in Tray 1
● Tray 1 (100-sheet multipurpose tray)
● Tray 2 (500-sheet tray)
● Tray 3 (500-sheet tray)
● Tray 4 (500-sheet tray)
● Tray 5 (500-sheet tray)
● Tray 6 (500-sheet tray)
The default setting is Automatically Select. When this setting is selected, the HP Color LaserJet 4700 uses the source tray that supports the media size that you have selected. If you select a source tray other than Automatically select, make sure that the correct media size is loaded in the source tray.
For more information about media sources, see the
Media attributes section of this manual.
Type is
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the HP Color LaserJet 4700 supports.
When you use the default setting, Unspecified, the printer uses the default media type, which is usually
Plain.
The following standard types appear in the lists:
● Unspecified
● Plain
106 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
ENWW
● Preprinted
● Letterhead
● Transparency
● Prepunched
● Labels
● Bond
● Recycled
● Color
● Cardstock
● Rough
● Heavy 105–120 g/m 2
● Envelope
● Light 60-75 g/m 2
● Intermediate 90-104 g/m 2
● Extra Heavy 120-163 g/m 2
● Glossy 75-120 g/m 2
● Heavy Glossy 120-160 g/m 2
● Tough Paper (Glossy Film)
● Extra Heavy Glossy 160-220 g/m 2
The default setting is Unspecified, and the program selects the media type. If you select a different setting, make sure that the correct media type is loaded in the tray that you selected in the Source is: setting.
When you change the print-driver setting to a media type that is not currently loaded in the product, a control-panel message appears that prompts you to load the media type or choose another tray.
For more information about media types, see the Media attributes section of this manual.
Use Different Paper/Covers
You can print books that are comprised of different media types using the Use Different Paper/
Covers options.
When you select the Use Different Paper/Covers check box, the following settings can appear in the group box, along with associated options:
● Front Cover
● First Page
● Other Pages
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 driver features 107
● Last Page
● Back Cover
NOTE You must use the same size of media for the entire print job. All Use Different Paper/
Covers options use the size that you selected in the First Page settings and the Size is: driver setting becomes unavailable for all of the other Use Different Paper/Covers options. Therefore, the First Page settings are described first in the following sections.
When you change the type and source of the media and covers, the settings you select remain configured until you close the software program.
Each option for the Use Different Paper/Covers setting is described in the following sections.
Front Cover
Use the Front Cover options to include a blank or preprinted front cover on a document, or to include a front cover from a source tray that is different from the one that is used for the remainder of the document.
The following figure shows the Front Cover setting and options.
Figure 3-14 Front Cover options
The Front Cover options are as follows:
● Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box
● Source is: drop-down menu
● Type is: drop-down menu
When you select Front Cover, you must also select the Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box to enable the setting. When you select this check box, the Source is: and Type is: drop-down menus become available and a check mark appears next to the Front Cover option.
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for adding a front cover to the document. The list of source trays depends on the printer accessories. Any optional media trays that are installed through the Configure tab also appear here. For more information about the Source is: setting, see the
Source Is section of this chapter.
108 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the printer supports. For more
information about the Type is:drop-down menu settings, see the Type is: in the Type is
section of this chapter.
First Page
Use the First Page option to select an alternative media size, type, or source for the first page of a document. The following figure shows the appearance of the Paper Options group box when you select the Use Different Paper/Covers check box. The First Page setting is selected by default.
ENWW
Figure 3-15 First Page options
The following are the First Page options:
● Size is: drop-down menu
● Source is: drop-down menu
● Type is: drop-down menu
The Size is: driver setting for the first page applies to the entire print job. When this is set, the setting becomes unavailable for all the other Use Different Paper/Covers options.
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source trays depends on the printer accessories. Any optional media trays that are installed through the
Configure tab also appear here. For more information about the Source is: setting, see the
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the printer supports. For more
Other Pages
Use the Other Pages options to select an alternative media source (or the same source as First
Page) for the other pages of the document.
The Other Pages setting and options are shown in the following figure.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 driver features 109
Figure 3-16 Other Pages options
The following are the Other Pages options:
● Source is: drop-down menu
● Type is: drop-down menu
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source trays depends on the printer accessories. Any optional media trays that are installed through the
Configure tab also appear here. For more information about the Source is: setting, see the Source
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the printer supports. For more information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the description for Type is: in the
section of this chapter.
Last Page
Use the Last Page options to select an alternative media type or source for the last page of a document.
The following figure shows the appearance of the Paper Options group box when you select the Use
Different Paper/Covers check box.
Figure 3-17 Last Page options
110 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
The following are the Last Page options:
● Source is: drop-down menu
● Type is: drop-down menu
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source trays depends on the printer accessories. Any optional media trays that are installed through the
Configure tab also appear here. For more information about the Source is: setting, see the
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the printer supports. For more
Back Cover
Use the Back Cover options to include a blank or preprinted back cover on a document.
The following figure shows the Back Cover setting and options.
ENWW
Figure 3-18 Back Cover setting
The following are the Back Cover options:
● Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box
● Source is: drop-down menu
● Type is: drop-down menu
When you select Back Cover, you must also select the Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box to enable the setting. When you select this check box, the Source is: and Type is: drop-down menus become available and a check mark appears next to the Back Cover option.
NOTE The Back Cover options are not available when the Booklet Printing Layout setting is enabled on the Finishing tab. The back cover setting is unavailable, because this page would otherwise be printed in the middle of a booklet.
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for adding a back cover to the document. The list of source trays depends on the printer accessories. Any optional media trays that are installed
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 driver features 111
through the Configure tab also appear here. For more information about the Source is: setting, see the
Source Is section of this chapter.
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the printer supports. For more information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the Type is: in the
chapter.
Document preview image
The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of all of the Document Defaults driver tabs except the Job Storage tab. For more information about the document preview image, see the
Finishing tab features section of this chapter.
Printer image
The bitmap image in the lower-right portion of the Paper tab represents the current physical configuration of the printer and corresponds to its configuration data. It should look the same as the image that appears in the same location on the Configure tab in the Printer Properties.
On the Paper tab, the printer image contains hot spots where you can select a media source. When you use the mouse to move the pointer over a hot spot, the arrow reverts to a gloved hand. The current media source tray, whether selected from the drop-down menu or from a printer image hot spot, is highlighted on the printer image. The following points are worth noting:
● The Automatically Select setting in the Source is: drop-down menu does not have a corresponding area to highlight in the printer image. Selecting other settings in this menu highlights the corresponding part in the printer image.
● Selecting the area that represents a tray in the image always selects the corresponding tray in the
Source is: option. Manual Feed in Tray 1, which is available from the Source is: drop-down menu, cannot be selected by selecting the image.
● On the Paper tab, only source trays have printer image hot spots and can be highlighted.
Output tab features
To gain access to the Output tab in Windows 98 or Windows Me, follow these steps:
1.
Click Start.
2.
Select Settings.
3.
Click Printers.
4.
Right-click the printer name.
5.
Click Properties.
6.
Click the Output tab.
NOTE The Output tab does not appear unless you have output accessories installed and configured on the printer.
Use the Output tab to select finishing and output options for a document. The following figure shows the Output tab.
112 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
ENWW
Figure 3-19 Output tab
The Output tab contains the following controls:
● Print Task Quick Sets group box
● Output Options group box
● Document preview image
● Printer image
Print Task Quick Sets
The Print Task Quick Sets control is used to store the current combination of driver settings that appear on all other Document Defaults driver tabs. Print Task Quick Sets are either preset (by the administrator) or user-defined printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet. For more information, see
Output Options
The Output Options group box contains a drop-down menu to select staple options for a document.
Use the Staple drop-down menu to select how many staples to use and how the staples are placed on the document. The following settings are available:
● None
● One staple
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 driver features 113
Document preview image
The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The document preview image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right-side-up.
Switching between tabs does not change the location or appearance of the document preview image.
When you move the mouse over the document preview image, the mouse cursor changes from an arrow to a gloved hand. You can toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by clicking the document preview image.
Printer image
The bitmap image in the lower-right portion of the Output tab represents the current physical configuration of the printer and corresponds to its configuration data. It should look the same as the image that appears in the same location on the Configure tab in the Printer Properties.
Job Storage tab features
To gain access to the Job Storage tab, follow these steps:
1.
Click Start.
2.
Select Settings.
3.
Click Printers.
4.
Right-click the printer name.
5.
Click Properties.
6.
Click the Job Storage tab.
NOTE The Job Storage tab appears only when a hard disk is installed or at least 288 MB of total memory is installed and configured.
Use the Job Storage features to store print jobs in the HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer memory for printing at a later time. These job-storage features are described in the following sections.
The Job Storage tab appears among the driver tabs only if Job Storage is enabled. To support jobstorage features for complex jobs, or if you often print complex graphics, print postscript (.PS) documents, or use many downloaded fonts, HP recommends that you install additional memory, install a hard disk, or both. Added memory also gives you more flexibility in supporting job storage features.
A hard disk or a minimum total memory of 288 MB is required to use Job Storage features.
After a hard disk or additional memory is installed, the driver must be configured to reflect the changes in the product. If bidirectional communication is enabled in your environment, the Update Now feature
To configure the drivers manually after installing a hard disk or additional memory, follow these steps:
1.
Click Start.
2.
Select Settings.
3.
Click Printers.
4.
Right-click the product name.
114 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
ENWW
5.
Click Properties.
6.
Click the Configure tab.
7.
Under Other Options, click More....
8.
If additional memory has been installed, change the setting in the Total Memory: drop-down menu.
If you select a minimum of 288 MB of total memory installed in the printer, this also selects the Job
Storage Enabled check box.
9.
If a hard disk has been installed, select the Printer Hard Disk check box in the Storage group box. This also selects the Job Storage Enabled check box.
10.
Click OK to make the product hard disk and job-storage features available.
You can disable Job Storage while leaving the product hard disk enabled. To disable Job Storage, follow these steps:
1.
Click Start.
2.
Select Settings.
3.
Click Printers.
4.
Right-click the printer name.
5.
Click Properties.
6.
Click the Configure tab.
7.
Click More....
8.
Click to clear the Job Storage Enabled check box in the More Configuration Options box.
NOTE When Job Storage is disabled, the Job Storage tab is not visible.
If Job Storage is enabled (without installing a hard disk but with at least 288 MB of total memory), two Job Storage Mode settings are available on the Job Storage tab:
● Proof and Hold
● Private Job
Two additional Job Storage Mode settings become available on the Job Storage tab if a hard disk is installed:
● Quick Copy
● Stored Job
The following illustration shows the Job Storage tab.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 driver features 115
Figure 3-20 Job Storage tab
The Job Storage tab contains the following controls:
● Print Task Quick Sets group box
● Status group box (unlabeled)
● Job Storage Mode group box
● PIN group box
● Job Notification Options group box
● User Name group box
● Job Name group box
Print Task Quick Sets
Use the Print Task Quick Sets control is to store the current combination of driver settings that appear on all of the other Document Defaults driver tabs. Print task quick sets are either preset (by the administrator) or user-defined printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet. For more information, see
Status group box
The unlabeled group box on the Job Storage tab contains a status message about the destination of a print job. The status information changes depending on the selections that are made on the Job
Storage tab.
116 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
ENWW
Job Storage Mode
Use the Job Storage Mode options on the HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer to store documents at the product and then control their printing at the product control panel.
The HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer offers the following Job Storage Mode options:
● Off
● Proof and Hold
● Private Job
● Quick Copy
● Stored Job
These options and the settings that control them are described in the following sections.
Off
When selected, this option turns the Job Storage feature off (it is disabled), which means that the print job will not be stored in the product.
Proof and Hold
To use the Proof and Hold option, Job Storage must be enabled, and the product must have a minimum total memory of 288 MB.
When selected, this option stores the print job in memory and prints only the first copy of the job, allowing you to check the first copy. If the document prints correctly, you can print the remaining copies of the print job at the product control panel. You can set the number of proof-and-hold print jobs that can be stored in the product at the control panel.
After it is released for printing, the proof-and-hold job is immediately deleted from the product. If more copies are needed, you must reprint the job from the software program. Proof-and-hold jobs are deleted if you turn off the product.
NOTE The product configuration can be set to hold a maximum of 50 quick-copy or proof-andhold jobs. The number is set at the product control panel in the CONFIGURATION menu, and the default is 32. When this preset limit is reached, the new document overwrites the oldest held document.
Private Job
To use the Private Job option, Job Storage must be enabled, and the product must have a minimum total memory of 288 MB.
When you select Private Job, the print job is sent to the product, but is not printed until you request the job at the product control panel. Selecting Private Job activates the PIN group box. The print job can be printed only after you type the correct PIN at the control panel. After the job is printed, the job is deleted from the product. This feature is useful when you are printing sensitive or confidential documents that you do not want to leave in an output bin after printing.
The Private Job/PIN coupling has a PIN restriction of four ASCII numeric characters (0 though 9). If you type non-numeric characters, they are removed immediately. The text field does not allow you to type more than four characters. The field temporarily accepts fewer than four digits in the string, but when
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 driver features 117
the edit field loses focus, the zeroes pad the left end until the PIN contains exactly four digits. The default initialized value for the PIN is 0000 for Private Job.
After it is released for printing, the private job is immediately deleted from the product. If more copies are needed, you must reprint the job from the software program. Private jobs are deleted if you turn off the product.
Quick Copy
To use the Quick Copy option, a hard disk must be installed and Job Storage must be enabled.
When you select Quick Copy, the entire print job prints and a copy of the print job is stored on the product, after which you can print additional copies of the print job at the product control panel. The number of quick-copy print jobs that can be stored in the product is set by using the product control panel.
NOTE The product configuration can be set to hold a maximum of 50 quick-copy or proof-andhold jobs. The number is set at the product control panel in the CONFIGURATION menu, and the default is 32. When this preset limit is reached, the new document overwrites the oldest held document. Quick Copy jobs are deleted if you turn off the product.
Stored Job
To use the Stored Job option, a hard disk must be installed and Job Storage must be enabled
Use the Stored Job option to send a print job directly to the product hard disk without printing it. The print job is stored in the product as if it is an electronic file cabinet. After the print job is stored on the product hard disk, you can print the job at the product control panel.
The job remains stored in the product until it is deleted. Stored jobs remain on the product hard disk when the product is turned off. Use this feature for forms and other common or shared documents.
A stored job can be managed in two ways: as either a private or a public job. Use a private stored job to send a print job directly to the product, which can then be printed only after you type a PIN at the product control panel. (You can set the PIN in the PIN group box.) After the job is printed, the job remains in the product and can be printed again at the product control panel. The private mode is initiated by selecting the Require PIN to Print check box. In this mode, a PIN that is typed at the product control panel is required in order to release the job.
The box labeled PIN is usually inactive. The Require PIN to Print option becomes available when you select Stored Job. If you select the Require PIN to Print box, you must type a PIN to make the stored job private.
NOTE A private stored job is not the same as a private job (see above). Private jobs are deleted from the product after they are printed. Private stored jobs are retained in the product after printing, but require that a PIN be typed each time they are printed.
118 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
ENWW
PIN
The PIN group box is usually inactive. The option within the PIN group box, PIN to Print, is activated if you select either of the following options:
● Select Private Job. If selected, you must type the PIN number at the product control panel in order
to print the job. For more information, see Private Job
.
● Select Stored Job, and then select the Require PIN to Print check box. If the Require PIN to
Print check box is selected, you must type a PIN in order to make the stored job private. For more information, see the
Job notification
Clicking a job storage mode selection causes the Job Notification Options group box to become available. The Display Job ID when printing check box is selected by default. The Display Job ID
when printing option causes a pop-up dialog box to appear when the job-storage print job is printed.
The dialog box shows the user name and job name that are associated with the stored print job, as well as the product name, port, and location.
User Name
Use the User Name settings to help identify the job at the product control panel. The following are the User Name settings:
● Windows User Name. This option associates your Windows user name with the stored print job.
The Windows user name automatically appears in the text field below the User Name options.
● Custom. Use this option to type a custom name for the stored print job. When you click the
Custom radio button, the text field below the option becomes available. The User Name field can contain no more than 16 characters.
Job Name
Use the text box in the Job Name group box to specify a name to identify the job at the product control panel. The Automatic option is the default selection. It uses a default job name for the stored print job.
The file name of the print job is used if it is available to the print driver. Otherwise, the software program name or a time stamp is used for the job name. If you would like to enter a custom name, select
Custom and type the custom job name in the text box. The Job Name text box can contain no more than 16 characters.
If Custom is selected but no job name is specified, as soon as the focus is removed from the control
(that is, when the Tab key is pressed or another control is selected), the empty string is replaced with
<Automatic>. In those languages for which <Automatic> cannot be translated without the use of invalid characters, the driver uses a string of three dashes. The acceptable characters for job name and user name vary for each operating system. The string must be of a length and type that can appear on the product control-panel display.
Use the If Job Name Exists drop-down box to choose whether a duplicate job name should have a number appended to it, or whether it should overwrite an existing job with the same name that has already been sent to the printer.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 driver features 119
Using Job Storage features when printing
To use Job Storage features when printing, follow these steps:
1.
Click File and then click Print from the software program. The Print dialog box appears.
NOTE Clicking the print icon in the software program toolbar prints the job without using
Job Storage features.
2.
Click Properties. The Properties dialog box appears.
3.
Click the Job Storage tab.
4.
Select the Job Storage options (described previously) by clicking the appropriate option button, and then complete any required fields.
5.
Click OK.
Releasing a Job Storage print job
After you send a print job that uses the Job Storage feature, you can release the job to print from the product control panel.
1.
Press (the Select button; the one with the check mark) to open the menus.
2.
Press (the up button) and (the down button) until RETRIEVE JOB is highlighted on the product control panel, and then press .
3.
Press (the up button) and (the down button) to scroll to your User Name, and then press
.
4.
Press and to scroll to the Job Name, and then press .
5.
Press (the up button) and (the down button) until PRINT is highlighted on the product control panel, and then press .
6.
Press .
7.
If a PIN number is assigned to the job, press and to select the first digit of the PIN, and then press . The number in the product control-panel display changes to an asterisk. Repeat this step for each of the remaining three digits of the PIN number.
If no PIN number is assigned to the job, continue with step 7.
8.
Press and to select the number of copies to print.
9.
Press to print the job.
Deleting a Job Storage print job
Sometimes it is necessary to delete a print job from the product hard disk. You can do this from the product control panel.
1.
Press (the Select button; the one with the check mark) to open the menus.
2.
Press (the up button) and (the down button) until RETRIEVE JOB is highlighted on the product control panel, and then press .
3.
Press
120 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
4.
Press the up and down buttons to scroll to your User Name, and then press .
5.
Press and to scroll to the Job Name, and then press .
6.
Press (the up button) and (the down button) until DELETE is highlighted on the product control panel, and then press .
7.
Press .
8.
If a PIN number is assigned to the job, press and to select the first digit of the PIN, and then press . The number in the product control-panel display changes to an asterisk. Repeat this step for each of the remaining three digits of the PIN number.
If no PIN number is assigned to the job, continue with step 7.
9.
Press to delete the job.
The stored print job is deleted and the product returns to the READY state.
Basics tab features
To gain access to the Basics tab in Windows 98 or Windows Me, follow these steps:
1.
Click Start.
2.
Select Settings.
3.
Click Printers.
4.
Right-click the printer name.
5.
Click Properties.
6.
Click the Basics tab.
The Basics tab provides options for setting the number of copies to be printed and for the orientation of the print job. You can also use it to retrieve information about the driver.
ENWW HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 driver features 121
Figure 3-21 Basics tab
The Basics tab contains the following controls:
● Print Task Quick Sets group box
● Copies group box
● Orientation group box
● Document preview image
● About button
Print Task Quick Sets
The Print Task Quick Sets control is available on all of the Properties driver tabs (Finishing, Output,
Effects, Paper, Job Storage, and Basics). The feature is used to store the current combination of driver settings that appear on all of the other tabs. Print Task Quick Sets are either preset (by the administrator) or user-defined printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet. For more information, see the
Finishing tab features section of this chapter.
Copies
Use the Copies option to specify the number of copies to print.
The number of copies that you request appears in the Copies group box. You can select the number by typing in the box or by using the up and down arrows to the right of the text box. Valid entries are numbers from 1 to 9999 for the HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer. The copies value will not advance from
122 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
ENWW the maximum number (9999) to 1 when the up arrow is used, or change from 1 to the maximum number
(9999) when the down arrow is used. When you click another group box or leave the Basics tab, invalid entries into the edit box (such as non-numerical input, numbers less than 1, or numbers greater than the maximum allowed) are changed to the last valid value that appeared in the box. The default number of copies is 1.
Because you can set the number of copies that you want from some software programs, conflicts between the software program you are using and the driver can arise. In most cases, the software program and the driver communicate, so that the number of copies set in one location (such as the program) will appear in the other (such as the driver). For some programs, this communication does not take place, and the copies values are treated independently. For these programs, setting 10 copies in the program and then setting 10 copies in the driver will result in 100 copies (10 x 10) being printed. It is recommended that you set the number of copies in the program, wherever possible.
Orientation
Orientation refers to the layout of the image on the page, and does not affect the manner in which media is fed into the printer. You can specify the orientation of the print job. The three available orientations are portrait, landscape, and rotated. The default orientation is Portrait.
NOTE Nearly all software programs establish the orientation for the printed page, so the page orientation in the driver is useful only for the few software programs that do not set an orientation.
The Orientation group box contains three options:
● Portrait. The top edge of the document is the shorter edge of the media.
● Landscape. The top edge of the document is the longer edge of the media.
● Rotate by 180 degrees. This creates a landscape or portrait orientation in which the image is rotated 180° degrees. This setting is useful for printing prepunched media.
You can toggle orientation between portrait and landscape by clicking the document preview image. If you select the Rotate by 180 degrees check box, no change occurs in the document preview image.
Document preview image
The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of all of the Properties driver tabs (the
Finishing, Output, Effects, Paper, Job Storage, and Basics tabs). For more information about the document preview image, see
About
When you click the About button on the Basics tab, or you click the HP logo on any of the driver
Properties tabs, the About This Driver dialog box appears. To close the About box, click OK, press Esc , press Alt + F4 , or press Enter . The following figure shows the About This Driver dialog box.
The information it contains varies according to driver, date, and version.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 driver features 123
Figure 3-22 About This Driver dialog box
The About This Driver dialog box provides the following information:
● Printer name
● Driver name
● Print driver version number
● Copyright information
● Driver Extensions (if any)
● Configuration Status
The printer name, the driver name, the print driver version number, and the copyright information appear at the top of the About This Driver dialog box.
The Driver Extensions group box lists the driver extensions, if any.
The Configuration Status group box indicates whether the driver was autoconfigured, whether administrator preferences were set, the date the driver was last configured, and whether the configuration is default or user-defined.
Color tab features
To gain access to the Color tab in Windows 98 or Windows Me, follow these steps:
1.
Click Start.
2.
Select Settings.
3.
Click Printers.
4.
Right-click the printer name.
124 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
5.
Click Properties.
6.
Click the Color tab.
Use the Color tab to specify predefined color-option settings or to fine-tune the color treatments and halftoning. Color output can also be converted to grayscale. The Color tab is shown in the following figure.
ENWW
Figure 3-23 Color tab
The Color tab contains the following controls:
● Print Task Quick Sets group box
● Color Options group box
● Color Themes group box
● Document preview image
Print Task Quick Sets
The Print Task Quick Sets control is available on each Printing Preference tab, and is used to store the current combination of driver settings found on all of the other tabs. Print Task Quick Sets are either preset or user-defined printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet. For more information, see
.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 driver features 125
Color Options
Use the Color Options group box to adjust the independent color controls. The settings affect the print job color rendering and print quality. The Color Options group box contains the following controls:
● Automatic option (default)
● Manual option
● Settings button (that opens the Color Settings dialog box)
● Print in Grayscale check box
Automatic
Use the Automatic option for default color settings that automatically fine-tune the printed output. The
Automatic default color settings provide high-quality output for most color-printing needs.
Manual
To change the default color settings, select the Manual option, and then click the Settings button. The
Color Settings dialog box appears.
To change the settings, make your selections by using the drop-down menus in the Color Settings dialog box, and then click OK. The following figure shows the Color Settings dialog box with "Automatic" settings.
Figure 3-24 Color Settings dialog box
126 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
ENWW
The Color Settings dialog box contains the following controls for each of the following components:
● General
● Edge Control
● Text
● Neutral Grays
● Halftone
● Graphics
● Neutral Grays
● Halftone
● Photographs
● Neutral Grays
● Halftone
General
Use the General setting group to control Edge Control settings for all color printing.
Edge Control determines how edges are rendered. Edge Control consists of three components:
Adaptive Halftoning, Trapping, and C-REt. Adaptive Halftoning increases the edge sharpness. Trapping reduces the effect of color plane misregistration by slightly overlapping the edges of adjacent objects.
C-REt increases the apparent resolution by placing each dot for the smoothest edges.
The Edge Control option offers four settings:
● Normal. The Normal setting provides the default trapping settings. Adaptive Halftoning is set to
On, and C-REt is set to On.
● Light. The Light setting provides minimal trapping. Adaptive Halftoning is set to On and C-REt is set to On.
● Maximum. The Maximum setting provides the most trapping. Adaptive Halftoning is set to On, and C-REt is set to On.
● Off. The Off setting turns Trapping, Adaptive Halftoning, and C-REt to Off.
Neutral Grays
The Neutral Grays drop-down menu controls the selection of a device-dependent color table that is embedded in the printer firmware. The options are Black Only or 4-Color. You can adjust the Neutral
Grays setting independently for text, graphics, or photographs.
● Black Only. This option generates neutral colors (grays and black) by using only black toner. This option guarantees that neutral colors do not have a color cast. Black Only is the default setting for the Text and Graphics components.
● 4-Color. This option generates neutral colors by combining all four colors of toner, which produces smoother gradients and transitions to non-neutral colors. It also produces the darkest possible black. 4-Color is the default setting for Photographs.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 driver features 127
Halftone
The Halftone setting controls the selection of a printer-dependent halftone algorithm that is embedded in the printer firmware. Halftoning is a method by which the printer mixes the four primary colors (cyan, magenta, yellow, and black) in varying proportions to create millions of colors. The Halftone options affect the resolution and clarity of the color on the printed page. You can select Halftone settings for text, graphics, and photographs independently. The following Halftone settings are available:
● Detail. This is the default option; it is useful for text and graphics that require sharp distinctions among lines or colors, or for images that contain a pattern or a high level of detail. Choose this option for sharp edges and detail.
● Smooth. This option provides better results for large, solid-filled print areas. It also enhances photographs by smoothing out fine color gradations. Choose this option for uniform and smooth area fills.
Print in Grayscale
Select Print in Grayscale to print a document in black and white. This option is useful for previewing preliminary copies of slides and hardcopy output quickly or for printing color documents that will be photocopied or faxed.
Color Themes
The Color Themes group box contains the following settings:
● Default (sRGB)
● Image Optimization (sRGB)
● Adobe RGB (1998)
● None
● Custom Profile
Default (sRGB)
Select Default (sRGB) for most printing needs. This setting instructs the printer to interpret RGB color as sRGB, which is the accepted standard of Microsoft and the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C).
Colors are matched to optimize the RGB colors on the screen and to provide vivid images and graphics.
Image Optimization (sRGB)
Select Image optimization (sRGB) to enhance documents in which the content is mainly bitmap images, such as .GIF or .JPG files. This setting instructs the printer to use the best color matching for rendering sRGB bitmap images. This setting affects only raster data; it has no effect on text or vectorbased graphics. Using glossy media in combination with this setting provides the maximum enhancement.
Adobe RGB (1998)
Select AdobeRGB (1998) for documents that use the Adobe RGB color space rather than sRGB. For example, some digital cameras capture images in Adobe RBG, and documents that are produced with
Adobe Photoshop® use the Adobe RGB color space. When printing from a professional software program that uses Adobe RGB , turn off the color management in the software program and allow the printer software to manage the color space.
128 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
ENWW
None
Select None to instruct the printer to print RGB data in raw device mode. To render documents correctly when this option is selected, you must manage color within the software program or the operating system.
NOTE To prevent poor image quality, use this option only if you are familiar with the procedures for managing color in the software program or the operating system.
Custom Profile
Select Custom Profile when you want to simulate the printed output from other printers or for using special effects, such as sepia tones. This setting instructs the printer to use a custom input profile to more accurately predict and control color output.
The default Custom Profile is the color table used on the HP Color LaserJet 4650. The printer holds only one custom profile at a time, so when you download and install another color table, it erases the default color table and installs the new one. You can download custom profiles from the following Web site: www.hp.com/support/clj4700
Configure tab features
To gain access to the Configure tab in Windows 98 or Windows Me, follow these steps:
1.
Click Start.
2.
Select Settings.
3.
Click Printers.
4.
Right-click the printer name.
5.
Click Properties.
6.
Click the Configure tab.
Use the Configure tab to tell the driver about the printer hardware configuration. If bidirectional communication is enabled in a supported environment, set up this tab by clicking the Update Now button. If your environment does not support bidirectional communication, the Update Now button is unavailable, so you must manually configure the options on this tab.
The Configure tab is available when the driver is opened from the Printers folder by clicking
Properties. When you open the driver from within a program, the Configure tab is not visible (with a few exceptions, such as when using Excel 5.0 or Corel® Chart 4.0). When opened from the Printers folder, the Configure tab looks like the following figure.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 driver features 129
Figure 3-25 Configure tab
The Configure tab contains the following controls:
●
●
●
●
●
Printer Model
In the Printer Model group box, the driver title depends on the printer model being used. Selection of any model in the drop-down menu makes the appropriate changes to other configuration options on the tab.
The Printer Model setting automatically changes to User Configured whenever you change any of the device configuration settings on the tab.
The list of models and the changes they produce are described in the table below. The models are as follows:
● 4700: HP Color LaserJet 4700
● 4700n: HP Color LaserJet 4700n
130 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
ENWW
● 4700dn: HP Color LaserJet 4700dn
● 4700dtn: HP Color LaserJet 4700dtn
● 4700ph+: HP Color LaserJet 4700ph+
Table 3-6 Printer-model configuration settings
Driver location
Configuration tab Duplexing Unit
More
Configuration
Options dialog box
Setting
Allow Manual Duplex
Mopier Enabled
Optional Paper
Destination
Optional Paper Source
Printer Hard Disk
Job Storage Enabled
Font Card
Allow Scaling from
Large Paper
Alternative Letterhead
Mode
Ignore Application
Collation
Printer Memory
DWS
Include Types in
Applications Source
List
4700
Available, not selected
Selected
Unavailable, not selected
(None)
(None)
Available, not selected
Unavailable, not selected
Available, not selected
Available, not selected
Unavailable, not selected
Unavailable, not selected
160 MB
6.0 MB
Selected
4700n 4700dn 4700dtn 4700ph+
Available, not selected
Selected
Selected Selected
Selected Unavailable, not selected
(None) (None)
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
(None)
(None) (None)
Available, not selected
Available, not selected
2 x HP 500-
Sheet Input
Tray
Available, not selected
Unavailable, not selected
Selected Selected
Available, not selected
Available, not selected
Available, not selected
Available, not selected
Unavailable, not selected
Available, not selected
Available, not selected
Available, not selected
Available, not selected
Selected Selected Unavailable, not selected
160 MB
6.0 MB
Selected
288 MB
70.0 MB
Selected
544 MB
198.0 MB
Selected
HP 750-
Sheet
Stapler/
Stacker
4 x HP 500-
Sheet Input
Tray
Selected
Selected
Available, not selected
Available, not selected
Available, not selected
Selected
544 MB
198.0 MB
Selected
If it is installed and working, the bidirectional mechanism will detect the correct model and update the configuration accordingly, either during installation or when you select Update Now on the Configure tab. However, the printer model name shown in the Printer Model text box is set to Autoconfigured.
Paper Handling Options
The Paper Handling Options group box contains the following controls:
●
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 driver features 131
●
●
●
●
Duplexing unit
The HP Color LaserJet 4700dn, HP Color LaserJet 4700dtn, and HP Color LaserJet 4700ph+ printer models are equipped with automatic 2-sided printing (duplexing), which allows you to print on both sides of supported media. Automatic 2-sided printing is not supported for certain media types, including transparencies, labels, envelopes, and cardstock.
NOTE The HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer supports smart duplexing. The product uses the smart duplexing feature to detect information on both sides of the print job pages and only runs the pages through the duplexing unit if printable information appears on the second side of the page.
Allow Manual Duplexing
Select Allow Manual Duplexing to print on both sides of any size and most types of media (except transparencies, envelopes, and labels). To use this feature, you must reinsert the media stack into the input tray to print the second side. The product pauses while you make this adjustment.
Mopier Enabled
The multiple-original print (mopy) function is an HP-designed feature that produces multiple, collated copies from a single print job. Multiple-original printing (mopying) increases performance and reduces network traffic by transmitting the job to the product once, and then temporarily stores it on the hard disk. The remainder of the copies are printed at the fastest speed.
The HP Color LaserJet 4700 supports the transmit-once mopying feature when the product has an installed hard disk or a minimum total memory of 288 MB, and the Mopier Enabled setting on the
Configure tab is on.
Mopier mode and collation
Mopying and collating print jobs are independent but closely related functions. The print driver performs mopying, which is the ability to send multiple original print jobs to the product. Collating is controlled by using either the print driver or the document software program. The mopying mode can be disabled by clearing the Mopier Enabled selection on the Configure tab to disable the feature.
You can control collation through the print driver by selecting or clearing the Ignore Application
Collation check box in the More Configuration Options dialog box that appears when you click the
More... button on the Configure tab. You can clear the check box, which is available only when the
Mopier Enabled setting on the Configure tab is selected, to allow the software program to control collation.
To receive uncollated multiple copies of a print job with the mopier enabled, you must clear the Ignore
Application Collation check box and make sure that the software program collation feature is not selected.
The following table shows the relation between Mopier Enabled settings and collation settings in the software program and the driver. The first three columns show the settings; the last column, "Expected result," shows how a three-page print job would appear.
132 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
ENWW
Table 3-7 Driver Mopier mode and collation settings
Mopier Enabled Application collation
Not selected
Not selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Not selected
Selected
Not selected
Not selected
Selected
Selected
Ignore Application
Collation
Not available
Not available
Not selected
Selected
Not selected
Selected
Expected result
3 copies uncollated
3 copies collated
3 copies uncollated
3 copies uncollated
3 copies collated by printer
3 copies collated by printer
Optional Paper Destinations
The Optional Paper Destinations drop-down menu lists optional output devices for the
HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer. The list of available destinations varies depending on your printer , its output accessories, and the printer configuration settings on the Configure tab.
For the HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer, the following settings are available in the Optional Paper
Sources drop-down menu:
● (None) This is the default setting for the HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer.
● HP 750-Sheet Stacker
Optional Paper Sources
The Optional Paper Sources drop-down menu lists optional media source trays for the
HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer. The list of available source trays varies depending on your printer , its input accessories, and the printer configuration settings on the Configure tab.
For the HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer, the following settings are available in the Optional Paper
Sources drop-down menu:
● (None) This is the default setting for the HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer.
● 4 x HP 500-Sheet Input Tray
● 3 x HP 500-Sheet Input Tray
● 2 x HP 500-Sheet Input Tray
● HP 500-Sheet Input Tray
Other Options
The Other Options group box contains a single More... command button. Clicking the More... button opens the More Configuration Options dialog box.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 driver features 133
Figure 3-26 More Configuration Options dialog box
The More Configuration Options dialog box contains the following controls:
● Storage group box
● Fonts group box
● Allow Scaling from Large Paper check box
● Alternative Letterhead Mode
● Ignore Application Collation check box
● Printer Memory group box
● Include Types in Application Source List check box
Storage
The Storage group box contains the Printer Hard Disk and Job Storage Enabled check boxes. If your product is equipped with a hard disk drive, the Printer Hard Disk check box should be selected and all job storage options are available. If your HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer is not equipped with a hard disk drive but has a minimum of 288 MB of memory, limited job storage options are available. When job storage is enabled, the product can store print jobs so that you can gain access to those print jobs later at the product control panel.
Fonts
The Fonts group box contains a Font Card(s) check box and a corresponding Configure button.
Selecting the Font Card(s) check box tells the driver that a Font card is installed, and that stored data about the fonts on the card is available. When the check box is selected, the Configure button is enabled. Click the Configure button to open the Configure Font Card(s) dialog box. If the Font Card
(s) check box was not selected when you opened the More Configuration Options dialog box, selecting that check box automatically opens the Configure Font Cards dialog box.
134 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
ENWW
Figure 3-27 Configure Font Cards dialog box
Use the Configure Font Cards dialog box to perform the following tasks:
● Add up to four font cards by clicking the Add button.
● Specify a unique font-card name.
● Select specific font card data files that contain lists of fonts on specified cards.
● Select one or more installed cards in the Installed Font Cards list. The list to the right (Fonts) shows all of the fonts that are available on the selected card(s).
● Enable or disable one or more of the selected font(s).
Complete the following steps to configure a font card:
1.
Make sure that the font card is installed correctly.
2.
Click Add. The Add Font Card dialog box appears.
3.
Click Browse. The Font Card Files dialog box appears.
4.
Find and select the appropriate Printer Cartridge Metrics (PCM) file that came with the font card.
5.
Click OK.
6.
You can specify a font card name in the Add Font Card dialog box.
7.
Click OK. The selected .PCM file appears in the Installed Font Cards list. Select the .PCM file to see a list of available fonts in the Fonts list.
8.
Click OK to close the Add Font Card dialog box. The fonts on the card should now be available on the system.
NOTE When using font cards with the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver and HP Traditional
PCL 5 Driver: To install screen fonts that match the font card, use the .HPB file that is specifically designed to work with that card. If no screen fonts exist for the card, use the .PCM file that is specifically designed to work with that card.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 driver features 135
Allow Scaling from Large Paper
Select Allow Scaling from Large Paper to allow additional larger-than-supported paper sizes to appear in the Paper tab Size Is: drop-down list. By default, the Allow Scaling from Large Paper check box is not selected.
The Allow Scaling from Large Paper selection can be helpful, for example, when printing a document with a large media size of 11 x 17 or A3. You can use the Print Document On: setting on the Effects tab to print the document on a media size that is supported by the printer.
Alternative Letterhead Mode
When selected, this option eliminates the need to flip or reload letterhead or preprinted paper in a paper tray, whether you are printing on one side of the sheet or both sides of the sheet. Load the paper as you would for printing on both sides. If the printer tray has an icon that indicates to load paper either face-up or face-down, load the paper opposite of the orientation shown.
When this option is selected, you must select one of the following options in the Type is setting:
● Letterhead
● Preprinted
Ignore Application Collation
This setting overrides collation options that are selected in the print options of a software program. When
Ignore Application Collation is selected, the print driver collates in the most appropriate way for the print job. The performance of this feature depends on the software program that you are using.
Printer memory
The Total Memory group box shows the total amount of memory that is physically installed in the printer.
The default values for total printer memory are specified on the Configuration tab. Total printer memory is updated through a successful bidirectional query, or can be set manually.
The Driver Work Space (DWS) value shows the amount of memory that is available for keeping track of fonts that are downloaded from the driver. The driver deletes downloaded fonts if it has exceeded the available memory value. The (DWS) value is a dynamic value that varies depending on the specific configuration of the printer. An accurate (DWS) value optimizes driver performance.
The HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 drivers automatically configure the (DWS) value in Windows 98 and Windows Me environments that support bidirectional communication. Use the (DWS) option to specify the amount of work-space memory that is available to the printer. To manually set the (DWS) value, print a Configuration page and find the DWS value in the Memory section of the page. Then, click the More... button on the Configuration tab, and type the DWS value in the (DWS) field of the More
Configuration Options dialog box.
Include types in application source list
NOTE The Include types in application source list check box is available only when using a computer that is running Windows NT 4.0.
When the Include types in application source list check box is selected, all media types (such as heavy media and transparencies) are available from the Source is: list on the Paper tab. When you are in a software program, you can open the Paper tab by clicking Print from the File menu, and then clicking Properties.
136 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
Automatic configuration
If you have modified the configuration of the HP Color LaserJet 4700 since installation, click the Update
Now button to automatically reflect the new configuration in the driver. For more information about the
print driver's automatic configuration feature, see the Driver Configuration for Windows
section of this manual.
If the Update Now button is not available, select the appropriate configuration options on the
Configure tab.
If you have more than one driver installed on your product (for example, the default HP Traditional
PCL 6 Driver and the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver), the Update Now feature works automatically only on the driver on which it is activated. The other driver will not be updated, and might show the default setting for your product model.
Printer image
The bitmap image in the lower-right portion of the Configure tab represents the current physical configuration of the printer according to the driver configuration data. It should have the same appearance as the image in the same location on the Paper tab.
NOTE The printer image shown on the Configure tab might differ from your
HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer, depending on the accessories that are installed.
ENWW HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 driver features 137
HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features
When you install the printing-system software in Windows 98 or Windows Me, the HP Traditional
PCL 6 Driver is installed by default. The HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver and the HP Traditional Postscript
3 Emulation Driver (PS Emulation Driver) can be installed by performing a Custom Installation.
NOTE Windows NT 4.0 does not support the HP Color LaserJet 4700 print drivers, but you can use print drivers for legacy HP products whose feature sets closely matches the feature set of the HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer. For instance, you can use the HP Color LaserJet 4650 drivers; however, color quality may be compromised. HP does not support the use of any print driver other than the driver supplied for the product. When you install the print drivers in
Windows NT 4.0, you must use the Add Printer installation method to install the driver.
Depending on the operating system that you are using when you install the print drivers, different methods are available to gain access to the print drivers and different print-driver interfaces.
This section describes the options that are available on each tab of the PS Emulation Driver Document
Default interface and on one of the tabs of the PS Emulation Driver Properties interface. It also shows the tabs that are available on the PS Emulation Driver interface for Windows 98 and Windows Me.
Access to print-driver settings in Windows 98 and Windows Me
In Windows 98 and Windows Me, you have access to a single set of driver tabs. To gain access to the print drivers, follow these steps:
1.
Click Start.
2.
Select Settings.
3.
Click Printers.
4.
Right-click the printer name.
5.
Click Properties to gain access to all print-driver tabs.
The settings that you make on these driver tabs control print-job output and become the default settings for all applications. The following print-driver tabs are available in Windows 98 and Windows Me:
● General
● Details
● Sharing
● Paper
● Graphics
● Fonts
● Device Options
● PostScript
PS 3 emulation support for the HP Color LaserJet 4700
A set of 92 postscript soft fonts is included with the printing-system software. If you want to permanently install soft fonts in the printer, postscript fonts are available from HP in an optional font DIMM. The PS
138 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
ENWW emulation maintains full compatibility with Adobe PostScript when PostScript fonts are purchased from
Adobe.
Users of Adobe-licensed programs might also have the right to use the Adobe PostScript print drivers from Adobe with the HP LaserJet PostScript 3 emulation PPD, which is available on the
HP Color LaserJet 4700 printing-system software CD or from the HP Web site. When using the Adobe
PostScript print driver, users must comply with all Adobe licensing agreements, as stated on the Adobe
Web site at: www.adobe.com/support/downloads/license.html
.
See the
section of this manual for a list of the additional fonts.
Help system
The PS Emulation Driver includes the following Help systems to provide assistance with printing and configuration options.
NOTE Bubble Help, a feature of HP traditional PCL drivers, is not available in the PS Emulation
Driver.
What's this Help
In Windows 98 and Windows Me, What's this? Help is supported. You can gain access to What's this?
Help messages in any of the following ways:
● Right-click a control and then click What's this?. A pop-up Help window appears.
● Click the ? button at the upper-right corner of the frame, next to the X, to change the cursor to an arrow with a question mark. When you use this special cursor to select a control, the pop-up Help window for that feature appears.
● Press the F1 key, and the Help window for the currently selected control appears.
Context-sensitive Help
When you press the Help button on a driver tab or in a dialog box, a context-sensitive Help message appears.
Paper tab features
To gain access to the Paper tab, follow these steps:
1.
Click Start.
2.
Select Settings.
3.
Click Printers.
4.
Right-click the printer name.
5.
Click Properties.
6.
Click the Paper tab.
The Paper tab controls media and finishing options for the HP PS Emulation Driver. The following figure shows the Paper tab.
HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 139
Figure 3-28 Paper tab
The Paper tab contains the following controls:
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Paper size
The Paper size selection area lists the paper or envelope sizes that the HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer supports. Use the scroll bar to scroll through the list of supported media sizes (forms), and then click the icon to specify the media you want.
A red circle with a line through any of the paper icons means that paper size is available, but you must change a driver setting before you can print on that media size. The setting might be on the Paper tab, such as the Paper source setting, or it might be a setting on the product control panel.
140 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
Clicking Custom page 1, Custom page 2, or Custom page 3 enables the Custom button at the bottom of the Paper tab. Clicking Custom opens the Custom-defined size dialog box that you can use to define a custom paper size.
The following figure shows the Custom-defined size dialog box.
ENWW
Figure 3-29 Custom-designed size dialog box
The following controls appear on the Custom-defined size dialog box:
● Paper name text box. Use this option to type a name for this custom paper size. You can define up to three custom sizes at one time.
● Width spin box. Use this control to specify the width for this custom paper size.
● Length spin box. Use this control to specify the length for this custom paper size.
● Units group box. Click Inches or Millimeters to specify the measurement unit for this custom paper size.
● Transverse check box. Clicking this check box rotates the document 90° when printing on a rollfed device. Depending on the size of the printed page, you might save paper if you rotate the page when printing.
● Restore defaults button. Click this button to restore the settings in the Custom-defined size dialog box to their original values.
Layout
Use the settings in this group box to specify how many pages of the document print on a single piece of paper. For example, clicking 1 up prints one page of the document on each sheet of paper. Clicking
2 up prints two pages on each sheet of paper, dividing the paper in half. The Layout group box values are ignored if you print an EPS file.
The following options are available in the Layout group box:
● 1 up
● 2 up
● 4 up
HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 141
Orientation
The settings in this group box specify how the document is positioned on the page. The following options are available:
● Portrait option button. Use this button to print your document in portrait mode. The page icon shows an example of the portrait orientation when you click this button.
● Landscape option button. Use this button to print your document in landscape mode. The page icon shows an example of the landscape orientation when you click this button.
● Rotate check box. The Rotate check box becomes available when you click the Landscape option button. Click to select the Rotate check box to rotate the image on the page.
To see the current dimensions of the page, such as the paper size and the unprintable margins, point to the page icon, and then press and hold down the mouse button. The Orientation group box is replaced by the Page dimensions in inches group box as seen in the following figure. Releasing the mouse button restores the Orientation group box.
Figure 3-30 Page dimensions in inches
Paper source
This setting specifies where the media you want to use is located in the printer. The default setting is
Auto Select Tray, which causes the printer to use the tray that supports the paper size you have chosen.
The following options are available:
● Auto Select Tray
● Manual Feed in Tray 1
● Tray 1 through Tray 6, if installed on the product. If any of these trays are not installed, a red circle with a slash through it appears next to the tray name.
● Each of the paper types that the HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer supports, such as Plain,
Preprinted, and Letterhead. For a full list of supported paper types see
Copies
Use this box to specify the number of copies to print. You can print from 1 to 999 copies. This option is ignored when printing an EPS file. Some software programs override this setting.
Unprintable Area
Clicking the Unprintable Area . . . button opens the Unprintable Area dialog box, which is shown in the following figure.
142 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
Figure 3-31 Unprintable Area dialog box
The Unprintable Area dialog box displays the area of the page that cannot be printed. Changing these settings to exceed the built-in page margins of the printer can cause the text in your document to be cut off when printed.
More Options
Clicking the More Options . . . button opens the More Paper Options dialog box, shown in the following figure.
ENWW
Figure 3-32 More Paper Options dialog box
The single control on this dialog box is the Printing on both sides (duplex printing) group box.
Use the settings in this group box to specify how you want to turn the page if you print on both sides.
When you print on two sides of the page, your document can be read differently depending on the way it is printed. For example, you could have the pages of your document turn like a book or like a calendar.
Clicking Flip On Long Edge or Flip On Short Edge causes the page icon to change to illustrate how the printed document will look.
About
Clicking About opens a dialog box that contains copyright and version information about the printer driver. The following figure shows the About dialog box.
HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 143
Figure 3-33 About dialog box
Restore Defaults
Clicking Restore Defaults resets the values on the Paper tab to their original values.
Graphics tab features
To gain access to the Graphics tab, follow these steps:
1.
Click Start.
2.
Select Settings.
3.
Click Printers.
4.
Right-click the printer name.
5.
Click Properties.
6.
Click the Graphics tab.
The Graphics tab specifies the resolution, color controls, and halftoning settings for the printer. The following figure shows the Graphics tab.
144 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
ENWW
Figure 3-34 Graphics tab
The Graphics tab contains the following controls:
●
●
●
●
●
Resolution
Use the Resolution drop-down menu to specify the resolution for printing. Resolution is measured in dots per inch (dpi). The dpi setting for the HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer is 600 dpi.
Color Control
The Color Control option specifies whether you want the colors in your document to be adjusted before printing so that the printed page more closely matches the colors you see on your screen. No Image
Color Management is selected by default, which results in a faster print job.
If you click Use Image Color Management on the host, the Choose Rendering Intent button becomes active. Click this button to open the Image Color Management dialog box to specify exactly how you want the colors adjusted.
The following figure shows the Image Color Management dialog box.
HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 145
Figure 3-35 Image Color Management dialog box
The Image Color Management dialog box allows you to specify how color images are created to produce the best-looking image on the printed page.
The following controls are available:
● Saturation. Use this option if you are printing a chart or using fully saturated, bright colors.
● Contrast. Use this option for photographs or pictures in which the colors blend together.
● Colorimetric. Use this option if your document has a color for which you need an exact match, and you are sending the document to a printer that has that specific color of ink.
Halftoning
The Halftoning options specify values for the number of lines per inch (frequency) and angle of the pattern that you want to use for halftone screens.
If your print jobs have a moiré pattern when you print graphics such as photographs or detailed images, you might want to adjust these settings. However, the default printer settings should work in most cases.
Do not change these settings unless you have experience using halftones. To return to the default settings after you have made changes, click Use printer's settings.
Special
The Special group box contains the following options:
● Print as a negative image. Selecting this option prints a negative of the image by complementing the RGB values or reversing the black and white values. Click this option to see the page icon change to reflect this setting.
● Print as a mirror image. Selecting this option prints a mirror image of your document by reversing the horizontal coordinates. Click this option to see the page icon change to reflect this setting.
Scaling
Use the Scaling control to specify the size of the image to print. You can specify from 25% to 400% of the original size. A setting of 400% prints an image four times larger than the original.
When you enlarge a document, only the portion of the document that fits on the page will print. The default setting is 100%.
Fonts tab features
The Fonts tab controls the fonts for the HP PS Emulation Driver. The following figure shows the
Fonts tab.
146 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
ENWW
Figure 3-36 Fonts tab
The following options are available:
●
Send TrueType fonts to printer according to the Font Substitution Table
●
Always use built-in printer fonts instead of TrueType fonts
●
Send TrueType fonts to printer according to the Font Substitution Table
Use this option to substitute a PostScript printer font for the common TrueType fonts in your document.
This can speed up printing because the TrueType fonts do not have to be downloaded. By default, common TrueType fonts are substituted when printing, but uncommon ones are downloaded to the printer. If you substitute a printer font for a TrueType font, the printed document might not match the look of the document on the screen.
Click Edit the Table to customize which TrueType fonts are downloaded and which printer fonts should be substituted for TrueType fonts.
Font Substitution Table
Clicking this option opens the font substitution table and makes available the options for changing the
TrueType-to-PostScript font mapping. The following figure shows the Font Substitution table.
HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 147
Figure 3-37 Font Substitution Table
Always use built-in printer fonts instead of TrueType fonts
Click this option to use font-matching rules to find the best PostScript font to substitute for TrueType fonts in your document. TrueType fonts are not downloaded when your document is printed. This can speed up printing, but the printed fonts might not exactly match the fonts on your screen.
Always use TrueType fonts
Click this option to download TrueType fonts to the printer when your document is printed. This ensures that your printed document looks the same as it does on your screen, but printing might take longer.
Click Send Fonts As to specify the format in which the TrueType fonts are sent to the printer.
Send Fonts As
Use this option to specify how TrueType fonts are downloaded.
Figure 3-38 Send Fonts As dialog box
148 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
ENWW
The following options are available:
● Sent TrueType fonts as:. This control offers the following settings:
● Outlines. Use this setting for scalable outlines.
● Bitmaps. Use this setting for bitmaps.
● Type 42
● Don't Send. Use this setting if you do not want any TrueType fonts to be downloaded.
● Threshold to switch between downloading bitmap or outline fonts, measured in pixels (in
pixel size at the current resolution). Use this control to specify the size of the font (in pixels) at which the PostScript driver should switch from downloading TrueType fonts as bitmap (Type 3) fonts to downloading them as outline (Type 1) fonts.
The most efficient threshold value varies depending on the printing resolution. For example, at 300 dpi, downloading TrueType fonts as outlines becomes efficient when fonts are about 25 points or larger. If this value is 0, outline (Type 1) fonts are always sent.
● Favor system TrueType fonts over printer fonts that have the same name. Use this option to specify whether to use system TrueType fonts instead of printer fonts when the same font is found on both the computer and the printer. Printer fonts are the default.
Using printer fonts can speed up printing because the TrueType fonts do not have to be downloaded. However, the fonts in the printed document might not exactly match the fonts on your screen.
● Send PostScript fonts as:. Use this option to specify whether to download PostScript fonts to the printer. The following options are available:
● In Native Format. Clicking this option downloads the PostScript font files to the printer before your document prints.
● Don't Send. If you click this option, no fonts are downloaded. This does not affect downloading of TrueType fonts.
Device Options tab features
To gain access to the Device Options tab, follow these steps:
1.
Click Start.
2.
Select Settings.
3.
Click Printers.
4.
Right-click the printer name.
5.
Click Properties.
6.
Click the Device Options tab.
The Device Options tab communicates information about the hardware configuration to the print driver.
When the driver is opened from within a software program, the Device Options tab includes only the
Printer features controls. When opened from the Printers folder, the Device Options tab appears as shown in the following figure.
HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 149
Figure 3-39 Device Options tab
NOTE Changes that you make to the Device Options tab are not reflected in the Properties settings until the modified device settings have been applied. For example, the duplexing unit will not appear until you modify the Device Options tab, apply the settings, and then re-open
Properties.
The Device Options tab contains the following options:
●
●
●
Available printer memory
The Available printer memory control specifies the amount of memory in your printer. If the value in this control does not match the amount of memory in your printer model, use the spin box to specify the correct amount of memory.
Printer features
The Printer features group box displays settings specific to your printer. You can change the settings by selecting the setting you want to change and then specifying a new value in the Change setting
for list.
The printer feature settings available on this tab include the following:
●
●
150 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
ENWW
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
HPPJLEncoding
The HPPJLEncoding feature contains the control for the UTF8 feature.
Job Storage
The default value for this setting is Off, which means that the print job will not be stored in the printer.
NOTE The Job Storage feature requires at least 288 MB of total memory or the installation of a printer hard disk, which comes standard on the HP Color LaserJet 4700ph+ printer. The printer hard disk is available as an optional accessory for all other models.
HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 151
If Job Storage is enabled (without installing a hard disk but with at least 288 MB of total memory), two Job Storage Mode settings are available on the Job Storage tab:
● Proof and Hold
● Private Job
Two additional Job Storage Mode settings become available on the Job Storage tab if a hard disk is installed:
● Quick Copy
● Stored Job
● Quick Copy. When you select Quick Copy, the entire print job prints and a copy of the print job is stored on the printer, after which you can print additional copies of the print job at the printer control panel. The number of quick-copy print jobs that can be stored in the printer is set by using the printer control panel.
NOTE The printer configuration can be set to hold a maximum of 50 quick-copy or proofand-hold jobs. The number is set at the printer control panel in the CONFIGURATION menu, and the default is 32. When this preset limit is reached, the new document overwrites the oldest held document. Also, a document that has the same user and job name as one that is already stored on the hard disk will overwrite the existing document. Quick Copy jobs are deleted if you turn off the printer.
● Proof and Hold.
When selected, this option stores the print job in memory and prints only the first copy of the job, allowing you to check the first copy. If the document prints correctly, you can print the remaining copies of the print job at the control panel. You can set the number of proof-and-hold print jobs that can be stored in the printer at the control panel.
After it is released for printing, the proof-and-hold job is immediately deleted from the printer. If more copies are needed, you must reprint the job from the software program. If you send a second proof-and-hold job to the printer with the same user name and job name as an existing proof-andhold job (and you have not released the original job for printing), the job will overwrite the existing job. Proof-and-hold jobs are deleted if you turn off the printer.
NOTE The printer configuration can be set to hold a maximum of 50 quick-copy or proofand-hold jobs. The number is set at the printer control panel in the CONFIGURATION menu, and the default is 32. When this preset limit is reached, the new document overwrites the oldest held document. Also, a document that has the same user and job name as one that is already stored on the hard disk will overwrite the existing document.
● Private Job.
When you select Private Job, the print job is sent to the printer, but is not printed until you request the job at the printer control panel. The print job can be printed only after you type the correct PIN at the control panel.
After selecting Private Job from the Device Options tab, scroll to the PIN digit 1 (for Private
Job) control, click to select it, and then select a number from the Change setting for: PIN digit 1
152 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
ENWW
(for Private Job) list. Repeat this process to select a number for each of the remaining three PIN digits. If you do not select a PIN, the default PIN of 0000 is used.
After it is released for printing, the private job is immediately deleted from the printer. This feature is useful when you are printing sensitive or confidential documents that you do not want to leave in an output bin after printing. If more copies are needed, you must reprint the job from the software program. If you send a second private job that has the same user name and job name as an existing private job (and you have not released the original job for printing), the job will overwrite the existing job, regardless of the PIN. Private jobs are deleted if you turn off the printer.
● Stored Job. To use the Stored Job option, a printer hard disk must be installed and Job Storage must be enabled.
Use the Stored Job option to send a print job directly to the printer hard disk without printing it.
The print job is stored in the printer as if it is an electronic file cabinet. After the print job is stored on the printer hard disk, you can print the job at the printer control panel.
The job remains stored in the printer until it is deleted or overwritten by a document that has the same user and job names. Stored jobs remain on the printer hard disk when the printer is turned off. Use this feature for forms and other common or shared documents.
You can disable Job Storage while leaving the printer hard disk enabled. To disable Job Storage, click Start, select Settings, and then click Printers. Right-click the printer name, click
Properties, click the Device Options tab, select Job Storage: from the Printer features list, and then select Disabled in the Change setting for: Job Storage list.
To gain access to the Job Storage tab in Windows 98 or Windows Me, click Start on the Windows task bar, click Settings, and then click Printers. Right-click the printer name, and then click
Properties.
User Name
User Name. The default value for this setting is System Name (if available). Additional values for this setting include numbers 1 through 20.
PIN digit 1 (for Private Job)
PIN digit 1 (for Private Job). Settings for PIN digits 2 through 4 follow this setting in the Printer
features list. The default value for each of these settings is 0. For more information about using this setting, see
Print Color as Gray
The Print Color as Gray feature contains the following options:
● Off (default)
● On
Collate
The Collate feature contains the following options:
● On (turn off in application)
● Off
HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 153
Fit to Page
The Fit to Page feature contains the following options:
● Prompt User for correct size (default)
● Nearest Size and Scale
● Nearest Size and Crop
● Letter
● A4
Stapling Options
The Stapling Options feature contains the following options:
● One Staple Angled (Maximum 30 Sheets) Portrait
● One Staple Angled (Maximum 30 Sheets) Landscape
Color Options
The Color Options feature contains the following options:
● Automatic (default)
● Manual
Color Themes for RGB Color
The Color Themes for RGB Color feature contains the following options:
● Default (sRGB). Select Default (sRGB) for most printing needs. This setting instructs the printer to interpret RGB color as sRGB, which is the accepted standard of Microsoft and the World Wide
Web Organization (www). Colors are matched to optimize the RGB colors on the screen and to provide vivid images and graphics.
● Image Optimization (sRGB). Select Image optimization (sRGB) to enhance documents in which the content is mainly bitmap images, such as .GIF or .JPG files. This setting instructs the printer to use the best color matching for rendering sRGB bitmap images. This setting affects only raster data; it has no effect on text or vector-based graphics. Using glossy media in combination with this setting provides the maximum enhancement.
● Adobe RGB (1998). Select AdobeRGB (1998) for documents that use the AdobeRGB color space rather than sRGB. For example, some digital cameras capture images in Adobe RBG, and documents that are produced with Adobe PhotoShop use the Adobe RGB color space. When printing from a professional software program that uses Adobe RGB, it is important that you turn off the color management in the software program and allow the printer software to manage the color space.
● None. Select None to instruct the printer to print RGB data in raw device mode. To render documents properly when this option is selected, you must manage color in the program in which you are working or in the operating system.
154 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
ENWW
NOTE To prevent poor image quality, use this option only if you are familiar with the procedures for managing color in the software program or the operating system.
● Custom Profile. Select Custom Profile when you want to simulate the printed output from other printers or for using special effects, such as sepia tones. This setting instructs the printer to use a custom input profile to more accurately predict and control color output.
The default Custom Profile is the color table used on the HP Color LaserJet 4650. The printer holds only one custom profile at a time, so when you download and install another color table, it erases the default color table and installs the new one.
You can download custom profiles from the following Web site: www.hp.com/support/clj4700
Color Themes for CMYK Color
The Color Themes for CMYK Color feature contains the following options:
● Default CMYK+. HP CMYK+ technology enables a high-quality default CMYK print path. Select this option for most digital commercial print jobs to produce optimal prints.
● SWOP. This option is a common ink standard in the U.S. and other countries/regions.
● Euroscale. This option is a common ink standard in Europe and other countries/regions (also known as Euro Standard).
● DIC. DIC stands for Dainippon Ink and Chemical, a common ink standard in Japan and other countries/regions.
● Custom Profile. Select this option to use a custom input profile to accurately control color output
(for example, to emulate a specific HP Color LaserJet printer). Download color profiles from the following Web site: www.hp.com/go
Edge Control
The Edge Control feature contains the following options:
● Maximum
● Normal (default)
● Light
● Off
Text Neutral Grays
The Text Neutral Grays feature contains the following options:
● Black Only (default)
● 4-Color
HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 155
Text Halftone
The Text Halftone feature contains the following options:
● Smooth
● Detail
Graphic Neutral Grays
The Graphic Neutral Grays feature contains the following options:
● Black Only (default)
● 4-Color
Graphic Halftone
The Graphic Halftone feature contains the following options:
● Smooth
● Detail
Photographs Neutral Grays
The Photographs Neutral Grays feature contains the following options:
● Black Only
● 4-Color (default)
Photographs Halftone
The Photographs Halftone feature contains the following options:
● Smooth
● Detail
Watermark (Pages per Sheet)
The Watermark (Pages per Sheet) feature contains the following options:
● 1 (default)
● >= 2
Print Watermark
The Print Watermark feature contains the following options:
● No (default)
● All Pages
● First Page Only
156 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
ENWW
Watermark
The Watermark feature contains the following options:
● None (default)
● Draft
● Company Confidential
● Company Proprietary
● Company Private
● Confidential
● Copy
● Copyright
● File Copy
● Final
● For Internal Use Only
● Preliminary
● Proof
● Review Copy
● Sample
● Top Secret
● Urgent
● Custom
Watermark Font
The Watermark Font feature contains the following options:
● Courier Bold
● Helvetica Bold (default)
● Times Bold
Watermark Size
Watermark Size. Settings for the watermark size range from 24 points to 90 points. 48 points is the default.
Watermark Angle
Watermark Angle. Settings for the watermark angle range from 90° to -90° in 15° intervals. A 45° angle is the default.
HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 157
Watermark Style
The Watermark Style feature contains the following options:
● Narrow Outline
● Medium Outline (default)
● Wide Outline
● Wide Halo Outline
● Filled
Watermark Color
The Watermark Color feature contains the following options:
● Gray
● Red
● Orange
● Yellow
● Green
● Blue
● Violet
Watermark Intensity
Watermark Intensity
● Darkest
● Darker
● Dark
● Medium Dark
● Medium
● Medium Light
● Light
● Lighter
● Lightest
158 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
ENWW
Installable Options
This section provides information to configure the printing options that you can install for the
HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer. The following controls are available:
● Tray 3
● Tray 4
● Tray 5
● Tray 6
● Accessory Output Bin
● Mopier Mode
● Printer Hard Disk
● Job Storage
● Duplex Unit (for 2-sided Printing)
● VMOption
Tray 3, Tray 4, Tray 5, and Tray 6
This control specifies whether you have additional 500-sheet feeder trays (Tray 3 through Tray 6) installed on your printer. The default setting is Uninstalled.
Accessory Output Bin
This control specifies whether you have an HP 750-Sheet Stapler/Stacker accessory output device installed on your printer. The default setting is Uninstalled.
Mopier Mode
The multiple-original print (mopy) function is an HP-designed feature that produces multiple, collated copies from a single print job. Multiple-original printing (mopying) increases performance and reduces network traffic by transmitting the job to the printer once, and then storing it on the hard disk. The remainder of the copies are printed at the fastest speed. All documents that are printed in mopier mode can be created, controlled, managed, and finished from the computer, which eliminates the extra step of using a photocopier.
The HP Color LaserJet 4700 supports the transmit-once mopying feature when the Mopier Mode: setting on the Device Options tab is Enabled.
Printer Hard Disk
When this option is enabled, the Job Storage option and the Mopier Mode are enabled in the print driver. The Job Storage option allows you to store print jobs, and then print them later from the control panel. The multiple-original print (mopy) function is an HP-designed feature that produces multiple, collated copies from a single print job.
Job Storage
When job storage is enabled, the printer can store print jobs so that you can gain access to those print jobs later at the control panel.
HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 159
Duplex Unit (for 2-sided Printing)
The HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer is equipped with automatic 2-sided printing (duplexing), which allows you to print on both sides of supported media. Automatic 2-sided printing is not supported for certain media types, including transparencies, labels, envelopes, heavy, extra heavy, cardstock, and glossy film.
NOTE The HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer supports smart duplexing. The printer detects information on both sides of the print job pages and runs the pages through the duplexing unit only if printable information appears on the second side of the page.
PostScript tab features
To gain access to the PostScript tab, follow these steps:
1.
Click Start.
2.
Select Settings.
3.
Click Printers.
4.
Right-click the printer name.
5.
Click Properties.
6.
Click the PostScript tab.
The PostScript tab controls the PostScript functions for the PS Emulation Driver. The following figure shows the PostScript tab.
Figure 3-40 PostScript tab
The PostScript tab contains the following elements:
160 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
ENWW
●
●
●
Print PostScript error information
●
●
PostScript output format
The PostScript output format list allows you to specify the format for PostScript files. The following options are available:
● PostScript (optimize for speed). Use this setting for printing most documents.
● Optimize for Portability. Use this setting to create a file that conforms to the Adobe Document
Structuring Conventions (ADSC). Each page of the document will be a self-contained object. This is useful, for instance, if you want to create a PostScript file and print it on a different printer.
● Encapsulated PostScript (EPS). Use this setting to include the file as an image in another document that is to be printed from a different program.
● Archive Format. Use this setting to create a PostScript file that you can use later.
● PJL archive format. This setting notifies the printer that the document is being printed in a different printer language.
PostScript header
Use the PostScript header options to specify whether to send header information to the printer each time you print a document. The following options are available:
● Download header with each print job. This is the default setting and is sufficient or most types of printing. Use this setting if you print to a shared network printer or to a file on a disk.
● Assume header is downloaded and retained. If you print to a local printer, you can save printing time by sending the header information to your printer only once.
● Send Header Now. Click this button to send header information to the printer. This option is unavailable when you specify EPS, Archive, or PJL Archive formats.
Print PostScript error information
Use the Send PostScript error information option to print PostScript error messages after your document has been printed. The PostScript printer driver can detect certain errors that Microsoft
Windows cannot. If you are having printing problems, click this option. This information can help you, a system administrator, or a printer-support representative determine what caused the problem. The error message information is not included in EPS format.
HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 161
PostScript timeout values
Use the following options to specify the PostScript timeout values for your printer.
● Job timeout. This control specifies how long the document can take to get from the computer to the printer before the printer stops trying to print the document. If you specify 0 seconds, the printer continues trying to print indefinitely. The default setting is 0 seconds. You can use the spin box to change this value to a maximum of 32,767 seconds.
● Wait timeout. This control specifies how long the printer waits to get more postscript information from the computer. After the specified time passes, the printer stops trying to print the document and prints an error message. If you are trying to print a very complicated document, you might want to increase this value. If you specify 0 seconds, the printer waits indefinitely. The default setting is 300 seconds. You can use the spin box to change this value to a maximum of 32,767 seconds.
Advanced
Click the Advanced . . . button to open the Advanced PostScript Options dialog box, which appears in the following figure.
Figure 3-41 Advanced PostScript Options dialog box
The following options are available on the Advanced PostScript Options dialog box.
●
●
●
●
●
PostScript Language Level
The PostScript Language Level specifies which PostScript language level to use, from 1 to the highest level that your printer supports. Some printers support multiple levels. It is usually best to select the highest level that is available, because a higher language-level provides more features. In some
162 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
ENWW instances, however, you would still use level 1. For example, if you are printing a file to disk and that file will be printed by someone who has a level-1 printer, you would need to select level 1.
You can choose between PostScript Level 1 and PostScript Level 2 features for the
HP Color LaserJet 4700.
Bitmap compression
Use this control to specify whether to compress graphics before sending your document to the printer.
If you are using PostScript level 2, or if you are using PostScript level 1 and a printer connected to a serial port, click Compress bitmap images. If you are using PostScript level 1 and a printer connected to a parallel port or if you are using a network printer, click No bitmap compression.
Data format
This control specifies the protocol that the printer uses for print jobs. The following options are available:
● ASCII data. This is the default setting. When you click ASCII data, data is sent in ASCII format (7bit), which might take longer to print but can be sent through any I/O channel, such as a serial, parallel, or network port.
● Binary communications protocol. When you click Binary communications protocol, the printer sends all data except special control characters in binary (8-bit) format. This format can be sent over parallel or serial communications ports and is faster than sending data in ASCII format.
If you select this option, click Send Mode to switch your printer to Binary Communications Protocol
(BCP) for future print jobs.
NOTE This option is available only if the computer is connected to the printer through a direct connection (via USB or parallel cable).
● Tagged binary communications protocol. When you click Tagged Binary Communications
Protocol, all data except special control characters is sent in binary (8-bit) format. The binary formats can be sent over parallel or serial communications ports and are faster than sending data in ASCII format.
● Pure binary data. When you click Pure binary data, all data except special control characters is sent in binary (8-bit) format. The binary formats can be sent over parallel or serial communications ports and are faster than sending data in ASCII format.
Send CTRL+D before job
This control specifies whether the printer is reset at the beginning of every postscript document. The default setting is off (unselected). Ctrl-D resets the printer to its default setting to ensure that previous print jobs do not affect the current print job. Ctrl-D might cause a print job to fail if the printer is connected through a network. If your document fails to print when sent to a printer connected through parallel or serial ports, click to select the Send CTRL+D before job check box.
Send CTRL+D after job
This control specifies whether the printer will be reset at the end of every postscript document. The default setting is off (unselected). Ctrl-D resets the printer to its default setting to ensure that future print jobs are not affected by the current print job. Ctrl-D might cause a print job to fail if the printer is connected through a network. If your document fails to print when sent to a network printer, click to select the Send
CTRL+D before job check box.
HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 163
164 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows
Introduction
This chapter describes the features of the HP Color LaserJet 4700 unidrivers. The unidrivers are the
HP PCL 6 Unidriver, the HP PCL 5 Unidriver, and the HP Postscript 3 Emulation Unidriver
(PS Emulation Unidriver) for Windows 2000, Windows XP (32-bit and 64-bit), and
Windows Server 2003 (32-bit and 64-bit).
You can control print jobs from several places: the product control panel, the software program print dialog box, and the driver user interface. Generally, for features that are duplicated in more than one location (for instance, you can select the media input tray from any of them), settings that are established in the software program take precedence over print-driver settings. Print-driver settings, in turn, override product control-panel settings.
NOTE For a comparison of features between the HP unidrivers and HP traditional print drivers in various operating systems, see the
Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems
section of this manual.
When you install the print-system software in Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003, the HP PCL 6 Unidriver is installed by default. The HP PCL 5 Unidriver and the PS Emulation Unidriver can be installed by performing a Custom Installation.
The following sections describe the options that are available on each tab of the HP PCL 6 Unidriver, the HP PCL 5 Unidriver, and the PS Emulation Unidriver
This chapter also describes differences between the HP PCL 6 Unidriver, the HP PCL 5 Unidriver, and the PS Emulation Unidriver. Unless otherwise noted, features described here apply to all three.
This chapter contains the following sections:
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
ENWW Introduction 165
●
●
●
●
●
166 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW
Access to print drivers
Depending on the operating system on which you are installing the print drivers, you can gain access to the print drivers and different print-driver interfaces in several ways.
To gain access to the print-driver settings from within most software programs, follow these steps:
1.
Click File
2.
Click Print.
3.
Click Properties.
The appearance and names of the driver tabs can vary, depending on the operating system. These driver settings apply only while that software program is open.
You can also control the drivers directly from the Printers folder. Here you have access to two sets of driver tabs: the Printing Preferences tabs and the Properties tabs. The settings that you make on the
Printing Preferences driver tabs control the driver default settings for each user's profile. Installable options can be configured in Properties driver tabs.
Printing Preferences driver tabs
The Printing Preferences driver tabs change the default settings that are used across all software programs. To gain access to these tabs, follow these steps:
1.
Click Start.
2.
Select Settings.
3.
Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows
Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).
4.
Right-click the product name.
5.
Click Printing Preferences.
The following Printing Preferences print-driver tabs are available:
● Advanced
● Paper/Quality
● Effects
● Finishing
● Output
● Job Storage
● Color
● Services
ENWW Access to print drivers 167
Properties driver tabs
This set of tabs controls the driver behavior and driver connections. To gain access to the Properties tabs, follow these steps:
1.
Click Start.
2.
Select Settings.
3.
Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows
Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).
4.
Right-click the product name.
5.
Click Properties.
The following Properties print-driver tabs are available:
● General
● Sharing
● Ports
● Advanced
● Color Management
● Security
● Device Settings
● About
168 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW
Help system
The HP PCL 6 Unidriver, the HP PCL 5 Unidriver, and the PS Emulation Unidriver include a full-featured
Help system to provide assistance with printing and configuration options.
NOTE Bubble Help, a feature of HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 drivers, is not available in the
HP PCL 6 Unidriver, HP PCL 5 Unidriver, and PS Emulation Unidriver.
What's this? Help
Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 support "What's this?" Help. You can gain access to "What's this?" Help messages in any of the following ways:
● Right-click a control and then click What's this?. A pop-up Help window appears.
● Click the ? button in the upper-right corner of the frame, next to the X, to change the cursor to an arrow with a question mark. When you use this special cursor to select a control, the pop-up Help window for that feature appears.
● Press the F1 key, and the Help window for the currently selected control appears.
Context-sensitive Help
When you click the Help button on a driver tab or in a dialog box, a context-sensitive Help message appears.
Incompatible Print Settings messages
Incompatible print settings might produce unsolicited messages that appear in response to specific selections. These messages alert you that the selections are illogical or impossible given the capabilities of the printer or the current settings of other controls.
NOTE Constraint messages are limited, and the underlying software architecture might accept some settings that are illogical or impossible for the printer to perform. Sending a job with incompatible settings can lead to unexpected results. If print jobs do not print as expected, check the product documentation for the product capabilities.
In Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 operating environments, some technically invalid print-driver configurations result in warning messages. Duplexing, for instance, is not possible when the Transparency media type is selected. The following figure shows an Incompatible Print
Settings message.
ENWW Help system 169
Figure 4-1 An Incompatible Print Settings message
Clicking the Resolve all conflicts for me automatically option button and then clicking OK accepts the change that was just made, and the driver then resets the conflicting control to a setting that is compatible with the new value. If you want to keep the conflicting setting, click I will resolve the conflict
myself and then click OK.
NOTE In this example, the conflict can be resolved manually. If the conflict is not resolved when the driver is closed, then the same dialog appears again when a print job is sent to the product.
170 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW
Advanced tab features
To gain access to the Advanced tab, follow these steps:
1.
click Start.
2.
Select Settings.
3.
Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows
Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).
4.
Right-click the product name.
5.
Click Printing Preferences.
6.
Click the Advanced tab.
You can use the Advanced tab to change the layout of printed pages. Use this tab to configure special controls that are not commonly used, as well as to control features such as media size and copies in the driver (although most current software programs support these features in the print dialog box or through the page settings in the software program). The following figure shows the Advanced tab.
ENWW
Figure 4-2 The default appearance of the Advanced tab
The Advanced tab contains the following controls:
●
Advanced tab features 171
●
●
Paper/Output
The Paper/Output settings contain the following controls:
● Copy Count setting
● Collated check box (appears when you select Copy Count)
Copy Count
Copy Count specifies the number of copies to print. This driver setting is useful for software programs that do not provide a copy count. If a copy count is available in the software program, set the copy count in the software program.
The number of copies that you request appears in the Copy Count option. You can select the number by typing in the box or by using the up and down arrows to the right of the text box. Valid entries are numbers from 1 to 9999 for the HP Color LaserJet 4700. The copies value will not advance from the maximum number (9999) to 1 when the up arrow is used, or change from 1 to the maximum number
(9999) when the down arrow is used. When you click another group box or leave the Advanced tab, invalid entries into the edit box (such as non-numerical input, numbers less than 1, or numbers greater than the maximum allowed) are changed to the last valid value that appeared in the box. The default number of copies is 1.
Because you can set the number of copies that you want from some software programs, conflicts between the software program you are using and the driver can arise. In most cases, the software program and the driver communicate, so that the number of copies set in one location (such as the program) will appear in the other (such as the driver). For some programs, this communication does not take place, and the copies values are treated independently. For these programs, setting 10 copies in the program and then setting 10 copies in the driver will result in 100 copies (10 x 10) being printed. It is recommended that you set the number of copies in the program, wherever possible.
Collated
The Collated check box is visible when the Copy Count setting is selected. The check box becomes available and can be changed when the Copy Count setting is greater than 1.
When collated, pages print consecutively for each copy of the document. When not collated, copies of each page print together.
This setting is not synchronized with the collate setting in the software program Print dialog box. Settings in the software program override settings in the print driver. For instance, when using Microsoft Word, the Collate check box in the Print dialog box is selected by default. However, in the print driver, the
Collated check box in the Advanced tab is not selected by default. The software program setting takes precedence over the driver setting, and the printed output is collated by default. To obtain uncollated printed output, clear the Collate setting in both the driver and the software program. Similarly, if the
Collated check box is selected in the driver, but the Collate setting is not enabled in the software program, the printed output is uncollated.
172 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW
ENWW
Graphic
The Graphic setting contains the following controls:
● Image Color Management settings
● True Type Fontsettings
Image Color Management
This control lists the available Image Color Management (ICM) options used for printing color graphics.
ICM, a set of calculations for color matching, makes it possible for programs to adjust colors before printing so that the color of images on the screen more closely match the color of those images when they are printed. The following options are available:
● ICM Method. The ICM Method setting specifies how to print your color graphics.
● To enable Image Color Management, click the option and then select ICM Enabled.
● If you want the host computer to perform calculations for color matching before it sends the document to the product, click ICM Handled by Host System.
● If you want the HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer to perform calculations for color matching, click
ICM Handled by Printer. In this case, a set of rules for mapping the colors is created and downloaded to the product. The product uses these rules to adjust colors in the document.
● If you want the printer to perform calculations for color matching, click ICM Handled by Printer by using printer calibration. Because the set of rules for mapping the colors has already been downloaded to the product (which must be postscript language level 2 or higher), they will not be created or downloaded again.
● ICM Intent. The ICM Intent setting specifies how color images are created to produce the image that looks best on the printed page.
● If you are printing a chart or using fully saturated, bright colors, click Graphics.
● For photographs or pictures where the colors blend together, click Pictures to maximize the contrast.
● If your document uses a color that you need to match exactly, and you are sending the document to a product that has that specific color of ink, click Proof.
● If you want to preview the color settings from another product, click Match.
True Type Font
Use Substitute with Device Font (the default setting) to print documents that contain TrueType fonts by using equivalent printer fonts. This permits faster printing; however, you might lose special characters that the equivalent printer font does not support. Select Download as Softfont to download TrueType fonts for printing instead of using printer fonts.
Document Options
The Document Options setting contains the following controls:
● Advanced Printing Features
● Print Optimizations
Advanced tab features 173
Advanced Printing Features
When the Advanced Printing Features setting is Enabled, metafile spooling is turned on and
Finishing tab options such as Page Order, Booklet Layout, and Pages per Sheet are available, depending on your product. For normal printing, leave the Advanced Printing Features setting at the default (Enabled). If compatibility problems occur, you can disable the feature. However, some advanced printing features might still be available in the print driver, even though they have been disabled. If you select an advanced printing feature in the print driver that has been disabled on the
Advanced tab, the feature is automatically re-enabled.
Print Optimizations
NOTE Print Optimization settings are available only in the HP PCL 6 Unidriver and HP PCL 5
Unidriver. They are not available in the PS Emulation Unidriver.
The default setting for Print Optimizations is Enabled. When this feature is enabled and your document contains overlapping text and graphics, the text that is placed on top of a graphic might not print correctly.
If the printed output is not correct, you can disable this feature. When this feature is disabled, print optimization-features, such as substituting device fonts for TrueType fonts and scanning for horizontal and vertical rules, are turned off.
PostScript Options
NOTE Print Optimization settings are available only in the HP PCL 6 Unidriver and HP PCL 5
Unidriver. They are not available in the PS Emulation Unidriver.
Select one of the following settings in the PostScript Output Options drop-down menu:
● Optimize for Speed (default)
● Optimize for Portability
● Optimize for Encapsulated PostScript (EPS)
Select one of the following settings in the TrueType Font Download drop-down menu:
● Automatic (default)
● Outline
● Bitmap
● Native TrueType
Select one of the following settings in the PostScript Output Options drop-down menu:
● Optimize for Speed (default)
● Optimize for Portability
● Optimize for Encapsulated PostScript (EPS)
174 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW
ENWW
Select one of the following settings in the PostScript Language Level drop-down menu:
● 3 (default)
● 2
● 1
Select one of the following settings in the Send PostScript Error Handler drop-down menu:
● Yes (default)
● No
Printer Features
The Printer Features setting contains the following controls:
● Print All Text as Black
The Print All Text as Black feature is Disabled by default. When Enabled is selected, the driver prints all text as black regardless of the original document text color. Color text is printed as black, except for white text, which remains white. (White text is a reliable method of printing reverse typeface against a dark background.) This setting does not affect graphic images on the page, nor does it affect any text that is part of a graphic.
● Send True Type as Bitmap
NOTE The Send TrueType as Bitmap option is available only in the HP PCL 6 and HP
PCL 5 unidrivers. It is not available in the PS Emulation Unidriver.
Send True Type as Bitmap provides an alternative for software programs that have trouble using
TrueType fonts for special graphic aspects such as shading, rotation, or slanting. The setting is
Disabled (off) by default. The TrueType fonts are converted to bitmap soft fonts before downloading. The Enabled setting causes the driver to send TrueType fonts to the printer as outlines, which retains the standard format (outline) of the fonts.
● Raster Compression
NOTE The Raster Compression option is available only in the HP PCL 6 Unidriver. It is not available in the HP PCL 5 Unidriver or the PS Emulation Unidriver.
Use the Raster Compression feature to select the graphics-compression method:
● Automatic. The software determines the best compression method to use.
● Best Quality. This option forces the software to use a lossless compression method.
(Lossless means that no data is lost during compression.)
● Maximum Compression. Where applicable, this option requires the software to always use a lossy compression method (some data is lost).
● Graphics Mode
NOTE The Graphics Mode option is available only in the HP PCL 5 Unidriver. It is not available in the HP PCL 6 Unidriver or the PS Emulation Unidriver.
Advanced tab features 175
Use the Graphics Mode feature to select one of the following settings:
● Send Graphics as Vector. Select this setting to send graphics to the product as a combination of HP Graphics Language, version 2 (HP-GL/2) and raster images. This setting might produce higher-quality output. It is the default setting.
● Send Graphics as Raster. Select this setting to send all graphics to the product as images composed of individual dots. This setting might improve printing speed in some cases.
● Alternative Letterhead Mode
When selected, this option eliminates the need to flip or reload letterhead or preprinted paper in a paper tray, whether you are printing on one side of the sheet or both sides of the sheet. Load the paper as you would for printing on both sides. If the printer tray has an icon that indicates to load paper either face-up or face-down, load the paper opposite of the orientation shown.
When this option is selected, you must use one of the following options in the Type is setting:
● Letterhead
● Preprinted
NOTE Alternative Letterhead Mode is available only if the printer is equipped with an automatic duplexing unit.
Layout Options
The Layout Options setting contains the Page Order setting.
Page Order specifies the order in which the pages of your document are printed. Front to Back prints the document so that page 1 prints first. Back to Front prints the document so that page 1 prints last.
NOTE The page-ordering operation works on whole sheets of media rather than on individual logical pages. Accordingly, if you set Pages per Sheet (on the Finishing tab) to be greater than one, the ordering of logical pages on a physical sheet of media does not change.
176 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW
Paper/Quality tab features
To gain access to the Paper/Quality tab, follow these steps:
1.
click Start.
2.
Select Settings.
3.
Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows
Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).
4.
Right-click the product name.
5.
Click Printing Preferences.
6.
Click the Paper/Quality tab.
Use the Paper/Quality tab to specify the size, type, and source of the media. You can also use this tab to indicate different media-selection choices for the front cover, first page, other pages, last page, and back cover of the document. The following figure shows the Paper/Quality tab.
ENWW
Figure 4-3 Paper/Quality tab
Paper/Quality tab features 177
The Paper/Quality tab contains the following controls:
● Print Task Quick Sets
● Paper Options
● Document preview image
● HP Digital Imaginggroup box
Print Task Quick Sets
The first group box in the upper portion of the Paper/Quality tab is Print Task Quick Sets. Any change to the Print Task Quick Sets group box that is made on the Paper/Quality tab affects most of the
Printing Preferences driver tabs (the Paper/Quality, Effects, Finishing, and Job Storage tabs) because they are all the same control.
Use the Print Task Quick Sets setting to store the current combination of driver settings that appear on all of the other print driver tabs (except the Advanced tab, where the setting is not available). Print
Task Quick Sets are either preset by network-administrator settings or user-defined printing specifications (such as media size, pages per sheet, and so on). The Print Task Quick Sets control does not appear on the driver Properties tabs.
NOTE Administrators can predefine Print Task Quick Sets for their users. These administrator
Print Task Quick Sets are defined on the server and are available to users, but usually cannot be modified by users. Users can also define Print Task Quick Sets for their own use. User-defined
Print Task Quick Sets are described later in this section.
The following selections are available in the Print Task Quick Sets drop-down menu:
● Default Print Settings
● User Guide Print Settings
Default Print Settings
When you select Default Print Settings, nearly all of the settings are restored to the combination that existed after the driver was installed (the original settings). However, if the attribute combinations that are associated with watermark definitions, custom media sizes, or the other quick sets have been changed or deleted, the original settings for those items are not restored.
Type a new Quick Set name here appears in the Print Task Quick Sets menu automatically if no other driver settings have been changed since the driver was installed, or if all of the driver settings match the original settings. Otherwise, the setting in the Print Task Quick Sets menu is the same label that appeared when you last closed the printing Properties dialog box by clicking OK.
The following table shows the default settings for Print Task Quick Sets. See the
Preconfiguration section for information about preconfigurable driver settings.
Table 4-1 Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP Color LaserJet 4700
Driver feature Feature setting location
Print on Both Sides Finishing tab, Document Options group box
Default values for
U.S. English Print
Task Quick Sets
Preconfigurable
Available, not selected Yes
178 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW
ENWW
Table 4-1 Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP Color LaserJet 4700 (continued)
Driver feature Feature setting location Default values for
U.S. English Print
Task Quick Sets
Preconfigurable
Flip Pages Up
Booklet Layout
Pages per Sheet
Print Page Borders Finishing tab, Document Options group box
Page Order
Finishing tab, Document Options group box
Orientation
Finishing tab, Document Options group box
Finishing tab, Orientation group box
1 page per sheet
Unavailable
Unavailable
Yes
Yes
Yes
Rotate by 180 degrees
Resizing Options
Print document on
Size to print on
Scale to Fit
% of Normal Size
Watermarks
Watermarks First
Page Only
Finishing tab, Orientation group box
Effects tab, Resizing Options group box
Effects tab, Resizing Options group box
Effects tab, Resizing Options group box
Effects tab, Resizing Options group box
Effects tab, Resizing Options group box
Current watermarks Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box
(Click Edit for Watermark Details.)
Watermark
Message
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box
(Click Edit for Watermark Details.)
Portrait Yes
Available, not selected Yes
Actual Size Yes
Available, not selected Yes
Actual Size Yes
Unavailable, selected Yes
Available, not selected Yes
Effects tab (none)
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box Unavailable, not selected
(none)
(none)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Watermark
Message Angle
Watermark
Message Angle
(angle)
Watermark Font
Name
Watermark Font
Color
Watermark Font
Shading
Watermark Font
Size
Watermark Font
Style
Finishing tab, Document Options group box
Finishing tab, Document Options group box
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box
(Click Edit for Watermark Details.)
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box
(Click Edit for Watermark Details.)
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box, Font Attributes group box
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box, Font Attributes group box
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box, Font Attributes group box
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box, Font Attributes group box
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box, Font Attributes group box
Unavailable, not selected
Unavailable, Off
Diagonal
Unavailable unless the Angle option is selected, 52
Arial
Gray
Very Light
80
Regular
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Paper/Quality tab features 179
Table 4-1 Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP Color LaserJet 4700 (continued)
Driver feature Feature setting location Default values for
U.S. English Print
Task Quick Sets
Preconfigurable
Size is: Paper/Quality tab, Paper Options group box
Use Different Paper Paper/Quality tab, Paper Options group box
Source is: Paper/Quality tab, Paper Options group box
Type is: Paper/Quality tab, Paper Options group box
Contrast
Enhancement
Digital Flash
SmartFocus
Paper/Quality tab, HP Digital Imaging
Options dialog box
Paper/Quality tab, HP Digital Imaging
Options dialog box
Paper/Quality tab, HP Digital Imaging
Options dialog box
Sharpness
Smoothing
Unlabeled group box
Job Storage Mode
Proof and Hold
Private Job
Quick Copy
Stored Job
Letter
Available, not selected No
Automatically Select
Unspecified
Available, Off
Available, Off
Available, Off
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Paper/Quality tab, HP Digital Imaging
Options dialog box
Paper/Quality tab, HP Digital Imaging
Options dialog box
Available, Off
Available, Off
Job Storage tab Status message: for example, Your job will be printed but not stored on the printer
Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box
Off is selected
No
No
No
No
Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box
Available, not selected No
Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box
Available, not selected No
Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box
Available, not selected No
Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box
Available, not selected No
Require PIN to Print Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box
Unavailable, not selected
Windows User
Name
Job Storage tab, User Name group box
No
Unavailable, selected
(Windows User Name appears in field)
No
PIN to Print Job Storage tab, Require PIN group box Unavailable, not selected
No
Display Job ID when printing
Job Storage tab, Job Notification Options group box
Unavailable, selected No
180 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW
ENWW
Table 4-1 Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP Color LaserJet 4700 (continued)
Driver feature Feature setting location Default values for
U.S. English Print
Task Quick Sets
Preconfigurable
Job Name Job Storage tab, Job Name group box Unavailable,
Automatically selected
Selected
No
Automatic (color options)
Manual (color options)
Print in Grayscale
Edge Control
Color tab, Color Options group box
Color tab, Color Options group box
Color tab, Color Options group box
Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click
Settings on Color tab)
Neutral Grays (text) Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click
Settings on Color tab)
Halftone (text) Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click
Settings on Color tab)
Black Only
Detail
Yes
Available, not selected Yes
Available, not selected Yes
Normal Yes
Yes
Yes
Neutral Grays
(graphics)
Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click
Settings on Color tab)
Halftone (graphics) Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click
Settings on Color tab)
Black Only
Detail
Yes
Yes
Neutral Grays
(photographs)
Halftone
(photographs)
Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click
Settings on Color tab)
Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click
Settings on Color tab)
4–Color
Detail
Yes
Yes
1
2
RGB Color Color tab, Color Themes group box Default (sRGB) Yes
These features can be preconfigured by using one of the HP driver preconfiguration tools. For more information, See
, or go to: www.hp.com/go/hpdpc_sw .
Not supported in Windows 98 and Windows Me.
User Guide Print Settings
The User Guide Print Settings option provides a Print Task Quick Set for optimal printing of the
HP Color LaserJet 4700 User Guide.
When you select User Guide Print Settings, all of the settings are restored to the default settings, except for the following settings:
● On the Paper/Quality tab, Type Is: is set to Unspecified.
● On the Finishing tab, Print on Both Sides is set to ON.
● On the Finishing tab, Flip Pages Up is set to ON.
● On the Finishing tab, Pages per Sheet is set to 2 pages per sheet.
● On the Finishing tab, Page Order is set to Right then Down.
Paper/Quality tab features 181
Type new Quick Set name here
By default, the Print Task Quick Sets menu is set to Type new Quick Set name here. When you change any of the default settings on any of the Printing Preferences driver tabs and you want to save the configuration as a Print Task Quick Set, highlight the words Type new Quick Set name here, type the name you want for your new Print Task Quick Set, and then click Save. Print Task Quick Sets are saved in the system registry. To delete a Print Task Quick Set, select it from the drop-down menu and click Delete.
NOTE Administrators can predefine Print Task Quick Sets for their users. These administrator
Print Task Quick Sets are defined on the server and are available to users, but usually cannot be modified by users. Users can also define Print Task Quick Sets for their own use. User-defined
Print Task Quick Sets are described later in this section.
You can store a maximum of 25 Print Task Quick Sets on a particular system. If you attempt to save too many, a message box appears that reads, "There are too many Print Task Quick Sets defined.
Please delete some before adding new ones."
Paper Options
The settings specified in the Paper Options group box on the Paper/Quality tab apply to all of the pages of the document. The following figure shows the Paper Options group box and the selections that are available by default.
Figure 4-4 Paper Options group box
182 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW
ENWW
The appearance of the Paper Options group box changes when the Use Different Paper/Covers check box is selected. The settings in the Paper Options group box are described in the following order:
●
●
●
●
●
Size is
The Size is: setting is a drop-down menu that lists all of the supported media sizes.
When you move the mouse over the dimensions label, the mouse cursor changes from an arrow to a gloved hand. Click the dimensions label to toggle between English and metric units.
Because media-size settings in most software programs override driver settings, it is generally best to use the driver to set media size only when you are printing from software programs that do not include a media-size setting, such as NotePad, or when you are producing a book or a booklet that does not require different media sizes.
NOTE Certain software programs can override the size command and specify different media sizes within a single document.
When you change the print-driver setting to a media size that is not currently loaded in the product, a control-panel message appears that prompts you to load the media size or choose another tray.
For information about media sizes, see the
Media attributes section of this manual.
When the Use Different Paper/Covers check box is selected and different options are configured, the
Size is:, Source is:, and Type is: menus change, offering a variety of options. For more information, see the
Use Different Paper/Covers section in this chapter of the manual.
Custom Paper Size
The Custom Paper Size dialog box appears when you click the Custom... button on the Paper/
Quality tab. The following figure shows the initial appearance of the Custom Paper Size dialog box.
Paper/Quality tab features 183
Figure 4-5 Custom Paper Size dialog box
Name
Use the Name text box to type a new name for a custom media size.
The name that appears in the Name text box depends on the following conditions:
● If a saved custom media size has been selected from the drop-down menu on the Paper/
Quality tab, then the Name text box shows the name of the selected custom media size.
● If a standard media size has been selected on the Paper/Quality tab, then the Name text box shows the default name of "Custom."
● If a new name has been typed into the Name text box for the purpose of saving a new size or renaming an existing size, then that new name will remain in the text box until the new size is saved or the dialog box is closed.
If you type a new name into the Name text box, but then do not click the Save button, you can change the width and height values without losing the name. However, if you close the dialog box without clicking the Save button, any unsaved name or size values are lost without warning.
Paper size
The width and height values can be changed by typing numeric strings into the edit boxes in the Paper
Size group box.
Any entry that is greater than the maximum limits of the width and height control is rounded down to the maximum valid entry, while any entry that is smaller than the minimum limits of the width and height control is rounded up to the minimum valid entry.
If units are in millimeters, the custom media-size range minimum is the limit rounded up to the nearest whole millimeter. The custom media-size range maximum is the limit rounded down to the nearest whole millimeter. Any non-numerical entry reverts to the last valid entry. Width and height entries are validated when the focus has changed.
The resolution of each control is one millimeter or one-tenth of an inch, depending on the current measurement units.
184 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW
ENWW
Units
To change measurement units, select one of the radio buttons in the Units group box (either Inches or
Millimeters).
Custom width and height control limits
The minimum media size for the HP Color LaserJet 4700 is 76.2 x 127 mm (3 x 5 inches) and the maximum is 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 inches). The following table summarizes media size limits for each media-handling device.
Table 4-2 PCL 6 custom media sizes
Tray
Tray 1 (100-sheet multipurpose)
Tray 2 (500-sheet)
Tray 3 (500-sheet)
Tray 4 (500-sheet)
Tray 5 (500-sheet)
Tray 6 (500-sheet)
Duplexing unit
Dimensions
Width
Height
Width
Height
Width
Height
Width
Height
Width
Height
Width
Height
Width
Height
Minimum
76.2 mm (3.0 inches)
127.0 mm (5.0 inches)
148.0 mm (5.83 inches)
210.0 mm (8.26 inches)
148.0 mm (5.83 inches)
210.0 mm (8.26 inches)
148.0 mm (5.83 inches)
210.0 mm (8.26 inches)
148.0 mm (5.83 inches)
210.0 mm (8.26 inches)
148.0 mm (5.83 inches)
210.0 mm (8.26 inches)
148.0 mm (5.83 inches)
210.0 mm (8.26 inches)
Maximum
215 mm (8.5 inches)
355.6 mm (14.0 inches)
215.9 mm (8.5 inches)
355.6 mm (14.0 inches)
215.9 mm (8.5 inches)
355.6 mm (14.0 inches)
215.9 mm (8.5 inches)
355.6 mm (14.0 inches)
215.9 mm (8.5 inches)
355.6 mm (14.0 inches)
215.9 mm (8.5 inches)
355.6 mm (14.0 inches)
215.9 mm (8.5 inches)
355.6 mm (14.0 inches)
Source Is
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source trays depends on the printer accessories. Any optional source trays that are installed through the Device
Settings tab also appear here.
The Source is: drop-down menu can contain the following options, depending on what has been installed on the product:
● Automatically select
● Printer Auto Select
● Manual Feed in Tray 1
● Tray 1 (500-sheet multipurpose tray)
● Tray 2 (500-sheet tray)
Paper/Quality tab features 185
● Tray 3 (500-sheet tray)
● Tray 4 (500-sheet tray)
● Tray 5 (500-sheet tray)
● Tray 6 (500-sheet tray)
The default setting is Automatically Select. When this setting is selected, the HP Color LaserJet 4700 uses the source tray that supports the media size that you have selected. If you select a source tray other than Automatically select, make sure that the correct media size is loaded in the source tray.
For information about media sources, see the
section of this manual.
Type is
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the HP Color LaserJet 4700 supports.
When you use the default setting, Unspecified, the printer uses the default media type, which is usually
Plain.
No mechanism exists for manually adding custom media types through the driver. Custom types can be added only by using the bidirectional communication mechanism, so they must already exist in the product when the bidirectional query occurs. If bidirectional communication is enabled, then the information an updated list of media types is returned. If bidirectional communication is not enabled, then the driver looks for custom media types that have been saved from a previous bidirectional communication query, and uses those. Otherwise, no custom media types are available through the driver.
The following standard types appear in the lists:
● Unspecified
● Plain
● Preprinted
● Letterhead
● Transparency
● Prepunched
● Labels
● Bond
● Recycled
● Color
● Light (60–75 g/m 2 , or 16.4 - 20.5 lb.)
● Intermediate (90 - 104 g/m 2 , or 24.7 - 28.5 lb.)
● Heavy (105 - 120 g/m 2 , or 28.8 - 32.9 lb.)
● Extra Heavy (120 - 163 g/m 2 , or 32.9 - 44.7 lb.)
● Glossy (75 - 120 g/m 2 , or 20.5 - 32.9 lb.)
● Cardstock (164 - 220 g/m 2 , or 45 - 60.3 lb.)
186 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW
ENWW
● Rough (90 - 105 g/m 2 , or 24.7 - 28.8 lb.)
● Heavy Glossy (120 - 160 g/m 2 , or 32.9 - 43.9 lb.)
● Extra Heavy Glossy (160 - 220 g/m 2 , or 43.9 - 58 lb.)
● Tough Paper (Glossy Film)
● Envelope
The default setting is Unspecified, and the program selects the media type. If you select a different setting, make sure that the correct media type is loaded in the tray that you selected in the Source is:
setting. For more information about media types, see the Media attributes section of this manual.
When you change the print-driver setting to a media type that is not currently loaded in the product, a control-panel message appears that prompts you to load the media type or choose another tray.
Use Different Paper/Covers
You can print books that include different media types by using the Use Different Paper/Covers options.
When you select the Use Different Paper/Covers check box, the following settings can appear in the group box, along with the associated options:
● Front Cover
● First Page
● Other Pages
● Last Page
● Back Cover
NOTE You must use the same size of media for the entire print job. All Use Different Paper/
Covers options use the last Size is: setting that you select in any one of the Use Different Paper/
Covers options.
When you change the type and source of the media and covers, the settings that you select remain configured until you close the software program.
Each option for the Use Different Paper/Covers setting is described in the following sections.
Front Cover
Use the Front Cover options to include a blank or preprinted front cover on a document, or to include a front cover from a source tray that is different from the one used for the remainder of the document.
The following figure shows the Front Cover setting and options.
Paper/Quality tab features 187
Figure 4-6 Front Cover options
The following are the Front Cover options:
● Size is: drop-down menu
● Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box
● Source is: drop-down menu
● Type is: drop-down menu
The Size is: setting specifies the media size to use for the entire print job. Changes made to the Size
is: setting here override any previous Size is: settings in other Use Different Paper/Covers options.
When you select Front Cover, you must also select the Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box to enable the setting. When you select this check box, the Source is: and Type is: drop-down menus become available and a check mark appears next to the Front Cover option.
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for adding a front cover to the document. The list of source trays depends on the printer accessories. Any optional media trays that are installed through the Device Settings tab also appear here. For more information about the Source is: setting, see the
Source Is section of this chapter.
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the printer supports. For more information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the Type is: in the
chapter.
188 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW
NOTE You must use the same size of media for the entire print job. All Use Different Paper/
Covers options use the last Size is: setting that you select in any one of the Use Different Paper/
Covers options.
When you change the type and source of the media and covers, the settings you select remain configured until you close the software program.
First Page
Use the First Page options to select an alternative media type or source for the first page of a document.
The following figure shows the appearance of the Paper Options group box when you select the Use
Different Paper/Covers check box.
ENWW
Figure 4-7 First Page options
The following are the First Page options:
● Size is: drop-down menu
● Source is: drop-down menu
● Type is: drop-down menu
The Size is: setting specifies the media size to use for the entire print job. Changes made to the Size
is: setting here override any previous Size is: settings in other Use Different Paper/Covers options.
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source trays depends on the printer accessories. Any optional media trays that are installed through the Device
Settings tab also appear here. For more information about the Source is: setting, see the
section of this chapter.
Paper/Quality tab features 189
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the printer supports. For more information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the description for Type is: in the
section of this chapter.
NOTE You must use the same size of media for the entire print job. All Use Different Paper/
Covers options use the last Size is: setting that you select in any one of the Use Different Paper/
Covers options.
When you change the type and source of the media and covers, the settings that you select remain configured until you close the software program.
Other Pages
Use the Other Pages options to select an alternative media type or source for the other pages of the document. The following figure shows the appearance of the Paper Options group box when you select the Use Different Paper/Covers check box.
Figure 4-8 Other Pages options
The following are the Other Pages options:
● Size is: drop-down menu
● Source is: drop-down menu
● Type is: drop-down menu
The Size is: setting specifies the media size to use for the entire print job. Changes made to the Size
is: setting here override any previous Size is: settings made in other Use Different Paper/Covers options.
190 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source trays depends on the printer accessories. Any optional media trays that are installed through the Device
Settings tab also appear here. For more information about the Source is: setting, see the
section of this chapter.
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the printer supports. For more
NOTE You must use the same size of media for the entire print job. All Use Different Paper/
Covers options use the last Size is: setting that you select in any one of the Use Different Paper/
Covers options.
When you change the type and source of the media and covers, the settings that you select remain configured until you close the software program.
Last Page
Use the Last Page options to select an alternative media size, type, or source for the last page of a document. The following figure shows the appearance of the Paper Options group box when you select the Use Different Paper/Covers check box.
ENWW
Figure 4-9 Last Page options
The following are the Last Page options:
● Size is: drop-down menu
● Source is: drop-down menu
● Type is: drop-down menu
Paper/Quality tab features 191
The Size is: setting specifies the media size to use for the entire print job. Changes made to the Size
is: setting here override any previous Size is: settings in other Use Different Paper/Covers options.
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the printer supports. For more information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the description for Type is: in the
section of this chapter.
NOTE You must use the same size of media for the entire print job. All Use Different Paper/
Covers options use the last Size is: setting that you select in any one of the Use Different Paper/
Covers options.
When you change the type and source of the media and covers, the settings that you select remain configured until you close the software program.
Back Cover
Use the Back Cover options to include a blank or preprinted back cover on a document, or to include a back cover from a source tray that is different from the one used for the remainder of the document.
The following figure shows the Back Cover setting and options.
Figure 4-10 Back Cover setting
The following are the Back Cover options:
● Size is: drop-down menu
● Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box
● Source is: drop-down menu
● Type is: drop-down menu
192 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW
ENWW
The Size is: setting specifies the media size to use for the entire print job. Changes made to the Size
is: setting here override any previous Size is: settings in other Use Different Paper/Covers options.
When you select Back Cover, you must also select the Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box to enable the setting. When you select this check box, the Source is: and Type is: drop-down menus become available and a check mark appears next to the Back Cover option.
NOTE The Back Cover options are not available when the Booklet Printing Layout setting is enabled on the Finishing tab. The back cover setting is unavailable, because this page would otherwise be printed in the middle of a booklet.
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for adding a back cover to the document. The list of source trays depends on the printer accessories. Any optional media trays that are installed through the Device Settings tab also appear here.
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the printer supports.
NOTE You must use the same size of media for the entire print job. All Use Different Paper/
Covers options use the last Size is: setting that you select in any one of the Use Different Paper/
Covers options.
When you change the type and source of the media and covers, the settings that you select remain configured until you close the software program.
Document preview image
The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The document preview image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right-side-up. The document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the Paper/Quality, Effects, Finishing,
Output, and Color tabs.
Switching between tabs does not change the location or appearance of the document preview image.
When you move the mouse over the document preview image, the mouse cursor changes from an arrow to a gloved hand. You can toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by clicking on the image.
HP Digital Imaging
Click the HP Digital Imaging button to open the HP Digital Imaging Options dialog box, which is shown in the following figure.
Paper/Quality tab features 193
Figure 4-11 HP Digital Imaging Options dialog box
The following settings can be adjusted on the HP Digital Imaging Options dialog box:
● Contrast Enhancement
● Digital Flash
● SmartFocus
● Sharpness
● Smoothing
The HP Digital Imaging settings should be used only on high-resolution images (600 dpi or higher) that are printed on photograph-quality paper. These settings are not recommended for text.
For the Contrast Enhancement, Digital Flash, SmartFocus, and Smoothing settings, the following controls are available:
● Automatic check box
● slide bar ranging from Off to High
The SharpFocus settings are Off and On.
Contrast Enhancement. Use the Contrast Enhancement setting to increase image contrast for a more visually pleasing result. This filter is useful with flat images (images in which much of the image content is compressed into a small dynamic range of pixel values). Flat images may result from low lighting, environmental haze, or camera or scanner limitations.
Digital Flash. Use the Digital Flashsetting to adjust lighting levels to reveal areas in shadow. The filter locates dark areas in an image and brings out detail without degrading other features in the image.
Sharpness. Many images are improved by increasing their sharpness. Use the Sharpness feature locates edge detail and makes it more prominent. The filter detects regions that contain significant variations in pixel value along a number of different vectors (which denotes edges) and then applies a filter to enhance detail.
SmartFocus. Use the SmartFocus setting to increase the apparent resolution of lower resolution images. Many images that are downloaded from the Internet or from digital cameras can be compressed
194 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW
because of size restrictions, and might exhibit pixilation artifacts when printed. SmartFocus upscales the image to the printer resolution without accentuating these artifacts.
Smoothing. Just as many images benefit increased sharpness, many images are improved by smoothing, which decreases noise artifacts that are often created by digital cameras or scanners. When you select Smoothing, the filter locates areas that contain abrupt changes in pixel value by comparison with surrounding pixels (which denotes noise) and then applies a filter to smooth the output.
ENWW Paper/Quality tab features 195
Effects tab features
To gain access to the Effects tab, follow these steps:
1.
click Start.
2.
Select Settings.
3.
Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows
Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).
4.
Right-click the product name.
5.
Click Printing Preferences.
6.
Click the Effects tab.
Use the Effects tab to create unique media effects such as scaling and watermarks. The following figure shows the Effects tab.
Figure 4-12 Effects tab
The Effects tab contains the following controls:
● Print Task Quick Sets group box
● Resizing Options group box
196 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW
ENWW
● Document preview image
● Watermarks group box
Print Task Quick Sets
Use the Print Task Quick Sets control to store the current combination of driver settings that appear on all other Printing Preferences driver tabs. Print task quick sets are either preset or user-defined printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet. For more information, see the
Quality tab features section of this manual.
Resizing options
The Resizing Options group box consists of the following controls:
● Actual Size (default)
● Print Document On setting
● Scale to Fit option
● % of Normal Size setting
Actual Size
Actual Size is the default setting. It prints the document without changing the document size.
Print Document On
Select the Print Document On radio button to format the document for one media size and then print the document on a different media size, with or without scaling the image to fit the new media size.
The Print Document On control is disabled by either of the following conditions:
● The % of Normal Size value is not 100.
● The Pages per Sheet value (on the Finishing tab) is not 1.
When Print Document On is selected, the drop-down menu shows the media sizes on which you can print. The list contains all of the standard media sizes that are supported by the selected media source and any custom sizes that you have created. When Print Document On is selected, Scale to Fit is automatically selected. Clear this check box if you do not want your document reduced or enlarged to fit on the selected media.
Scale to Fit
The Scale to Fit option box specifies whether each formatted document page image is scaled to fit the target media size. By default, Scale to Fit is selected when Print Document On is selected. If the setting is turned off, then the document page images will not be scaled, and are instead centered at full size on the target media. If the document size is larger than the target media size, then the document image is clipped. If it is smaller, then it is centered within the target media. The following figure shows preview images for a document formatted for Legal-size media with the Print Document On check box selected, and the target size specified as Letter.
Effects tab features 197
Figure 4-13 Preview images - Legal on Letter; Scale to Fit off (left) and on (right)
When the size for which the document is formatted (that is, the logical size) differs from the target size, the preview image uses a dashed gray line to show the boundaries of the logical page in relation to the target page size.
% of Normal Size
The % of Normal Size option provides a slider bar to use for scaling the percentage setting. The default setting in the entry box is 100% of normal size. Normal size is defined as the media size that is selected within the driver or what the driver receives from the software program (if the software program does not negotiate the media size with the driver). The driver scales the page by the appropriate factor and sends it to the printer.
The limits of the range are from 25% to 400%, and any values outside the range are adjusted to those limits as soon as the focus is removed from the control (that is, when the Tab key is pressed or another control is selected).
Any change to the scale also changes the page preview, which increases or decreases from the upperleft corner of the preview.
The slider bar controls the scale directly. The value in the edit box changes as the scroll bar indicator is dragged, and the preview image is updated to the new image scale. Each click on the scroll bar arrows increases or decreases the scale by 1%. Each click on the slider bar affects the scale by 10%.
You cannot achieve an exact value by dragging the scroll bar indicator at the default Windows resolution; use the scroll bar indicator to approximate the value you want, and then use the scroll bar arrows to refine the value.
The following settings disable % of Normal Size:
● Print Document On (on the Effects tab) is selected
● Pages per Sheet (on the Finishing tab) is not 1
Document preview image
The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The document preview image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right-side-up. The document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the Paper/Quality, Effects, Finishing,
Output, and Color tabs.
Switching between tabs does not change the location or appearance of the document preview image.
When you move the mouse over the document preview image, the mouse cursor changes from an arrow to a gloved hand. You can toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by clicking on the image.
198 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW
Watermarks
Use the Watermarks feature to choose a watermark, create your own custom watermarks (text only), or edit an existing watermark. The following watermarks are preset in the driver:
● (none)
● Confidential
● Draft
● SAMPLE
The drop-down menu shows alphabetically sorted watermarks that are currently available on the system, plus the string "(none)", which indicates that no watermark is selected. This is the default setting. Any watermark that is selected from this list appears in the preview image.
When the First Page Only check box is selected, the watermark is printed only on the first page of the document. The First Page Only check box is disabled when the current watermark selection is "(none)".
Watermarks are applied to logical pages. For example, when Pages per Sheet is set to "4" and First
Page Only is turned off, four watermarks appear on the physical page (one on each logical page).
Click Edit, and the Watermark Details dialog box appears.
ENWW
Figure 4-14 Watermark Details dialog box
Effects tab features 199
The dialog box shows a preview image and provides options for creating a new watermark and controlling the message angle and font attributes.
Click OK to accept all of the changes that are made in the Watermark Details dialog box. However, clicking Cancel does not cancel all of the changes. If you make changes to a watermark and then select a different watermark or click New, all of the changes are saved, and only the current, unsaved changes can be canceled.
Current watermarks
The Current Watermarks group box contains a list of available watermarks, both predefined watermarks that are available in the driver and any new watermarks that you have created.
To create a new watermark, click New. The new watermark appears in the Current Watermarks list and in the Watermark Message edit box as "Untitled" until you name it. The name that you type in the
Watermark Message field appears in the Current Watermarks group box in the Watermark Details dialog box and in the Watermarks group box on the Effects tab.
To name the new watermark, type the selected watermark text in the Watermark Message edit box.
To delete a watermark, select the watermark in the Current Watermarks list and click Delete. A warning appears asking whether you are sure you want to delete the selected item. Click Cancel if you want to keep the watermark. Click OK to delete the selected watermark.
NOTE You can have no more that 30 watermarks in the Current Watermarks list at one time.
When you reach the limit of 30 watermarks, the New button is disabled.
To edit an existing watermark, select the watermark in the Current Watermarks list. If you change the
Watermark Message for that watermark, you are, in effect, creating a new watermark.
Watermark Message
The Watermark Message is also the name that identifies the watermark in the Current Watermarks list, except when more than one watermark has the same message. For example, you might want several different watermarks with the message DRAFT, each with a different typeface or font size. When this occurs, the string is appended with a space, a pound sign, and a number (for example, Draft #2).
When a number is added, the number two is used first, but if the resulting name is also in the list, then the number increases until the name is unique (Draft #3, Draft #4, and so on).
Message Angle
Use the controls in the Message Angle group box to print the watermark in different orientations on the page. The settings are Diagonal, Horizontal, or Angle (custom). The default is Diagonal. All three settings automatically center the watermark string within the page; the selection of a particular setting affects only the angle of the string placement. Diagonal places the text along a line that spans the lowerleft to upper-right corners of the page. Horizontal places the text along a line that spans the mid-left and mid-right edges of the page. Angle places the text at the specified angle across the page.
Font Attributes
Use the controls in the Font Attributes group box to change the font and the shading, size, and style of the font.
200 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW
ENWW
The Font Attributes group box contains the following controls:
● Name drop-down menu lists fonts that are currently installed on the system. The default is language-dependent.
● Color drop-down menu contains the following selections:
● Gray
● Red
● Yellow
● Green
● Cyan
● Blue
● Magenta
● The default Shading setting for new and preset watermarks is Very Light. The following range of shades is available from the Shading drop-down menu:
● Lightest
● Very Light (default)
● Light
● Medium Light
● Medium
● Medium Dark
● Dark
● Very Dark
● Darkest
These values represent the intensity of the gray that is used. A choice of Light produces a lightly saturated gray watermark. A choice of Lightest produces the lightest shade of watermark;
Darkest produces a black watermark.
● Font sizes from 1 to 999 points are available from the Size menu. The default point size is languagedependent. The choice of Regular, Bold, Italic, and Bold Italic is available from the Style dropdown menu.
● The choice of Regular, Bold, Italic, and Bold Italic is available from the Style drop-down menu.
The default Style setting for new and preset watermarks is Regular.
Default settings
The default settings for new watermarks are Arial font, Gray color, Very Light shading, 80 points, and
Regular style. The default settings for preset watermarks are Arial font, Very Light shading, and
Bold style. The default point size for preset watermarks is language-dependent, and varies.
Effects tab features 201
Finishing tab features
To gain access to the Finishing tab, follow these steps:
1.
click Start.
2.
Select Settings.
3.
Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows
Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).
4.
Right-click the product name.
5.
Click Printing Preferences.
6.
Click the Finishing tab.
Use the Finishing tab to print booklets and control the media output. The following figure shows the
Finishing tab.
Figure 4-15 Finishing tab
The Finishing tab contains the following controls:
● Print Task Quick Sets group box
● Document Options group box
202 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW
ENWW
● Document preview image
● Orientation group box
Print Task Quick Sets
Use the Print Task Quick Sets control to store the current combination of driver settings that appear on all other Printing Preferences driver tabs. Print task quick sets are either preset or user-defined printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet. For more information, see the
Quality tab features section of this manual.
Document Options
The Document Options group box contains the following controls:
● Print on Both Sides check box
● Flip Pages Up option
● Booklet Layout drop-down menu
● Pages per Sheet drop-down menu
● Print Page Borders check box
● Page Order drop-down menu
Print on Both Sides
The default setting for the Print on Both Sides option is off (not selected). Print on Both Sides is available when the following conditions exist:
● Type is: on the Paper tab is set to any type except Transparency, Labels, or Envelope.
● Size is: is set to any size except Double Japan Postcard Rotated, Envelope #10, Envelope B5,
Envelope C5, Envelope DL, Envelope Monarch, or Statement.
Automatically printing on both sides
The duplexing unit in the printer prints on two sides of a sheet of paper when the Print on Both
Sides option is specified in the print job. The HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer comes with a duplexing unit installed in the following models:
● HP Color LaserJet 4700dn
● HP Color LaserJet 4700dtn
● HP Color LaserJet 4700ph+
These printer models support smart duplexing. The smart duplexing feature increases printing performance by preventing one-page print jobs or single-sided pages of a duplexed print job from going through the duplexing unit even when the duplexing feature has been selected in the driver.
Finishing tab features 203
All media types support the smart duplexing feature, except for media types that cannot be printed on both sides, such as labels and transparencies, and the following media types:
● Prepunched
● Preprinted
● Letterhead
When the media type is set to Unspecified, the smart duplexing feature is disabled.
To achieve the best print quality when printing on the second side of the page, the printer needs to make adjustments to its print modes. When you select a media type, you are, in effect, instructing the printer to use a group of settings (such as fuser temperature and print speed) to print the media with the best possible quality. This group of settings is known as print mode. A different print mode is used with each media type. Print-mode adjustments for the second side of a duplexed page are automatic.
Manually printing on both sides
● Manually Print on 2nd Side is not selected
Select the Print on Both Sides (Manually) check box to print on the second side of the media for the HP Color LaserJet 4700 and HP Color LaserJet 4700n printer models, which do not have a duplexing unit installed. Also select Print on Both Sides (Manually) on the other
HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer models for media types that are not available when using the automatic duplexing unit, such as cardstock and thick media.
Manually printing on the second side of a page is available when you are using the HP PCL 6, PCL
5, or the PS emulation unidriver. If a duplexing unit is installed and manual duplexing is enabled in the driver, the printer automatically prints on both sides of media types that are supported for automatic duplexing (Letter, A4, Legal, 8.5 x 13, and Executive (JIS) only), and forces manual printing on both sides for media types that are not supported.
Select the media type that corresponds to the media you are using for the print job. The following media types have a different print modes when you manually print on the second side:
● Plain
● Preprinted
● Letterhead
● Prepunched
● Bond
● Recycled
● Colored
● Rough
204 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW
NOTE To make the Print on Both Sides (Manually) check box available in the document options, select the Allow Manual Duplexing option on the Device Settings tab in the Properties print-driver tabs. See
section of this chapter.
If you want to print on both sides manually while using media that is supported by automatic duplexing, you must select and apply the Not Installed setting on the Duplex Unit (for 2-Sided
Printing) option on the Device Settings tab.
Cardstock media can be manually printed on the second side, but there is no change to the print mode.
Transparencies and labels should not be manually printed on the second side.
To print a multiple-page document, follow these steps:
1.
Select the Print on Both Sides (Manually) check box.
2.
Click OK. The even-number pages of the document print.
3.
When the control panel shows the MANUALLY FEED message, insert the stack of media (on which the even-number pages have been printed) as indicated in the following figure.
ENWW
When you have completed the steps that appear in the dialog box, the second half of the print job prints on the back side of the stack of media. The driver does not require the program to specifically support odd- and even-page printing, because the driver coordinates this function.
Flip Pages Up
The Flip Pages Up check box is used to specify the duplex-binding option. By default, the Flip Pages
Up check box is not available. It is available only when Print on Both Sides is selected, The following
Finishing tab features 205
table demonstrates the results of selecting this box, depending on the media orientation selected on the
Finishing tab.
Table 4-3 Page orientation
Orientation (Finishing tab)
Portrait
Landscape
Flip Pages Up selected
Short-edge binding
Long-edge binding
Flip Pages Up not selected
Long-edge binding
Short-edge binding
When Print on Both Sides is selected, the document preview image changes to show a spiral binding along either the left edge or the top edge of the page. In addition, a folded-over corner appears in the lower-right portion of the preview image, indicating that printing occurs on the back side. An arrow on the folded-over corner points in the direction that the pages would be flipped if they were bound together.
Short-side binding is for print jobs with pages that read by flipping over like the pages of a note pad.
Long-side binding is for print jobs with pages that read by turning like the pages of a book.
Booklet layout
The Booklet Layout drop-down menu, visible when Print on Both Sides is selected, offers choices that are based on the current media size. The default setting for the Booklet Printing drop-down menu is Off. The other settings have the following format, where [paper size] depends on the media size that is set on the Paper/Quality tab.
● Left Edge Binding
● Right Edge Binding
When you select Left Edge Binding or Right Edge Binding, the document preview image changes to show the location of the binding. If the Pages per Sheet setting is on the default setting of 1, it automatically changes to 2 pages per sheet. If you change the Pages per Sheet setting manually to
4, 6, 9, or 16 pages per sheet, the booklet setting is disabled. See the
Pages per Sheet section of this
chapter for more information.
Book and Booklet Printing
The HP Color LaserJet 4700 supports book and booklet printing.
A book is a print job consisting of at least two pages that can have a different media type for the front cover, first page, other pages, last page, or back cover. Use the Front Cover, First Page, Other Pages,
Last Page, and Back Cover settings on the Paper/Quality tab (available when you select the Use
Different Paper check box) to select different media for the front cover, first page, other pages, and
back cover. For more information, see Paper/Quality tab features
of this chapter.
A booklet is a print job that places two pages on each side of a sheet that can then be folded into a booklet that is half the size of the media. Use the Booklet Layout drop-down menu on the Finishing tab to control booklet settings.
To print a booklet
Complete the following steps to print a booklet in most software programs.
1.
Click File.
2.
Click Print.
206 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW
ENWW
3.
Click Properties.
4.
Click the Finishing tab.
5.
Select the Print on Both Sides check box.
6.
In the Booklet Layout drop-down menu, select the type of booklet printing that you want (for example, Right Edge Binding).
7.
Click OK in the print driver.
8.
Click OK in the print dialog box to print.
Pages per Sheet
Use the Pages per Sheet option to select the number of pages that you want to print on a single sheet of media. If you choose to print more than one page per sheet, the pages appear smaller and are arranged on the sheet in the order that they would otherwise be printed. The Pages per Sheet dropdown menu provides six settings:
● 1 page per sheet (this is the default)
● 2 pages per sheet
● 4 pages per sheet
● 6 pages per sheet
● 9 pages per sheet
● 16 pages per sheet
NOTE When you select an option other than 2 pages per sheet, booklet printing is unavailable.
Print Page Borders
Related controls indented beneath the Pages per Sheet edit box are Print Page Borders and Page
Order, which become active when Pages per Sheet is greater than 1.
Print Page Borders sets a line around each page image on a printed sheet to help visually define the borders of each logical page.
Page Order
The Page Order drop-down menu contains four selections:
● Right, then Down
● Down, then Right
● Left, then Down
● Down, then Left
The preview document image changes to reflect alterations in these settings, as shown by the examples in the following figure.
Finishing tab features 207
Figure 4-16 Page-order preview images
● 2 pages per sheet
● 4 pages per sheet
● 6 pages per sheet
● 9 pages per sheet
● 16 pages per sheet
Document preview image
The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The document preview image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right-side-up. The document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the Paper/Quality, Effects, Finishing,
Output, and Color tabs.
Switching between tabs does not change the location or appearance of the document preview image.
When you move the mouse over the document preview image, the mouse cursor changes from an arrow to a gloved hand. You can toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by clicking on the image.
Orientation
Orientation refers to the layout of the image on the page, and does not affect the manner in which media is fed into the printer. You can specify the orientation of the print job. The three available orientations are portrait, landscape, and rotated. The default orientation is Portrait.
NOTE Nearly all software programs establish the orientation for the printed page, so the page orientation in the driver is useful only for the few software programs that do not set an orientation.
The Orientation group box contains three options:
● Portrait. The top edge of the document is the shorter edge of the media.
● Landscape. The top edge of the document is the longer edge of the media.
● Rotate by 180 degrees. This creates a landscape or portrait orientation in which the image is rotated 180° degrees. This setting is useful for printing prepunched media.
You can toggle orientation between portrait and landscape by clicking the document preview image. If you select the Rotate by 180 degrees check box, no change occurs in the document preview image.
208 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW
Output tab features
To gain access to the Output tab, follow these steps:
1.
click Start.
2.
Select Settings.
3.
Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows
Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).
4.
Right-click the product name.
5.
Click Printing Preferences.
6.
Click the Output tab.
NOTE The Output tab does not appear unless you have output accessories installed and configured on the printer.
Use the Output tab to select finishing and output options for a document. The following figure shows the Output tab.
ENWW
Figure 4-17 Output tab
Output tab features 209
The Output tab contains the following controls:
● Print Task Quick Sets group box
● Output Options group box
● Document preview image
Print Task Quick Sets
Use the Print Task Quick Sets control to store the current combination of driver settings that appear on all other Printing Preferences driver tabs. Print task quick sets are either preset or user-defined printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet. For more information, see the
Quality tab features section of this manual.
Output Options
The available Output Options for the HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer depend on which accessory output device is installed on the product. The options for accessories, which must be installed and configured on the Device Settings tab, are:
● None
● One Staple
When no optional accessory output bin is installed on the product, the Output tab is not available.
Document preview image
The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The document preview image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right-side-up. The document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the Paper/Quality, Effects, Finishing,
Output, and Color tabs.
Switching between tabs does not change the location or appearance of the document preview image.
When you move the mouse over the document preview image, the mouse cursor changes from an arrow to a gloved hand. You can toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by clicking on the image.
210 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW
Job Storage tab features
To gain access to the Job Storage tab, follow these steps:
1.
click Start.
2.
Select Settings.
3.
Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows
Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).
4.
Right-click the product name.
5.
Click Printing Preferences.
6.
Click the Job Storage tab.
NOTE The Job Storage tab appears only when a hard disk is installed or at least 288 MB of total memory is installed and configured.
Use the Job Storage feature to store print jobs in the HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer memory for printing at a later time. These job-storage features are described in the following sections.
The Job Storage tab appears among the driver tabs only if Job Storage is enabled. To support job storage features for complex jobs, or if you often print complex graphics, print postscript (.PS) documents, or use many downloaded fonts, HP recommends that you install additional memory, install a hard disk, or both. Added memory also gives you more flexibility in supporting job storage features.
A hard disk or a minimum total memory of 288 MB is required to use Job Storage features.
After a hard disk or additional memory is installed, the driver must be configured to reflect the changes in the product. If bidirectional communication is enabled in your environment, the Update Now feature can be used to update the drivers. For more information, see the
Automatic Configuration section in this
chapter.
To configure the drivers manually after installing a hard disk or additional memory, follow these steps:
1.
Click Start.
2.
Select Settings.
3.
Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional) or Printers and
Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).
4.
Right-click the product name.
5.
Click Properties.
6.
Click the Device Settings tab.
7.
If additional memory has been installed, select Printer Memory: under Installable Options, and then select either 160 MB, 256 MB, 416 MB, or 544 MB, depending on the total amount of memory currently installed.
8.
If a hard disk has been installed, select Installed for the Printer Hard Disk under Installable
Options, and then select Installed in the drop-down menu.
9.
Click OK to make the printer hard disk and job-storage features available.
ENWW Job Storage tab features 211
NOTE The Job Storage tab appears among the driver tabs only if Job Storage is enabled.
You can disable Job Storage while leaving the printer hard disk enabled. To disable Job Storage, follow these steps:
1.
click Start.
2.
Select Settings.
3.
Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows
Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).
4.
Right-click the product name.
5.
click Properties.
6.
click the Device Settings tab.
7.
select Job Storage:.
8.
and then select Disabled in the Change 'Job Storage' Setting dialog box that appears.
NOTE When Job Storage is disabled, the Job Storage driver tab is not visible.
If Job Storage is enabled (without installing a hard disk but with at least 288 MB of total memory), two Job Storage Mode settings are available on the Job Storage tab:
● Proof and Hold
● Private Job
Two additional Job Storage Mode settings become available on the Job Storage tab if a hard disk is installed:
● Quick Copy
● Stored Job
The following figure shows the Job Storage tab.
212 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW
ENWW
Figure 4-18 Job Storage tab
The Job Storage tab contains the following controls:
● Print Task Quick Sets group box
● Status group box (unlabeled)
● Job Storage Mode group box
● Require PIN group box
● Job Notification Options group box
● User Name group box
● Job Name group box
Print Task Quick Sets
Use the Print Task Quick Sets control to store the current combination of driver settings that appear on all other Printing Preferences driver tabs. Print task quick sets are either preset or user-defined printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet. For more information, see the
Quality tab features section of this manual.
Job Storage tab features 213
Status group box
The unlabeled group box on the Job Storage tab contains a status message about the destination of a print job. The status information changes depending on the selections that are made on the Job
Storage tab.
Job Storage Mode
Use the Job Storage Mode options on the HP Color LaserJet 4700 to store documents at the product and then control their printing at the product control panel. This feature is intended to provide greater flexibility, convenience, security, and cost savings.
The HP Color LaserJet 4700 offers the following Job Storage Mode options:
● Off
● Proof and Hold
● Private Job
● Quick Copy
● Stored Job
These options and the settings that control them are described below.
Off
When selected, this option turns the Job Storage feature off (it is disabled), which means that the print job will not be stored in the product.
Proof and Hold
To use the Proof and Hold option, Job Storage must be enabled.
When selected, this option stores the print job in memory and prints only the first copy of the job, allowing you to check the first copy. If the document prints correctly, you can print the remaining copies of the print job at the control panel. You can set the number of proof-and-hold print jobs that can be stored in the product at the control panel.
After it is released for printing, the proof-and-hold job is immediately deleted from the product. If more copies are needed, you must reprint the job from the software program. If you send a second proof-andhold job to the product with the same user name and job name as an existing proof-and-hold job (and you have not released the original job for printing), the job will overwrite the existing job. Proof-and-hold jobs are deleted if you turn off the product.
NOTE The product configuration can be set to hold a maximum of 50 quick-copy or proof-andhold jobs. The number is set at the product control panel in the CONFIGURATION menu, and the default is 32. When this preset limit is reached, the new document overwrites the oldest held document. Also, a document that has the same user and job name as one that is already stored on the printer hard disk will overwrite the existing document.
Private Job
To use the Private Job option, Job Storage must be enabled.
214 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW
ENWW
When you select Private Job, the print job is sent to the product, but is not printed until you request the job at the product control panel. Selecting Private Job activates the PIN group box. The print job can be printed only after you type the correct PIN at the control panel. After the job is printed, the job is deleted from the product. This feature is useful when you are printing sensitive or confidential documents that you do not want to leave in an output bin after printing.
The Private Job/PIN coupling has a PIN restriction of four ASCII numeric characters (0 though 9). If you type non-numeric characters, they are removed immediately. If you type more than four characters, the characters past the fourth are truncated. The field temporarily accepts fewer than four digits in the string, but when the edit field loses focus, the zeroes pad the left end until the PIN contains exactly four digits.
The default initialized value for the PIN is 0000 for Private Job.
After it is released for printing, the private job is immediately deleted from the product. If more copies are needed, you must reprint the job from the software program. If you send a second private job that has the same user name and job name as an existing private job (and you have not released the original job for printing), the job will overwrite the existing job, regardless of the PIN. Private jobs are deleted if you turn off the product.
Quick Copy
To use the Quick Copy option, a printer hard disk must be installed, and Job Storage must be enabled.
When you select Quick Copy, the entire print job prints and a copy of the print job is stored on the product, after which you can print additional copies of the print job at the product control panel. The number of quick-copy print jobs that can be stored in the product is set by using the product control panel.
NOTE The product configuration can be set to hold a maximum of 50 quick-copy or proof-andhold jobs. The number is set at the product control panel in the CONFIGURATION menu, and the default is 32. When this preset limit is reached, the new document overwrites the oldest held document. Also, a document that has the same user and job name as one that is already stored on the printer hard disk will overwrite the existing document. Quick Copy jobs are deleted if you turn off the product.
Stored Job
To use the Stored Job option, a printer hard disk must be installed and Job Storage must be enabled.
Use the Stored Job option to send a print job directly to the printer hard disk without printing it. The print job is stored in the product as if it is an electronic file cabinet. After the print job is stored on the printer hard disk, you can print the job at the product control panel.
The job remains stored in the product until it is deleted or overwritten by a document that has the same user and job names. Stored jobs remain on the printer hard disk when the product is turned off. Use this feature for forms and other common or shared documents.
A stored job can be managed in two ways: as either a private or a public job. Use a private stored job to send a print job directly to the product, which can then be printed only after you type a PIN at the product control panel. (You can set the PIN in the PIN group box.) After the job is printed, the job remains in the product and can be printed again at the product control panel. The private mode is initiated by selecting the Require PIN to Print check box. In this mode, a PIN that is typed at the product control panel is required in order to release the job.
The box labeled PIN is usually inactive. The Require PIN to Print option becomes available when you select Stored Job. If you select the Require PIN to Print box, you must type a PIN to make the stored job private.
Job Storage tab features 215
NOTE A private stored job is not the same as a private job the previous section. Private jobs are deleted from the product after they are printed. Private stored jobs are retained in the product after printing, but require that a PIN be typed each time they are printed. A printer hard disk is required for Private stored jobs.
Require PIN
Require PIN is available when Stored Job is selected. Select the PIN to Print box, then type a 4-digit
PIN number in the box provided. The stored job is sent to the product, where you must enter the 4-digit
PIN on the control panel to retrieve the stored job.
The PIN to Print box is selected, but not available, when Private Job is selected. Type a 4-digit PIN number in the box provided. The stored job is sent to the product, where you must type the 4-digit PIN on the control panel to retrieve the stored job.
Job notification
Clicking a job storage mode selection causes the User Name and Job Name options to become available. The Display Job ID when printing check box is selected by default. The Display Job ID
when printing option causes a pop-up dialog box to appear when the job-storage print job is printed.
The dialog box shows the user name and job name that are associated with the stored print job, as well as the product name, port, and location.
User Name
Use the User Name settings to help identify the job at the product control panel. The following are the User Name settings:
● Windows User Name. This option associates your Windows user name with the stored print job.
The Windows user name automatically appears in the text field below the Windows User Name options.
● Custom. Use this option to type a custom name for the stored print job. When you click the
Custom option button, the text field below the option becomes available. The User Name field can contain no more than 16 characters, and is limited to A through Z and 0 through 9 because the name appears on the product control-panel display. If you try to type a lowercase character, it automatically shifts to uppercase. If you try to type a character in an ASCII code of fewer than 32 or more than 126 characters, the character is removed from the edit field, along with all of the characters that follow it. If you try to type more than 16 characters, any character beyond 16 is truncated.
Job Name
Use the Job Name options to specify a name to identify the job at the control panel. The following are the Job Name settings:
● Automatic. This option automatically generates the job name that is associated with the stored print job. The file name of the print job is used if it is available to the print driver. Otherwise, the software program name or a time stamp is used for the job name.
● Custom. Use this to type a custom job name for the stored print job. When you click the
Custom option button, the text field below the option becomes available.
The Job Name field can contain no more than 16 characters, and is limited to A through Z and 0 through
9 because the name appears on the product control-panel display. If you try to type a lowercase
216 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW
ENWW character, it automatically shifts to uppercase. If you try to type a character in an ASCII code of fewer than 32 or more than 126 characters, the character is removed from the edit field, along with all of the characters that follow it. If you try to type more than 16 characters, any character beyond 16 is truncated.
When the dialog box is closed, or as soon as the focus is removed from the control (that is, when the
Tab key is pressed or another control is selected), an empty string is replaced with Automatic. The acceptable characters for job name and user name vary for each operating system. The string must be of a length and type that can appear on the product control-panel display.
If Job Name Exists
When you store a print job, you can create a print job name or the printer software can assign one automatically. If a print job with the same name already exists, the new print job will overwrite the existing print job. To eliminate the chances of a new print job overwriting an old print job because both have the same name, select Use Job Name + (1-999). After you create the print job name, or when one is created automatically, the printer software assigns a number between 1 and 999 to the end of the print job name to make the name unique. You can select Replace Existing File if you always want the printer software to overwrite an existing print job with the same print job name.
Using Job Storage features when printing
To use Job Storage features when printing, follow these steps:
1.
Click File and then click Print from the software program. The Print dialog box appears.
NOTE Clicking the print icon in the software program toolbar prints the job without using
Job Storage features.
2.
Click Properties. The Properties dialog box appears.
3.
Click the Job Storage tab.
4.
Select the Job Storage options by clicking the appropriate option button, and then complete any required fields.
5.
Click OK.
Releasing a Job Storage print job
After you send a print job that uses the Job Storage feature, you can release the job to print from the product control panel.
1.
Press (the Select button; the one with the check mark) to open the menus.
2.
Press (the up button) and (the down button) until RETRIEVE JOB is highlighted on the product control panel, and then press .
3.
Press (the up button) and (the down button) to scroll to your User Name, and then press
.
4.
Press and to scroll to the Job Name, and then press .
5.
Press (the up button) and (the down button) until PRINT is highlighted on the product control panel, and then press .
6.
Press .
Job Storage tab features 217
7.
If a PIN number is assigned to the job, press and to select the first digit of the PIN, and then press . The number in the product control-panel display changes to an asterisk. Repeat this step for each of the remaining three digits of the PIN number.
If no PIN number is assigned to the job, continue with step 7.
8.
Press and to select the number of copies to print.
9.
Press to print the job.
Deleting a Job Storage print job
Sometimes it is necessary to delete a print job from the product hard disk. You can do this from the product control panel.
1.
Press (the Select button; the one with the check mark) to open the menus.
2.
Press (the up button) and (the down button) until RETRIEVE JOB is highlighted on the product control panel, and then press .
3.
Press
4.
Press the up and down buttons to scroll to your User Name, and then press .
5.
Press and to scroll to the Job Name, and then press .
6.
Press (the up button) and (the down button) until DELETE is highlighted on the product control panel, and then press .
7.
Press .
8.
If a PIN number is assigned to the job, press and to select the first digit of the PIN, and then press . The number in the product control-panel display changes to an asterisk. Repeat this step for each of the remaining three digits of the PIN number.
If no PIN number is assigned to the job, continue with step 7.
9.
Press to delete the job.
The stored print job is deleted and the product returns to the READY state.
218 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW
Color tab features
To gain access to the Color tab, follow these steps:
1.
click Start.
2.
Select Settings.
3.
Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows
Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).
4.
Right-click the product name.
5.
Click Printing Preferences.
6.
Click the Color tab.
Use the Color tab to specify predefined color-option settings or to fine-tune the color treatments and halftoning. Color output can also be converted to grayscale. The Color tab is shown in the following figure.
ENWW
Figure 4-19 Color tab
Color tab features 219
The Color tab contains the following sets of controls:
● Print Task Quick Sets group box
● Color Options group box
● Color Themes group box
● Document preview image
Print Task Quick Sets
The Print Task Quick Sets control is available on each Printing Preference tab, and is used to store the current combination of driver settings found on all of the other tabs. Print Task Quick Sets are either preset or user-defined printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet. For more information, see
Color Options
Use the Color Options group box to adjust the independent color controls. The settings affect the print job color rendering and print quality. The Color Options group box contains the following controls:
● Automatic option (default)
● Manual option
● Settings button (that opens the Color Settings dialog box)
● Print in Grayscale check box
Automatic
Use the Automatic option for default color settings that automatically fine-tune the printed output. The
Automatic default color settings provide high-quality output for most color printing needs.
Manual
To change the default color settings, select the Manual option, and then click the Settings button. The
Color Settings dialog box appears.
To change the settings, make your selections by using the drop-down menus in the Color Settings dialog box, and then click OK. The following figure shows the Color Settings dialog box with "Custom" settings.
220 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW
ENWW
Figure 4-20 Color Settings dialog box
The Color Settings dialog box contains the following controls:
● General
● Edge Control
● Text
● Neutral Grays
● Halftone
● Graphics
● Neutral Grays
● Halftone
● Photographs
● Neutral Grays
● Halftone
General
Use the General setting group to control Edge Control settings for all color printing.
Color tab features 221
Edge Control determines how edges are rendered. Edge Control consists of three components:
Adaptive Halftoning, Trapping, and Color Resolution Enhancement technology (C-REt). Adaptive
Halftoning increases the edge sharpness. Trapping reduces the effect of color plane misregistration by slightly overlapping the edges of adjacent objects. C-REt increases the apparent resolution by placing each dot for the smoothest edges.
The Edge Control option offers four settings:
● Off. The Off setting turns Trapping, Adaptive Halftoning, and C-REt to Off.
● Light. The Light setting provides minimal trapping. Adaptive Halftoning is set to On and C-REt is set to On.
● Normal. The Normal setting provides the default trapping settings. Adaptive Halftoning is set to
On, and C-REt is set to On.
● Maximum. The Maximum setting provides the most trapping. Adaptive Halftoning is set to On, and C-REt is set to On.
Neutral Grays
The Neutral Grays drop-down menu controls the selection of a device-dependent color table that is embedded in the product firmware. The options are Black Only or 4-Color. You can adjust the Neutral
Grays setting independently for text, graphics, or photographs.
● Black Only. This option generates neutral colors (grays and black) by using only black toner. This option guarantees that neutral colors do not have a color cast. Black Only is the default setting for the Text and Graphics components.
● 4-Color. This option generates neutral colors by combining all four colors of toner, which produces smoother gradients and transitions to non-neutral colors. It also produces the darkest possible black. 4-Color is the default setting for Photographs.
Halftone
The Halftone setting controls the selection of a product-dependent halftone algorithm that is embedded in the product firmware. Halftoning is a method by which the printer mixes the four primary colors (cyan, magenta, yellow, and black) in varying proportions to create millions of colors. The Halftone options affect the resolution and clarity of the color on the printed page. You can select Halftone settings for text, graphics, and photographs independently.
The following Halftone options are available:
● Detail. This is the default option; it is useful for text and graphics that require sharp distinctions among lines or colors, or for images that contain a pattern or a high level of detail. Choose this option for sharp edges and detail.
● Smooth. This option provides better results for large, solid-filled print areas. It also enhances photographs by smoothing out fine color gradations. Choose this option for uniform and smooth area fills.
Color Themes
The Color Themes group box contains the following settings:
●
●
222 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW
ENWW
●
●
●
Default (sRGB)
Select Default (sRGB) for most printing needs. This setting instructs the printer to interpret RGB color as sRGB, which is the accepted standard of Microsoft and the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C).
Colors are matched to optimize the RGB colors on the screen and to provide vivid images and graphics.
Image Optimization (sRGB)
Select Image optimization (sRGB) to enhance documents in which the content is mainly bitmap images, such as .GIF or .JPG files. This setting instructs the printer to use the best color matching for rendering sRGB bitmap images. This setting affects only raster data; it has no effect on text or vectorbased graphics. Using glossy media in combination with this setting provides the maximum enhancement.
Adobe RGB (1998)
Select AdobeRGB (1998) for documents that use the Adobe RGB color space rather than sRGB. For example, some digital cameras capture images in Adobe RBG, and documents that are produced with
Adobe Photoshop® use the Adobe RGB color space. When printing from a professional software program that uses Adobe RGB , turn off the color management in the software program and allow the printer software to manage the color space.
None
Select None to instruct the printer to print RGB data in raw device mode. To render documents correctly when this option is selected, you must manage color within the software program or the operating system.
CAUTION Use this option only if you are familiar with the procedures for managing color in the software program or the operating system; otherwise, color quality can be compromised.
Custom Profile
Custom Profile. Select Custom Profile when you want to duplicate the printed output from other printers or for using special effects, such as sepia tones. This setting instructs the printer to use a custom input profile to more accurately predict and control color output.
The default Custom Profile is an emulation of the color table used on the HP Color LaserJet 4650. The printer holds only one custom profile at a time, so when you download and install another color table, it erases the default color table and installs the new one.
You can download custom profiles from the following Web site: www.hp.com/support/clj4700
Document preview image
The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The document preview image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right-side-up. The
Color tab features 223
document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the Paper/Quality, Effects, Finishing,
Output, and Color tabs.
Switching between tabs does not change the location or appearance of the document preview image.
When you move the mouse over the document preview image, the mouse cursor changes from an arrow to a gloved hand. You can toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by clicking on the image.
224 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW
Services tab
To gain access to the Services tab, follow these steps:
1.
click Start.
2.
Select Settings.
3.
Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows
Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).
4.
Right-click the product name.
5.
Click Printing Preferences.
6.
Click the Services tab.
The Services tab is shown in the following figure.
ENWW
Figure 4-21 Services tab
The Internet Services group box contains the Select a destination drop-down menu with the following selections:
● Online diagnostic tools
● Support and troubleshooting
Services tab 225
● Product manuals
● Check for Driver Updates
● Order supplies
If you have Internet access, select any of these items and click Go! to open the corresponding HP Web page.
Click the Device and Supplies status icon to open the Device Status screen of the HP EWS. For more information, see
226 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW
Device Settings
The Device Settings tab is in the Properties window for the print driver. To gain access to the Device
Settings tab, follow these steps:
1.
click Start.
2.
Select Settings.
3.
Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows
Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).
4.
Right-click the product name.
5.
Click Properties.
6.
Click the Device Settings tab.
Available options depend on the feature. The following figure shows the Device Settings tab.
ENWW
Figure 4-22 Device Settings tab
The Device Settings tab contains controls for media-handling devices and controls for managing the
HP Color LaserJet 4700.
Device Settings 227
The Device Settings tab contains the following controls:
● Form to Tray Assignment options
● Font Substitution Table option
● External Fonts option
● Installable Options options
Form to Tray Assignment
A network administrator can use Form to Tray Assignment to specify the media size in each input tray.
The HP Color LaserJet 4700 supports more than one source of media. You can assign a form (which defines the media size and margins) to each media source. When a form is matched to a source, you can select the form when you print. The product prints from the tray to which that form is assigned.
Network administrators can use the Form to Tray Assignment setting to specify, in the driver, the media size that is loaded into each available input tray. The use of forms constrains the choices that are available in the media-size list on the Paper/Quality tab in the Printing Preferences driver tabs.
This constraint prevents (or reduces the likelihood of) tying up the printer with media-mount messages that occur when users request sizes or types that are not available.
The trays listed in the Form to Tray Assignment setting include standard trays and optional accessory trays. Generally, items that are installed separately have a separate Installable Options setting.
The input trays listed here are also listed as media sources on the Paper/Quality tab.
Configuring the trays
1.
Select the appropriate tray in the Form to Tray Assignment list.
2.
Use the drop-down menu to select the media size (or form) that is loaded in that tray.
3.
Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the remaining trays.
4.
Click OK to enable your settings, or, if necessary, click the Cancel button to reconfigure all the trays, and remove the size and type constraints that have been imposed on the Paper/Quality tab.
External Fonts
NOTE The External Fonts option is available only in the HP PCL 6 and PCL unidrivers. It is not available in the PS Emulation Unidriver.
Use the External Fonts option to install and remove external fonts for the product. External fonts can be soft fonts or DIMM fonts.
Clicking the External Fonts option causes the Properties button to appear. Clicking the Properties button opens the HP Font Installer dialog box, which is shown in the following figure.
228 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW
ENWW
Figure 4-23 HP Font Installer dialog box
Installing external fonts
Follow these steps to install external fonts.
1.
Click Start.
2.
Select Settings.
3.
Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and
Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).
4.
Right-click the name of the product.
5.
Click Properties.
6.
Click the Device Settings tab.
7.
Click the External Fonts option. The Properties button appears.
8.
Click the Properties button. The HP Font Installer dialog box appears.
9.
Type the name and path of the font metric file in the Printer Font File Location text box, or click Browse to locate the file on your computer. The font file names appear in the Font(s) to be
Added window.
10.
Select the fonts that you want to add, and then click Add. The fonts are installed and the file names appear in the Installed Font(s) window.
11.
Click OK to close the HP Font Installer dialog box.
Removing external fonts
1.
Click Start.
2.
Select Settings.
Device Settings 229
3.
Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and
Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).
4.
Right-click the name of the product.
5.
Click Properties.
6.
Click the Device Settings tab.
7.
Click the External Fonts option. The Properties button appears.
8.
Click the Properties button. The HP Font Installer dialog box appears. The external fonts that are installed appear in the Installed Fonts window.
9.
Select the fonts that you want to remove, and then click Remove. The fonts are removed.
10.
Click OK to close the HP Font Installer dialog box.
Font Substitution Table
Use the Font Substitution Table settings to install and remove external fonts for the product. External fonts can be soft fonts or DIMM fonts.
Clicking the Font Substitution Table option causes a list of fonts to appear, as show in the following figure. Use the settings to change the TrueType-to-printer font mappings.
Figure 4-24 Font Substitution Table
230 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW
ENWW
PS Emulation Unidriver Device Settings
The following controls are available and appear only in the PS Emulation Unidriver Device Settings tab.
Available PostScript Memory
This control specifies the amount of available postscript memory and provides a spin box for changing this value. The available postscript memory is a subset of the product total physical memory. It is usually best to set the postscript memory to match what is shown on the configuration page. To print a configuration page from the control panel, press the Select button (the one with the check mark) to open the menus. Next, press the up and down buttons to scroll to INFORMATION, and then press the select button. Next, press the up and down buttons to scroll to PRINT CONFIGURATION, and then press the select button.
Output Protocol
This control specifies the protocol that the product uses for print jobs. The following options are available:
● ASCII (default)
● TBCP
● Binary
When you click ASCII, data is sent in ASCII format (7-bit), which might take longer to print but can be sent through any I/O channel, such as a serial, parallel, or network port.
When you click TBCP (Tagged Binary Communications Protocol), all data except special control characters is sent in binary (8-bit) format. The binary formats can be sent over parallel or serial communications ports and are faster than sending data in ASCII format.
When you click Binary, all data except special control characters is sent in binary (8-bit) format. The binary formats can be sent over parallel or serial communications ports and are faster than sending data in ASCII format.
Send Ctrl-D Before Each Job
This control specifies whether the product will be reset at the beginning of every postscript document.
The default setting is No. Pressing Ctrl-D resets the product to its default setting to ensure that previous print jobs do not affect the current print job. Using Ctrl-D might cause a print job to fail if the product is connected through a network. If your document fails to print when sent to a product connected through parallel or serial ports, change No to Yes.
Send Ctrl-D After Each Job
This control specifies whether the product will be reset at the end of every postscript document. The default setting is Yes. Pressing Ctrl-D resets the product to its default setting to ensure that future print jobs are not affected by the current print job. Using Ctrl-D might cause a print job to fail if the product is connected through a network. If your document fails to print when sent to a network printer, change
Yes to No.
Device Settings 231
Job Timeout
This control specifies how long the document can take to get from the computer to the product before the product stops trying to print the document. If you specify 0 seconds, the product continues trying to print indefinitely. The default setting is 0 seconds. You can use the spin box to change this value to a maximum of 32,767 seconds.
Wait Timeout
This control specifies how long the product waits to get more postscript information from the computer.
After the specified time passes, the product stops trying to print the document and prints an error message. If you are trying to print a very complicated document, you might want to increase this value.
If you specify 0 seconds, the product waits indefinitely. The default setting is 300 seconds. You can use the spin box to change this value to a maximum of 32,767 seconds.
Minimum Font Size to Download as Outline
This control specifies the minimum font size (in pixels) for which the driver downloads TrueType fonts as outline (Type 1) fonts. A font smaller than the minimum setting is downloaded as a bitmap (Type 3) font. Use this option to fine-tune the Automatic setting for the TrueType Font Download option on the
Advanced tab in Document Defaults. The default setting is 100 pixels. You can use the spin box to change this value to a maximum of 32,767 pixels.
Maximum Font Size to Download as Outline
This control specifies the maximum font size (in pixels) for which the driver will download TrueType fonts as bitmap (Type 3) fonts. A font larger than the maximum setting will be downloaded as an outline (Type
1) font. Use this option to fine-tune the Automatic setting or override the Send TrueType as Bitmap setting for the TrueType Font Download option on the Advanced tab in Document Defaults. The default setting is 600 pixels. You can use the spin box to change this value to a maximum of 32,767 pixels.
Installable Options
This section provides information to configure the printing options that you can install for the
HP Color LaserJet 4700. The following controls are available:
● Automatic Configuration (Off by default)
● Tray 3
● Tray 4
● Tray 5
● Tray 6
● Accessory Output Bin
● Duplex Unit (for 2-Sided Printing)
● Allow Manual Duplexing
● Accessory Output Bin
● Printer Memory
● Printer Hard Disk
232 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW
ENWW
● Job Storage
● Mopier Mode
● Postscript Passthrough (PS Emulation Unidriver only)
Automatic Configuration
Use the Device Settings tab to tell the driver about the hardware configuration of the product. If bidirectional communication is enabled in a supported environment, set up this tab by selecting the
Update Now setting in the Automatic Configuration setting. The default setting is Off. After an automatic configuration, the setting returns to Off after the changes are made.
If your environment does not support bidirectional communication, the Update Now setting is unavailable, so you must manually configure the options on this tab.
If you have more than one driver installed on your product (for example, the default HP PCL 6 Unidriver and the HP PCL 5 Unidriver), the Update Now feature works automatically only on the driver on which it is activated. The other driver will not be updated, and might show the default setting for your product model.
Tray 3, 4, 5, and 6
This control specifies whether you have trays 3 through 6, additional 500-sheet trays, installed on your product. The default setting is Not Installed.
Accessory Output Bin
This control specifies whether you have any accessory output devices installed on your product. The following are available accessory output devices:
● HP 750-Sheet Stapler/Stacker
Duplex Unit (for 2-Sided Printing)
The HP Color LaserJet 4700dn, the HP Color LaserJet 4700dtn, and the HP Color LaserJet 4700ph+ come with a duplex unit installed. This setting is enabled (Installed) by default.
NOTE These printer models support smart duplexing. The product uses the smart duplexing feature to detect information on both sides of the print job pages and only runs the pages through the duplexing unit if there is printable information on the second side of the page.
Allow Manual Duplexing
Select Allow Manual Duplexing to print on both sides of any size and most types of media (except transparencies, envelopes, and labels). To use this feature, you must reinsert the media stack into the input tray to print the second side. The product pauses while you make this adjustment.
This setting is enabled by default.
Printer Memory
This option matches the setting to the amount of memory that is installed in the product. The driver generates ranges of memory that can be selected, up to the maximum that the product can accept. The driver can use this information to manage how the print driver uses the product memory.
Device Settings 233
Printer Hard Disk
When this option is enabled, the Job Storage option and the Mopier Mode are enabled in the print driver. Use the Job Storage option to store print jobs and then print them later from the control panel.
The multiple-original print (mopy) function is an HP-designed feature that produces multiple, collated copies from a single print job.
Job Storage
When Job Storage is enabled, the product can store print jobs so that you can gain access to those print jobs later at the control panel.
Mopier Mode
The multiple-original print (mopy) function is an HP-designed feature that produces multiple, collated copies from a single print job. Multiple-original printing (mopying) increases performance and reduces network traffic by transmitting the job to the printer once, and then storing it on the printer hard disk. The remainder of the copies are printed at the fastest speed. All documents that are printed in mopier mode can be created, controlled, managed, and finished from the computer, which eliminates the extra step of using a photocopier.
The HP Color LaserJet 4700 supports the transmit-once mopying feature when the Mopier Mode: setting on the Device Settings tab is Enabled.
When you use the HP PCL 6 Unidriver, HP PCL 5 Unidriver, or PS Emulation Unidriver, mopying is performed in one of two ways: either through the software or through the product hardware. When the mopier is enabled, mopying takes place through the product hardware by default. One copy of a multiplepage print job is transmitted once through the network to the product, together with a printer job language
(PJL) command directing the product to make the specified number of copies.
When you disable the mopier, you are not necessarily disabling mopying, which the driver can still perform through the software rather than the product hardware (the mopying path that is disabled when you change the Mopy Mode setting to Disabled). However, a multiple-copy print job that is sent when the mopier is disabled loses the advantage of transmitting the print job once, because the job is sent through the network for each copy.
Mopier mode and collation
Mopying and collating print jobs are independent but closely related functions. Mopying, the ability to send original print jobs to the product, is performed by the print driver. Collating can be controlled by either the print driver or the document software program. The mopying mode is selected by default in the driver, and can be disabled by changing the Mopier Mode setting on the Device Settings tab to
Disabled.
You can control collation through the print driver by selecting or clearing the Collated check box on the
Advanced tab. You can clear the check box, which is available only when the Copy Count option is set to more than 1 copy, to allow the software program to control collation.
To receive uncollated multiple copies of a print job, you must clear the Collated check box and make sure that the software program collation feature is not selected.
The following table shows the relation between mopier mode settings and collation settings in the software program and the driver. The first three columns show the settings; the last column, "Expected result", shows how a 3-page print job would appear.
234 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW
ENWW
Table 4-4 Driver Mopier mode and collation settings
Mopier mode
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Application collation
Not selected
Not selected
Selected
Selected
Not selected
Not selected
Selected
Selected
Driver collation
Not selected
Selected
Not selected
Selected
Not selected
Selected
Not selected
Selected
Expected result
3 copies uncollated
3 copies uncollated
3 copies collated
3 copies collated
3 copies uncollated
3 copies uncollated
3 copies collated
3 copies collated
Postscript Passthrough (PS Emulation Unidriver only)
Postscript Passthrough is enabled by default, and must be enabled for most print jobs. Postscript passthough provides additional capabilities for some software programs when printing to a postscript driver. Options such as Watermarks, n-up and Booklet Printing might not print correctly from some applications with Postscript Passthrough enabled, because such programs send postscript information to the printer that cannot be controlled by the driver. Other programs might print using these options without problems. Select Disabled and print your document again if you encounter problems.
NOTE In some cases, disabling Postscript Passthrough can cause unexpected results within a software program.
Device Settings 235
About tab
The About tab is in the Properties for the print driver. To gain access to the print driver Properties, click Start on the Window task bar, select Settings, and then click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers
and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware
Devices (Windows XP Home). Right-click the product name, and then click Properties.
1.
click Start.
2.
Select Settings.
3.
Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows
Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).
4.
Right-click the product name.
5.
Click Properties.
6.
Click the About tab.
The About tab provides detailed information about the driver. It contains an overall build number (in parentheses after the model name) together with specific information about each of the components.
The information varies according to the HP Color LaserJet 4700 model number, driver, date, and versions. The About tab is shown in the following figure.
Figure 4-25 About tab
236 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW
The About lists driver installation file names and their version numbers. The About tab also indicates whether the driver was autoconfigured, whether administrator preferences were set, the date the driver was last configured, and whether the configuration is default or user-defined.
ENWW About tab 237
238 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW
5 Installing Windows printing-system components
Introduction
The HP Color LaserJet 4700 comes with software and installers for Microsoft Windows and Apple
Computer, Inc. Linux and UNIX systems are supported, and software is available on the Web. For detailed information about operating systems that support printing-system software installation for the
HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer, see Supported operating systems
This chapter provides procedures for installing and removing the HP Color LaserJet 4700 printingsystem software for Windows operating systems. The chapter provides information about these topics:
●
●
●
General installation for Windows 98, Me, 2000, and XP operating systems
●
Installing from the printing-system CD
●
Installing from a network or from downloaded files
●
●
Typical Installation dialog box sequence
●
●
Installing print drivers by using Add Printer
●
Installer Customization Wizard for Windows
●
Point and Print installation for Windows 98, Me, 2000, XP, and Server 2003
●
NOTE If your computer is running a 64-bit Windows operating system, you must install the
ENWW Introduction 239
Font support
The following sections list the fonts that are included with Microsoft Windows software, and the fonts that are available on the CD that came with the product.
Basic fonts
Microsoft Windows software includes these basic fonts, which can be used with any HP printing product:
● Arial
● Courier New Italic
● Times New Roman Italic
● Arial Italic
● Courier New Bold
● Times New Roman Bold
● Arial Bold
● Courier New Bold Italic
● Times New Roman Bold Italic
● Arial Bold Italic
● Symbol
● Wingdings
● Courier New
● Times New Roman
Default fonts
The following default fonts are installed through a Typical Installation of the HP Color LaserJet 4700 printing-system software.
Table 5-1 Default fonts
Font name
Albertus Extra Bold
Albertus Medium
Antique Olive
Antique Olive
Antique Olive
CG Omega
CG Omega
Font style
Regular
Regular
Regular
Bold
Italic
Regular
Bold
File name
ALBR85W.TTF
ALBR55W.TTF
OLVR55W.TTF
OLVR75W.TTF
OLVR56W.TTF
CGOR45W.TTF
CGOR65W.TTF
240 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW
ENWW
Table 5-1 Default fonts (continued)
Font name
CG Omega
CG Omega
CG Times
CG Times
CG Times
CG Times
Clarendon Condensed
Coronet
CourierPS
CourierPS
CourierPS
CourierPS
Garamond
Garamond
Garamond
Garamond
Helvetica®
Helvetica
Helvetica
Helvetica Narrow
Helvetica Narrow
Helvetica Narrow
Helvetica Narrow
Helvetica
ITC Avant Garde Gothic
ITC Avant Garde Gothic
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Demi
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Demi
ITC Bookman Light
ITC Bookman Light
ITC Bookman Demi
ITC Bookman Demi
ITC Zapf Chancery
ITC Zapf Dingbats
Font style
Kursiv Halbfett
Regular
Bold
Bold Oblique
Regular
Bold
Bold Oblique
Oblique
Oblique
Book
Book Oblique
Regular
Oblique
Regular
Bold Italic
Italic
Regular
Bold
Bold Italic
Italic
Bold
Regular
Regular
Bold
Bold Oblique
Oblique
Antiqua
Halbfett
Kursiv
Italic
Regular
Italic
Medium Italic
Regular
File name
GARR66W.TTF
HELR45W.TTF
HELR65W.TTF
HELR66W.TTF
HELR47W.TTF
HELR67W.TTF
HELR68W.TTF
HELR48W.TTF
HELR46W.TTF
AVGR45W.TTF
AVGR46W.TTF
AVGR65W.TTF
AVGR66W.TTF
BOKR35W.TTF
CGOR66W.TTF
CGOR46W.TTF
CGTR45W.TTF
CGTR65W.TTF
CGTR66W.TTF
CGTR46W.TTF
CLAR67W.TTF
CORONET.TTF
CPSR45W.TTF
CPSR65W.TTF
CPSR66W.TTF
CPSR46W.TTF
GARR45W.TTF
GARR65W.TTF
GARR46W.TTF
BOKR36W.TTF
BOKR75W.TTF
BOKR76W.TTF
CHANC___.TTF
DINGS___.TTF
Font support 241
Table 5-1 Default fonts (continued)
Font name
Letter Gothic
Letter Gothic
Letter Gothic
Marigold
New Century Schoolbook
New Century Schoolbook
New Century Schoolbook
New Century Schoolbook
Palatino
Palatino
Palatino
Palatino
SymbolPS
Times*
Times
Times
Times
Univers
Univers
Univers Condensed
Univers Condensed
Univers Condensed
Univers Condensed
Univers
Univers
Font style
Roman
Bold
Bold Italic
Italic
Roman
Regular
Bold
Bold Italic
Regular
Bold
Italic
Regular
Bold
Bold Italic
Italic
Italic
Roman
Bold
Bold Italic
Bold
Bold Italic
Medium
Medium Italic
Medium
Medium Italic
File name
LETR45W.TTF
LETR65W.TTF
LETR46W.TTF
MARIGOLD.TTF
NCSR75W.TTF
NCSR76W.TTF
NCSR56W.TTF
NCSR55W.TTF
PALR65W.TTF
PALR66W.TTF
PALR46W.TTF
PALR45W.TTF
SYMPS__.TTF
TIMR65W.TTF
TIMR66W.TTF
TIMR46W.TTF
TIMR45W.TTF
UNVR65W.TTF
UNVR66W.TTF
UNVR67W.TTF
UNVR68W.TTF
UNVR57W.TTF
UNVR58W.TTF
UNVR55W.TTF
UNVR56W.TTF
Ninety-two additional PS emulation fonts are also available on the CD.
Table 5-2 Additional PS emulation fonts
Font name
Albertus MT
Albertus MT
Albertus MT Lt
Antique Olive CompactPS
Font style
Regular
Italic
Regular
Regular
File name
PS_12639.TTF
PS_12640.TTF
PS_14530.TTF
PS_11120.TTF
242 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW
ENWW
Table 5-2 Additional PS emulation fonts (continued)
Font name
Antique Olive Roman
Antique Olive Roman
Antique Olive Roman
Apple Chancery
Bodoni Poster
Bodoni PosterCompressed
BodoniPS
BodoniPS
BodoniPS
BodoniPS
Candid
Chicago
Clarendon Light
ClarendonPS
ClarendonPS
Cooper Black
Cooper Black
Copperplate32bc
Copperplate33bc
CoronetPS
Eurostile
Eurostile Bold
Eurostile ExtendedTwo
Eurostile ExtendedTwo
Geneva
GillSans
GillSans
GillSans
GillSans Condensed
GillSans Condensed
GillSans ExtraBold
GillSans
GillSans Light
GillSans Light
Font style
Regular
Regular
Regular
Bold
Bold Italic
Regular
Bold
Regular
Regular
Italic
Regular
Regular
Italic
Regular
Regular
Bold
Italic
Italic
Regular
Bold
Bold Italic
Italic
Regular
Regular
Regular
Regular
Bold
Regular
Bold
Italic
Italic
Regular
Regular
Regular
File name
PS_10369.TTF
PS_10370.TTF
PS_14514.TTF
PS_14515.TTF
PS_10249.TTF
PS_10267.TTF
PS_10268.TTF
PS_14512.TTF
PS_14511.TTF
PS_24509.TTF
PS_13872.TTF
PS_13874.TTF
PS_13875.TTF
PS_14053.TTF
PS_14054.TTF
PS_14051.TTF
PS_13873.TTF
PS_13871.TTF
PS_13870.TTF
PS_11119.TTF
PS_11118.TTF
PS_11846.TTF
PS_24516.TTF
PS_12704.TTF
PS_14508.TTF
PS_12581.TTF
PS_12585.TTF
PS_12586.TTF
PS_12582.TTF
PS_24517.TTF
PS_24518.TTF
PS_14513.TTF
PS_10269.TTF
PS_12968.TTF
Font support 243
Table 5-2 Additional PS emulation fonts (continued)
Font name
Joanna MT
Joanna MT
Joanna MT
Letter Gothic
Letter GothicPS
Letter GothicPS
Letter GothicPS
Lubalin Graph
Lubalin Graph
Lubalin Graph
Lubalin Graph
MarigoldPS
Mona Lisa Recut
Monaco
New York
Optima
Optima
Optima
Optima
Goudy
Goudy
Goudy
Goudy ExtraBold
Goudy
Helvetica Condensed
Helvetica Condensed
Helvetica Condensed
Helvetica Condensed
Hoefler Text
Hoefler Text Black
Hoefler Text Black
Hoefler Text
Hoefler Text Ornaments
Joanna MT
Font style
Bold
Bold Italic
Italic
Regular
Regular
Regular
Regular
Regular
Bold
Bold Italic
Italic
Italic
Regular
Bold
Bold Italic
Regular
Bold
Bold Italic
Italic
Bold Italic
Italic
Regular
Regular
Italic
Italic
Regular
Regular
Bold
Bold Italic
Regular
Regular
Italic
Regular
Bold
244 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components
File name
PS_14505.TTF
PS_14506.TTF
PS_14504.TTF
PS_13778.TTF
PS_13777.TTF
PS_13779.TTF
PS_13780.TTF
PS_12675.TTF
PS_12677.TTF
PS_12625.TTF
PS_12623.TTF
PS_94073.TTF
PS_14525.TTF
PS_24524.TTF
PS_24510.TTF
PS_12506.TTF
PS_12510.TTF
PS_12511.TTF
PS_12507.TTF
PS_12544.TTF
PS_10695.TTF
PS_12542.TTF
PS_12545.TTF
PS_12543.TTF
PS_14526.TTF
PS_14528.TTF
PS_14529.TTF
PS_14527.TTF
PS_24519.TTF
PS_24521.TTF
PS_24522.TTF
PS_24520.TTF
PS_24523.TTF
PS_14503.TTF
ENWW
ENWW
Table 5-2 Additional PS emulation fonts (continued)
Font name
Oxford
StempelGaramond Roman
StempelGaramond Roman
StempelGaramond Roman
StempelGaramond Roman
Taffy
Univers 45 Light
Univers 45 Light
Univers 45 Light
Univers 45 Light
Univers 47 CondensedLight
Univers 47 CondensedLight
Univers 55
Univers 55
Univers 57 Condensed
Univers 57 Condensed
Univers ExtendedPS
Univers ExtendedPS
Univers ExtendedPS
Univers ExtendedPS
Font style
Bold
Bold Italic
Italic
Bold
Bold Italic
Regular
Italic
Regular
Italic
Italic
Regular
Bold
Bold Italic
Regular
Regular
Italic
Bold
Regular
Bold Italic
Italic
File name
PS_14072.TTF
PS_11546.TTF
PS_11545.TTF
PS_11547.TTF
PS_11548.TTF
PS_14507.TTF
PS_13501.TTF
PS_14023.TTF
PS_14024.TTF
PS_13502.TTF
PS_14030.TTF
PS_14040.TTF
PS_14021.TTF
PS_14022.TTF
PS_14029.TTF
PS_14039.TTF
PS_13548.TTF
PS_13547.TTF
PS_14481.TTF
PS_14480.TTF
Font support 245
Installation instructions
The following sections provide instructions for installing the printer drivers on various Windows operating systems.
General installation for Windows 98, Me, 2000, and XP operating systems
Installation is similar for the Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000, and Windows XP operating systems. The Windows NT 4.0 operating system does not support the HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer.
NOTE The HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver, the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver, and the
PS Emulation Driver are available on the printing-system software CD. For more information, see the
Installing print drivers by using Add Printer section in this chapter.
If the HP Color LaserJet 4700 is connected through a file or print server, the printing-system software must first be installed on the server before being installed on any client systems. If the HP LaserJet printing-system software is not first installed on the server, then bidirectional communication and some driver autoconfiguration methods are not available to the client systems.
For Windows 2000, and Windows XP, administrator rights on the system are necessary to install the software.
When the HP Color LaserJet 4700 printing-system installer runs, the HP LaserJet uninstaller is always added to the system.
Installing from the printing-system CD
Follow these instructions to install the HP Color LaserJet 4700 printing system from the CD that came with your product.
1.
Close all programs that are open on your computer.
2.
Insert the CD in the CD-ROM drive.
NOTE If your CD does not start automatically, click Start, click Run, and then browse to and double-click the SETUP.EXE file in the root directory of the CD.
3.
Click Install Printer and follow the onscreen prompts.
Installing from a network or from downloaded files
Follow these instructions if you downloaded the files from the Web, or if you are installing the printingsystem files from a network. You might need to see your network administrator for the location of the printing-system software file.
1.
Browse to the location of the SETUP.EXE file.
2.
Double-click the SETUP.EXE file.
3.
Click Install Printer and continue to follow the instructions until the product is installed. For detailed
installation instructions, see Detailed Windows installation
.
246 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW
Detailed Windows installation
This section provides information about the installation dialog box sequence for installing the
HP Color LaserJet 4700 printing-system software in Microsoft Windows environments. You can choose to install the software by using either a Typical Installation or a Custom Installation.
Using the Help, Back, Next, and Cancel buttons
Click the Help button on any screen where it appears to find suggestions and explanations about the installation process.
Click the Back button on any installation dialog box to return to the previous dialog box. The specific dialog box depends on your previous selections.
After you select any options on a given screen, click the Next button to proceed to the next step in the installation sequence.
To exit the installation sequence without installing the product, click the Cancel button in any installation dialog box.
1.
When you click the Cancel button, a dialog box opens that prompts you with this question: “Are you sure you want to cancel the installation?”
Figure 5-1 Are you sure you want to cancel the installation? dialog box
2.
When you click Yes, the Cancel dialog box opens, stating that the setup was interrupted.
ENWW
Figure 5-2 Cancel dialog box
3.
Click the Finish button closes the installation screens.
Installation instructions 247
The result of clicking these buttons is explained in context in the following sections.
Modifying a pre-existing installation
If an HP Color LaserJet 4700 has been installed previously on your system, the appearance of the main install screen changes on the CD Browser, and the install printer setting changes to modify installation.
A pre-existing installation also changes the sequence of installation screens that are presented, depending on the selections you make.
Typical Installation dialog box sequence
NOTE The dialog boxes shown in this chapter appear in the Windows XP Professional installation sequence. The order and appearance of dialog boxes can vary among operating systems.
The Typical Installation includes the following components:
● HP Color LaserJet 4700 PCL 6 driver
● Screen Fonts
● Install Notes
● User Guide
The first screen to appear after you initiate the installation process from the CD Browser is the Choose
Setup Language dialog box.
Figure 5-3 Choose Setup Language dialog box
When you select the Install Printer option from the HP Color LaserJet 4700 printing-system software
CD, the Choose Setup Language dialog box appears.
NOTE The Choose Setup Language dialog box lists only the languages that are available on the HP Color LaserJet 4700 printing-system software CD.
The installer automatically detects the language that your computer system uses and presents this selection as the default.
You can select another language that is available on the CD by clicking the down arrow in the dropdown menu.
Click OK to initiate the printing-system setup. The Preparing to Install dialog box appears.
248 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW
Figure 5-4 Preparing to Install dialog box
NOTE If you try using the regular install method in a Windows NT 4.0 operating environment, the following screen appears.
ENWW
Figure 5-5 Please use the Add Printer Wizard
Windows NT 4.0 does not support the HP Color LaserJet 4700 print drivers, but you can download other drivers from the Web. Use print drivers for legacy HP products whose feature sets closely matches the feature set of the HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer. For instance, you can use the HP Color LaserJet 4650 drivers.
NOTE The HP Color LaserJet 4700 Printing System Install Notes mentioned in this dialog box are available on the printing-system software CD in <root>\Manuals\CLJ4700_installnote_enww.htm
section.
Click OK to continue the installation. If you are not trying to install the product on Windows NT 4.0, the
Welcome to the HP Color LaserJet 4700 Setup Wizard dialog box appears, as shown in the following figure.
Installation instructions 249
Figure 5-6 Welcome to the HP Color LaserJet 4700 Setup Wizard dialog box
Click Installation Notes (on the Welcome to the HP Color LaserJet 4700 Setup Wizard dialog box) to open the file CLJ4700_INSTALL-NOTE_XXWW.HTM (where XX indicates the language; for example, the English file is named CLJ4700_INSTALL-NOTE_ENWW.HTM).
Click Software License Agreement to open the HP Software License Agreement dialog box, as shown in the following figure.
250 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW
Figure 5-7 HP Software License Agreement dialog box
Click OK to return to the Welcome dialog box and then click Next to continue the installation. The
Printer Connection dialog box opens, as shown in the following figure.
ENWW
Figure 5-8 Printer Connection dialog box
Installation instructions 251
NOTE The HP Color LaserJet 4700 does not support infrared connections.
If you select Connected directly to this computer (a "direct connection" using a parallel cable or USB
2.0 cable), and then click Next, the Connector Type dialog box opens. This is the default option.
NOTE Select the Connected directly to this computer option if a network port has already been created for your product (which could occur, for instance, if the product has been previously installed); the installer treats this port as if it is a local direct connection.
The Connector Type dialog box is shown in the following figure.
Figure 5-9 Connector Type dialog box
NOTE The printing-system software should be installed before the HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer is connected to the computer through a parallel or USB connection and turned on. During the installation process, you will be prompted by the software to connect the device during installation.
Select any option and click Next to open the Installation Type dialog box. To continue with the default installation sequence, see
Figure 5-22 Installation Type dialog box .
If you are installing the HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer over the network, select Connected via the
network in the Printer Connection dialog box.
For a network installation, the HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer must be connected to the network and turned on before the printing-system software is installed so that the software can detect the printer.
Click Next to continue. The Searching dialog box opens, as shown in the following figure.
252 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW
ENWW
Figure 5-10 Searching dialog box
NOTE If you are installing the product over a network, you must let the search complete for the first subnet in the network in order to find all available printers. After the first subnet is scanned for available HP Color LaserJet 4700 printers, the results are displayed in the Printers Found dialog box. However, the installer continues to search the network for additional printers after the first results are displayed. The results of searching the first subnet usually takes place within about 20 seconds. It may take some time before the other subnets are searched and the full list of printers is displayed in the Printers Found dialog box, depending on the configuration of the network.
If you click Stop, the process is interrupted and you are prompted to search again. The search must be completed in order to continue the installation.
If your network has a firewall that is blocking the installation, the Notice about Firewalls dialog box appears, as shown in the following figure.
Installation instructions 253
Figure 5-11 Notice about Firewalls dialog box
If you are performing a network installation and no printer is found, the Printer Not Found dialog box appears, as shown in the following figure.
254 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW
ENWW
Figure 5-12 Printer Not Found dialog box
The product might not be connected to the network. Ensure that the printer is connected and is turned on. If a firewall is blocking the installation and you want the installer to open a port through the firewall, click Next.
The Searching dialog box appears (see
Figure 5-10 Searching dialog box ).
If a printer is found, the Printers Found dialog box appears, with a list of matching products that have been found on the network. The Printer Found dialog box is shown in the following figure.
Installation instructions 255
Figure 5-13 Printers Found dialog box
5-14 Confirm Settings dialog box
.
If the printer you want to install is not listed and you know its TCP/IP address, click Next. The Confirm
changing the TCP/IP address.
If a single printer is found when the installer conducts its search, the Printer Found dialog box appears, as shown in the following figure.
256 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW
If you click No, install a different printer and then click Next, the Check Cable Connection dialog box opens, advising you to make sure the cable is properly connected, and giving you the option of
If you select Yes, install this printer and then click Next, the Confirm Settings dialog box opens, as shown in the following figure.
ENWW
Figure 5-14 Confirm Settings dialog box
Click Next to continue the installation. The Installation Type dialog box opens (see Figure 5-22
Installation Type dialog box ).
Installation instructions 257
If you click the Change TCP/IP Settings button, the Confirm Change Setting dialog box opens, as shown in the following figure.
WARNING!
When you change the TCP/IP configuration by using the Change TCP/IP
Settings button, you change the actual settings in the product Jetdirect card. You should make changes to these settings only with the advice of your network administrator.
Figure 5-15 Confirm Changing Setting dialog box
).
The Check Cable Connection dialog box is shown in the following figure.
258 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW
Figure 5-16 Check Cable Connection dialog box
If you select Search again and then click Next, the Searching dialog box opens (see
).
If you click Specify Printer by address and then click Next, the Specify Printer dialog box opens.
If you select Enter settings for a printer not on the network and then click Next, the Printer
Settings dialog box opens (see
Figure 5-18 Printer Settings dialog box ).
The Specify Printer dialog box is shown in the following figure.
ENWW
Figure 5-17 Specify Printer dialog box
Installation instructions 259
You can specify a printer by selecting one of the following options and typing in the required information:
● Hardware Address (MAC)
● IP Address
● IP Hostname
If you click Help, a context-sensitive HTML help screen opens.
When you click Next, the Searching dialog box opens. When the search is finished, the Printer
Found dialog box opens (see
Figure 5-13 Printers Found dialog box ).
If you selected Specify a printer not on the network on the Check Cable Connection dialog box and then click Next, the Printer Settings dialog box opens, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 5-18 Printer Settings dialog box
Select Hardware Address, type the product hardware address in the field, and click Next to continue the installation. The Set Port Name dialog box opens.
Select IP Address, type the product IP address in the field, and click Next to continue the installation.
The Set Port Name dialog box opens, as shown in the following figure.
260 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW
Figure 5-19 Set Port Name dialog box
Type a port name in the Port Name field and click Next to open the Installation Type dialog box (see
Figure 5-22 Installation Type dialog box ).
If you selected Yes, install this printer on the Printer Found dialog box, the Confirm Settings dialog box opens, as shown in the following figure.
ENWW
Figure 5-20 Confirm Settings dialog box
If you click Change TCP/IP Settings, the Confirm Changing Setting dialog box opens (see
5-15 Confirm Changing Setting dialog box )
Installation instructions 261
Click Next to proceed with the installation. The Installation Type dialog box opens (see Figure 5-22
).
NOTE
If you selected Yes on the Confirm Changing Setting dialog box (see Figure 5-20
Confirm Settings dialog box ), the Set Network Protocol dialog box opens, as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 5-21 Set Network Protocol dialog box
If you click Change Settings... the text boxes become active and the text in the Change Settings... button changes to Suggest Settings.... Type a different IP Address, Subnet Mask, or Gateway address
If you clear the Use Default Port Name check box and click Next, the Set Port Name dialog box opens
(see
Figure 5-19 Set Port Name dialog box ).
When you click Next on the Set Network Protocol dialog box, the Installation Type dialog box opens, as shown in the following figure.
262 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW
ENWW
Figure 5-22 Installation Type dialog box
NOTE The components of a Typical Installation might vary from product to product.
If you select Typical Installation (Recommended) and then click Next, the Printer Name dialog box opens.
Select Minimum Installation to install only the HP PCL 6 Unidriver (Windows 2000, Windows XP, and
Windows Server 2003) or the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver (Windows 98 and Windows Me) and screen fonts. If you select Minimum Installation and then click Next, the Printer Name dialog box opens (see
Figure 5-38 Printer Name dialog box ).
If you select Custom Installation and then click Next, the Features dialog box opens, as shown in the following figure.
Installation instructions 263
Figure 5-23 Features dialog box
A red X in the icon indicates that the feature is not installed. The installed icon appears when you select an install state for that feature.
Click Space to open the Disk Space Requirements dialog box, which shows the amount of available space on your hard drive and advises you if there is not enough space for the features you have selected.
Click Next to proceed with the installation. The Printer Name dialog box opens.
Figure 5-24 Printer Name dialog box
264 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW
Select the Use this printer as the default printer for Windows-based programs check box to set the
HP Color LaserJet 4700 as your default printer. Clear this check box if you do not want the
HP Color LaserJet 4700 to be your default printer.
Click Next to proceed with the installation. The Printer Sharing dialog box opens.
ENWW
Figure 5-25 Printer Sharing dialog box
NOTE The Printer Sharing dialog box does not appear if your computer is running Windows 98 or Windows Me.
If you select Not shared and then click Next, the Ready to Install dialog box opens (see Figure 5-26
NOTE When you do not share the printer, additional driver support is not available. If you share the printer on Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 operating systems by selecting Share as:, you must type a name. You can also provide additional print driver support for other operating systems.
If you select Share as:, the text box becomes available. Type the share name and then click Next. The
Ready to Install dialog box opens.
NOTE The share name should not exceed seven characters (not twelve, as indicated in the
Printer Sharing screen).
Installation instructions 265
Figure 5-26 Ready to Install dialog box
Clicking Install starts the installation process.
While the installation is in progress, the Installing dialog box appears. The information in the Status field changes to report on different stages of the installation process.
Figure 5-27 Installing dialog box
When installation is complete, the Finish dialog box appears, as shown in the following figure.
266 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW
ENWW
Figure 5-28 Finish dialog box
Custom Installation
The Custom Installation gives you the option of installing the following components:
● HP Color LaserJet 4700 PCL 6 Driver (for direct-connect and network installations)
● HP Color LaserJet 4700 PCL 5c Driver (for direct-connect and network installations)
● HP Color LaserJet 4700 PS Driver (for direct-connect and network installations)
● Screen Fonts
● Install Notes
● User Guide
Installation instructions 267
Figure 5-29 Features dialog box, Custom Installation
NOTE The features available in a Custom Installation might vary from product to product.
The appearance of the Features dialog box might vary, depending on the product and the connection type.
Installing print drivers by using Add Printer
Use the following steps to install the print drivers by using the Add Printer feature of Windows:
1.
Insert the CD in the CD-ROM drive.
2.
Go to the Add a printer feature in Windows.
In Windows XP, click Start on the desktop, click Settings, and then click Printers and Faxes. The
Printers and Faxes window appears. Click Add a printer. The Add a printer wizard screen appears. In Windows NT 4.0, Windows 98, Windows Me, and Windows 2000, click Start on the desktop, click Settings, click Printers, and then click Add a printer. The Add a printer wizard screen appears.
3.
Use the Add a printer wizard to find and connect to the printer. The print drivers are loaded as a part of this process.
If your computer is running a 64-bit Windows operating system, you must install the corresponding 64bit print driver. 64-bit print drivers are included on the software CD-ROM. Use the following steps to install a print driver by using the Add Printer feature.
1.
Insert the CD in the CD-ROM drive.
2.
Click Start on the desktop, click Settings, click Printers and Faxes, and then click Add a
printer. The Add a printer wizard screen appears.
268 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW
ENWW
3.
Use the Add a printer wizard to find and connect to the product. The print drivers are loaded as a part of this process.
4.
Select the Have disk option and navigate to one of the following files on the software CD:
To install the HP PCL 6 Unidriver, select \<language>\Drivers\(your operating system)\PCL6
\hpc90xmd.inf
To install the HP PCL 5 Unidriver, select \<language>\Drivers\(your operating system)\PCL5
\hpc90xmd.inf
To install the PS Emulation Unidriver, select \<language>\Drivers\(your operating system)\PS
\hpc90xmd.inf
5.
Complete the wizard steps. The print driver will be installed as part of the wizard process.
Installer Customization Wizard for Windows
Administrators can use the Installer Customization Wizard option to customize the
HP Color LaserJet 4700 installer by pre-setting the installation options in a response file. To start the utility, click installer customization wizard on the main menu of the software CD browser. Using this option, administrators can create a silent (unattended) installer that is customized with any of the following selections:
● Language
● Operating system
● Print drivers
● Components
NOTE For detailed information about the Installer Customization Wizard, see the HP Device
Installer Customization Wizard. This document (CUSTOMIZATION_README_ENWW.RTF) is available on the printing-system software CD in the Manuals\<language> folder.
Running the Installer Customization Wizard
Running the Installer Customization Wizard produces one installation package and a response file
(RESPONSE.INI) for a single system installation. The installation package might work for multiple systems that have the same response information, or the RESPONSE.INI file can be edited for system configuration differences directly in the RESPONSE.INI file. The Installer HP Device Installer
Customization Wizard, available on the printing-system software CD in the Manuals\<language> folder, provides the exact text for replacing entries in the RESPONSE.INI file.
To run the Installer Customization Wizard
1.
Insert the HP Color LaserJet 4700 software CD in the CD-ROM drive.
2.
In the CD browser main screen, click installer customization wizard.
3.
Choose the setup language you want. The installer automatically detects the language that your computer system uses and presents this selection as the default. Click OK to continue.
Installation instructions 269
You can select another language that is available on the CD by clicking the down arrow in the dropdown menu.
The Installer Customization Wizard starts automatically. To complete the installation, follow the instructions in the dialog boxes, as described in the following section.
Dialogs
The Installer Customization Wizard runs from the CD. It can be started from the CD browser, depending on product-specific instantiation. It runs separately from MSI with its own interface.
The Choose Setup Language dialog box and the Preparing to Install dialog box appear the same as they appear in the standard installer. After these dialog boxes, the Installer Customization Wizard
Welcome dialog box appears.
Figure 5-30 Installer Customization Wizard Welcome dialog box
Back, Next, and Cancel buttons .)
Click Next to open the Language dialog box.
270 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW
ENWW
Figure 5-31 Language dialog box
NOTE The customized installer limits all system installations of the product to the language that is selected in the Language dialog box. Maintenance mode on systems where installation has been completed using the customized installer does not provide options for changing the language. To change the language on a system that used an Installer Customization Wizard installation, the customized installation must be uninstalled, and a new product must be installed to restore the option to install other languages.
The language that you selected is installed on users' computers regardless of the language of the text in the dialog boxes (as specified in the Choose a language dialog box earlier). The Language dialog box defaults to the language that was selected in the Choose a language dialog box, but any language that is available on the CD can be chosen for the customized installer. The language selection is recorded in the response file.
Click Next to open the Printer Port dialog box, as shown in the following figure.
Click Back on this or any screen where it appears to return to a previous screen.
Installation instructions 271
Figure 5-32 Printer Port dialog box
Select Queue Name\Path to make the text field available for a queue name entry. If you select Queue
Name\Path and click the Browse button, the Browse for Printer dialog box opens.
Figure 5-33 Browse for Printer dialog box
Navigate to a printer and click OK to record the path in the Queue Name\Path field on the Printer Port dialog box. Click Cancel to close the Browse for Printer dialog box.
Select Local Port and then click Next to open the Connector Type dialog box. The Connector Type dialog box includes all types of local ports regardless of local support. It also includes all custom network ports that are available on the local system. To use any custom network port for the customized installer, the port must be created identically on the system where it will be used.
Click New TCP/IP Port and then click Next to open the Specify Printer dialog box.
272 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW
ENWW
Figure 5-34 Specify Printer dialog box
Click IP Address: to make the field available for typing the IP address for the printer. Only numerals are allowed in this field. If this option is selected, you must type at least one digit in the IP Address: field to prevent an error message from appearing and prompting you for a valid IP address.
Click IP Hostname: to make the field available for typing the IP hostname for the printer. Any characters are allowed in this field, but an error message appears if spaces are included in the field. If this option is selected, you must type at least one character in the IP Hostname field to prevent an error message from appearing and prompting you for a valid IP hostname.
Click Hardware Address: to make the field available for typing the hardware address of the printer. It accepts any characters but limits the entry to 12 characters. If this option is selected, you must type at least one character in the Hardware Address: field to prevent an error message from appearing, prompting you for a valid hardware address.
After you select any the options, type the appropriate name or address, and then click Next, the
Features dialog box opens, as shown in the following figure.
Installation instructions 273
Figure 5-35 Features dialog box
Any combination of features can be selected for the installer, and none depends on any other selection.
It is possible to create a custom installer that installs features without including a print driver.
Figure 5-36 Driver Configuration dialog box
It is possible to supply a preconfigured driver in the customized installer if the driver supports it. You can use the preconfigured driver to place default settings on the printer that is installed. If a driver that supports this feature is selected in the Features dialog box, the Driver Configuration dialog box appears when you click Next on the Features dialog box.
274 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW
Click Yes, allow me to configure the drivers and then click Next to open a list of all printing preferences and device options for the product.
Click No, I don't want to configure the drivers and then click Next to open the Printer Name dialog box (see
Figure 5-38 Printer Name dialog box
).
ENWW
Figure 5-37 Driver Configuration preconfigure driver dialog box
Click the Printing Preferences tab and use the scroll bar to see the printing-preference settings that can be preconfigured. Some of the printing-preference settings can be locked to prevent users at client machines from changing them. If a setting can be locked, a Lock check box appears beside the option when you select it. The Lock check box is clear by default; select it to limit users to that selection only.
For more information, see
.
Click the Device Settings tab and use the scroll bar to see the Device Settings tab that can be preconfigured.
Any setting in this dialog box, including those on the Device Settings tab, can be preset before the printer is installed (subject to normal driver constraints).
Click Next to open either the Preconfigure Printer dialog box for another driver that supports preconfiguration (if any), or the Printer Name dialog box.
Installation instructions 275
Figure 5-38 Printer Name dialog box
The Default Printer: drop-down menu lists only those drivers that are selected in the Features dialog box.
Click Next to open the Printer Sharing dialog box, which is shown in the following figure.
Figure 5-39 Printer Sharing dialog box
Click Share as: to open the field where you can type a name for the product as it will appear on the network.
276 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW
ENWW
If you click Next with Not Shared selected, the Printer Location and Comment dialog box opens (see
Figure 5-41 Printer Location and Comment dialog box ).
Click Share as: and then click Next to open the Client Driver Support dialog box, which is shown in the following figure.
Figure 5-40 Client Driver Support dialog box
NOTE This dialog box provides options for selecting operating system-specific drivers to provide for Point and Print driver vending on the system. Either or both optional drivers can be selected.
Click Next to open the Printer Location and Comment dialog box, which is shown in the following figure.
Installation instructions 277
Figure 5-41 Printer Location and Comment dialog box
Use the Location: text field to type a description of the physical location of the printer. The field is limited to 241 characters.
Use the Comment: text field to type any other helpful text such as capabilities about the printer. The field is limited to 241 characters.
Click Next to open the Custom Installer Location dialog box, which is shown in the following figure.
Figure 5-42 Custom Installer Location dialog box
278 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW
NOTE The location for the installer package defaults to the drive that the system user opened last.
Click the Change button to open the Change Current Destination Folder dialog box, where you can navigate to the drive that you want.
Click Install after you have specified a location (or browsed to a location) to open the Installing dialog
box and start the file-copy process (see Figure 5-44 Installing dialog box ).
ENWW
Figure 5-43 Change Current Destination Folder dialog box
NOTE During installation, several files, including system files, are placed at the root of the directory that appears in the Folder Name field. These files collectively occupy approximately
37 MB on the directory. Be sure that enough space is available on the directory before continuing.
Click the New Folder icon to create a new folder, or click the Up one folder icon to browse to a preexisting folder.
After you select a location, click OK to return to the Custom Installer Location dialog box. The location appears in the Folder name field.
Click OK to begin the process of copying and installing the printing-system software folders and files.
The Installing dialog box is shown in the following figure.
Installation instructions 279
Figure 5-44 Installing dialog box
This dialog box remains on the screen until the status bar fills.
Click Cancel to close the Installer Customization Wizard without installing the printing-system software.
At a certain point, the Cancel button disappears and the process cannot be revoked.
When the installation is complete, the Finish dialog box appears, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 5-45 Finish dialog box
Click the Finish button to close the Finish dialog box and exit the Installer Customization Wizard.
NOTE Depending on the type of installation and selected options, you might or might not be presented with some additional steps after you click Finish.
280 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW
ENWW
Distribution
The installation package is now ready for distribution. It is the same as the package on the CD, except that it is limited to one language, and it contains the features and options that you selected. The installation package is run silently so that it requires no user interaction. This installation method is useful when you want to use the default selections that the installer provides or when you want to run the installation without being prompted.
You can perform the silent installation in two ways:
● Customized silent installer
● Command-line silent installer
The response file can be renamed, but it must be in the root directory of the installer package. The name cannot contain spaces; spaces prevent the SETUP.EXE file from passing to the installer package.
The end-user cannot customize the command-line silent installer. It installs only the printing-system components that are included in the Typical Installation. For more information, see the HP Device
Installer Customization Wizard. This document (CUSTOMIZATION_README_XXWW.RTF) is available on the printing-system software CD at the root of the <language> folder.
Point and Print installation for Windows 98, Me, 2000, XP, and Server 2003
The following information helps you install a print driver by using the Microsoft Point and Print function when you cannot see the product on the network.
Point and Print is a Microsoft term that describes a two-step driver installation process. The first step is to install a shared driver on a network print server. The second step is to "point" to the print server from a network client so that the client can use the print driver.
This section outlines the procedures for installing print drivers by using Point and Print. If these procedures are not successful, contact Microsoft.
Hewlett-Packard provides drivers that are compatible with the Point and Print feature, but this is a function of the Microsoft operating systems, not of HP print drivers. Windows 2000, Windows XP, and
Windows Server 2003 drivers from HP are supported only on Intel X86 processor types.
To install the print driver on a Windows 2000,Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 operating system, you must have administrator privileges. To completely install the Windows 2000 print driver on the
Windows 2000 server, you must have administrator privileges on the server. The Windows 2000
Printer .INF file must contain the same product name as the Windows 98 or Windows Me printer .INF
file.
Point and Print installation of a postscript driver is supported only with a Microsoft Windows 98 or
Windows Me PS Driver V4.0 or later.
In a homogenous operating system environment (one in which all of the clients and servers running the same operating system), the same print driver version that is vended from the server to the clients in a
Point and Print environment also runs and controls the print queue configuration on the server.
However, in a mixed operating system environment (one in which servers and clients might run on different operating systems), conflicts can occur when client computers run a version of the print driver that is different from the one on the print server.
In an effort to increase operating system stability, Microsoft determined that, starting with Windows 2000 and continuing with all future operating systems, print drivers would run as user-mode processes. Usermode drivers run in a protected part of the operating system, as do all of the normal end-user processes
Installation instructions 281
and software programs. A user-mode print driver that functions incorrectly can terminate (or “crash”) only the process in which it is running, — not the whole operating system. Because access to critical system resources is restricted, overall operating system stability is increased.
[INTERNAL] For more information, see the information about print-server operating-system migration at : www.techweb.boi.hp.com
Setting a default printer
This section applies to the Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and
Windows Server 2003 operating systems.
1.
In Windows 98, Windows Me, and Windows 2000 operating systems, click Start, click Settings, and then click Printers. In Windows XP and Windows Server 2003, click Start, click Control
Panel, click Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional) or Printers and other hardware
devices (Windows XP Home).
2.
Right-click the product that you want to set as the default printer.
3.
Click Set As Default. A check mark appears next to the menu option.
282 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW
6 Installation for Macintosh operating systems
Introduction
The HP Color LaserJet 4700 comes with software and installers for Microsoft Windows and Apple
Computer, Inc. Linux and UNIX systems are supported, and software is available on the Web. For detailed information about operating systems that support printing-system software installation for the
HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer, see Supported operating systems
This chapter provides procedures for installing and removing the HP Color LaserJet 4700 printingsystem software for Macintosh operating systems. The chapter provides information about these topics:
●
Macintosh component descriptions
●
Installing the Macintosh printing system
●
Uninstalling the Macintosh printing system
●
●
●
ENWW Introduction 283
Macintosh component descriptions
The product includes the following software for Macintosh computers:
● PPDs for Mac OS 9 V9.2.2 and Mac OS X V10.1.5 and later
● PDEs for Mac OS X only (V10.1.5 and later)
HP LaserJet PPDs
In Mac OS 9 V9.2.2, postscript printer definition (PPD) files for the HP Color LaserJet 4700 are installed to the Printer Descriptions folder, which is in the Extensions folder within the System folder. In
Mac OS X V10.1.5 or later, the PPDs are installed in Library/Printers/PPDs/Contents/
Resources:<lang>.lproj, where <lang> is the appropriate localized folder.
PPDs, in combination with the driver, provide access to the product features and allow the computer to communicate with the product. A print setup tool for the PPDs is provided on the printing-system software CD. For information about the print setup tools in various Macintosh operating systems, see
Table 6-1 Adding a printer in Macintosh operating systems
.
PDEs
Printer Dialog Extensions (PDEs) are code plug-ins (for Mac OS X V10.1.5 or later only) that provide access to product features, such as number of copies, duplexing, and quality settings.
HP Embedded Web Server
Mac OS 9 V9.2.2 supports the HP EWS. Use the HP LaserJet Utility to control features that are not available in the driver. Use the HP EWS to perform the following tasks:
● Name the product, assign it to a zone on the network, and change product settings.
● Set a password for the product.
● From the computer, lock out functions on the control panel to prevent unauthorized access (see the printing software help).
Install notes
This text file contains important information about product features, instructions for installing the printingsystem software, and technical assistance.
Online help
This HTML-based help system replaces the Apple Guide help system that was provided with
Mac OS 9.x HP products. The help system is in English only, and can be viewed through a browser or in the Macintosh OS Help Center.
Screen fonts
The printing-system software for Macintosh operating systems no longer includes a font installer. The
HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer uses previously installed system fonts when installed on a Macintosh computer.
284 Chapter 6 Installation for Macintosh operating systems ENWW
Installing the Macintosh printing system
On a Macintosh computer, the installation procedures are the same for a network administrator, a network client, and a single user. Install the software on any computer that has access rights to the printer.
NOTE If the computer is connected to the printer by a LocalTalk (printer port) or EtherTalk connection, you must configure the AppleTalk (or network) control panel for the correct connection to communicate with the product. You must set up the HP Color LaserJet 4700, connect it to the computer or network, and turn it on before the software is installed. Macintosh operating systems do not support parallel connections.
The Macintosh partition contains an installer program for each language. Find the appropriate language for the operating system that is being used, and then use the installer program for that language.
NOTE Detailed installation steps can be found in
or
Installing the HP LaserJet printing-system software for the
Macintosh OS
1.
Insert the Macintosh printing-system software CD into the CD-ROM drive.
NOTE If the CD screen does not open automatically, double-click the hp color LaserJet
4700 CD-ROM icon on the desktop to open the CD-ROM window.
2.
Double-click the icon for your OS. For instance, if you are installing the printer in any version of
Mac OS X, double-click the Mac OS X icon. If you are installing the printer in Mac Classic or any version of Mac OS 9, click the Mac OS 9 icon.
NOTE The Continue button appears only after you type the "admin" password in the
Authenticate dialog box (Mac OS X, V10.1.5 and later only).
3.
The main Installer dialog box appears. Click Install and then follow the onscreen instructions to complete the software installation.
NOTE If you are installing the printing-system software on a Macintosh OS X system, please be patient. The installer must perform an initial search of the computer for up to 1 minute. During this time the installer might appear to be stalled.
4.
When software installation is complete, click Quit. Select one of the following options to finish setting up your product:
● Set up an AppleTalk networked printer with Mac OS 9 V9.2.2.
● Set up a printer with Mac OS X
The software program that you use to finish setting up the printer varies by operating system. The following table shows the print setup tools that are available.
ENWW Installing the Macintosh printing system 285
Table 6-1 Adding a printer in Macintosh operating systems
Operating System
Mac OS 9 V9.2.2
Mac OS X V10.1.5
Mac OS X V10.2.8
Mac OS X V10.3.9
Mac OS X V10.4.1
HP LaserJet Utility x
LaserWriter 8 x
Print Center x x x
Printer Setup Utility x x
Setting up an AppleTalk networked printer with Mac OS 9. V9.2.2
1.
Open the Chooser from within the Apple Menu.
2.
3.
Click the appropriate Zone to select it, if required.
4.
Click your product name from the list that appears on the right side of the Chooser dialog box, and then click Create. For the HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer, the selection is HP Color LaserJet
470014.
286 Chapter 6 Installation for Macintosh operating systems ENWW
Setting up a printer with Mac OS X V10.4
1.
In the Applications folder, open the Utilities Folder, and then run the Printer Browser.
Figure 6-1 Printer Browser screen
ENWW Installing the Macintosh printing system 287
2.
Select the product and click Add. The Installable Options screen appears.
Figure 6-2 Installable Options screen
288 Chapter 6 Installation for Macintosh operating systems ENWW
3.
In the Installable Options screen, use the drop-down menus to match the options on the product and then click Continue.
Figure 6-3 Printer Browser screen — connection type
ENWW Installing the Macintosh printing system 289
4.
In the Printer Browser screen, select the appropriate connection type and click Add. The product name appears in the Printer List.
Figure 6-4 Printer List screen
5.
Click the product name to open the Select Printer screen and verify that the product has been installed.
Figure 6-5 Select Printer screen
Setting up a printer with Mac OS X V10.3
1.
In the Applications folder, open the Utilities folder, and then run the Printer Setup Utility.
2.
Click Add Printer (in Mac OS X V10.1), or click Add (Mac OS X V10.2), or click Printers and then click Add Printer (Mac OS X V10.2.8 or later).
3.
When the New Printer drivers detected popup box appears, click OK.
290 Chapter 6 Installation for Macintosh operating systems ENWW
ENWW
4.
From the top pop-up menu, select the appropriate connection type for your product.
5.
Select or type in any other information as indicated for the type of connection for your product. For example, if you are using an AppleTalk connection, select your product zone; or if you are using
IP Printing, type an IP address in the Printer Address field. In the Printer Model drop-down menu, select HP. In the Model Name drop-down menu, select HP Color LaserJet 4700.
NOTE If the automatic selection fails, or if you want to manually select a .PPD file, click the Printer Model pop-up menu, select HP, and then select the .PPD file you want to add.
6.
Click Add. The HP Color LaserJet 4700 appears in the Printer List.
7.
To configure installable options in Mac OS X V10.2 and later, such as a duplexing unit or optional paper trays, click Show Info? and select Installable Options in the drop-down menu.
NOTE This step is necessary only for network connections and USB connections using
Rendezvous/Bonjour. AppleTalk automatically configures the installable options.
8.
Configure the options, click Apply Changes, and then close the Printer List dialog box.
Setting up an IP/LPR networked Printer with Mac OS 9.x
1.
Run the Apple Desktop Printer utility.
2.
Click Printer (LPR), and then click OK.
3.
Click Change in the LPR Printer Selection area.
4.
Click the appropriate IP address and Queue, and then click OK.
5.
Click Change and scroll through the list of products.
6.
Click the correct product, and then click Select.
7.
Click Create.
Installing the Macintosh printing system 291
Uninstalling the Macintosh printing system
To uninstall the Macintosh Printing System, drag the PPDs and the unwanted component(s) to Trash.
292 Chapter 6 Installation for Macintosh operating systems ENWW
In-box disk layout
The Macintosh Printing System consists of three files: the HP LaserJet Installer—Integrated installer program for Mac OS X and for Mac OS 9, and a PDF folder for manuals. The folders are named as follows:
● Mac OS X
● Mac OS 9
ENWW In-box disk layout 293
Mac OS Classic installation
This section provides information about the various installation dialog box sequences for the Mac OS
Classic.
Main Install dialog box sequence
This subsection provides information about the Macintosh installation dialog box sequence for the Easy
Install (the Typical Installation option).
A Custom Installation is not available in Mac OS 9 for the HP Color LaserJet 4700.
Figure 6-6 HP LaserJet for Macintosh installer startup screen dialog box
Click Continue to open the HP LaserJet Installer dialog box.
Figure 6-7 HP LaserJet Installer dialog box (easy install)
If you want to install the files in a location other than the default "Macintosh HD," click Install
Location: to specify a location.
Click Install to start the installation on the selected disk.
Click Quit to quit the Installer without making changes to the system.
294 Chapter 6 Installation for Macintosh operating systems ENWW
Figure 6-8 Installing dialog box
This dialog box shows installation progress. No action is required unless you want to stop the installation.
Click Stop to interrupt the install file copy process.
Figure 6-9 Installation was successful dialog box
Click Quit to exit the Installer. The Printer Setup Assistant opens.
Click Continue to return to the HP LaserJet Installer.
The Mac OS 9 Readme opens. Follow these instructions to continue setting up the printer.
ENWW Mac OS Classic installation 295
Mac OS X installation
This section provides information about the various installation dialog box sequences for the Mac OS
X operating system.
Main Install dialog box sequence
This section provides information about the Macintosh installation dialog box sequence for the Easy
Install (the Typical Installation option).
If the CD screen does not open automatically when the CD is put into the CD-ROM drive, double-click the hp LaserJet 4700 CD-ROM icon on the desktop to open the installer folder.
Figure 6-10 CD-ROM HP Color LaserJet 4700 installer icon
The hp LaserJet Software dialog box opens.
In the hp LaserJet 4700 folder, double-click the Mac OS X folder to open it.
In the Mac OS X folder, double-click the HP Color LaserJet v.5.2 icon. This begins the install process.
296 Chapter 6 Installation for Macintosh operating systems ENWW
Figure 6-11 HP Color LaserJet v.5.2 icon
If you are installing your product on Mac OS X V10.1 or later, the Authenticate dialog box appears.
ENWW
Figure 6-12 Authenticate dialog box
Type the correct “admin” password and click OK to continue. The installer startup screen appears.
Click Cancel to exit the installation.
Mac OS X installation 297
Figure 6-13 HP LaserJet for Macintosh installer startup screen dialog box
Click Continue. The License dialog box appears.
Figure 6-14 License dialog box
298 Chapter 6 Installation for Macintosh operating systems ENWW
Click Print... to open the Page Setup dialog box for your default printer and print a copy of the license agreement.
Click Save As... to open the system Save dialog box and save the license agreement to disk.
Click Decline to end the installation process and close the installer.
Click Accept to continue the installation. The HP LaserJet Installer dialog box appears.
ENWW
Figure 6-15 HP LaserJet Installer dialog box (easy install)
The default option in the drop-down menu at the top of the screen is Easy Install. You can also select
Custom Install in the same menu.
Click Install to start the installation on the selected disk
Click Quit to quit the Installer without making changes to the system.
Mac OS X installation 299
Figure 6-16 HP LaserJet Installer dialog box (custom install)
Click Select All to install all of the options that are available on the printing-system software CD, or the components that you want to install by using the check boxes in the list
Click the I icon on the left of each item in the list to open a popup screen that describes the component.
Click Install to start the installation on the selected disk. The files are installed in the Library folder on the Macintosh CD.
Click Quit to quit the Installer without making any changes to the system.
Figure 6-17 Installing dialog box
The Installing dialog box shows installation progress. No action is required unless you want to stop the installation. Click Stop to interrupt the install file copy process.
When installation is complete, the LaserJet Readme.RTF file opens and the LaserJet ReadMe icon appears on the desktop. Follow these instructions to set up a printer queue for your
HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer. For more information about setting up a printer queue
300 Chapter 6 Installation for Macintosh operating systems ENWW
ENWW
A popup message also appears, stating that the installation was successful.
Figure 6-18 Installation success message
Click Quit to exit the installer.
Click Continue to return to the HP LaserJet Installer.
Mac OS X installation 301
302 Chapter 6 Installation for Macintosh operating systems ENWW
7 Engineering Details
Introduction
This chapter presents engineering detail for the following topics:
●
Disabling Enterprise AutoConfiguration [INTERNAL]
●
●
HP Standalone Scrubber [INTERNAL]
●
●
Printing print-ready documents
●
Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems
ENWW Introduction 303
Disabling Enterprise AutoConfiguration [INTERNAL]
Use the following steps to modify the .INF file to remove the components that are necessary for
Enterprise Autoconfiguration (EAC).
NOTE This section applies only to the HP traditional PCL 6 and the PCL 5 drivers.The .INF file should be modified only by advanced technical support personnel. Please notify the appropriate
Technical Marketing Product Manager if you receive a request that EAC be disabled.
Within the driver package .INF files for EAC-enabled drivers, the Installation section looks something like this:
; Installer Sections
[HPBF511I.PMD]
DataSection=HPBF511I_DATA
;
; NON EAC Copy Sections - Un-Comment to Disable EAC
;
CopyFiles=HPBF511I_FILES,LANGMON_FILES
; EAC Copy Sections - Comment to Disable EAC
; CopyFiles=HPBF511I_FILES,LANGMON_FILES,,AUTOCFG_FILES,HPAUTO_FILES
DataFile=HPBF511I.PMD
To disable EAC in a driver, simply make a comment in the CopyFiles that are indicated in the instructions in the .INF file by preceding the command with a semicolon (;). The exact contents of the CopyFiles lines might differ from one driver to the next. Using the preceding example, the installer section for a driver that has been modified to disable EAC would appear as follows:
;
; Installer Sections
[HPBF511I.PMD]
DataSection=HPBF511I_DATA
; NON EAC Copy Sections - Un-Comment to Disable EAC
;CopyFiles=HPBF511I_FILES,LANGMON_FILES
;
; EAC Copy Sections - Comment to Disable EAC
; ;CopyFiles=HPBF511I_FILES,LANGMON_FILES,,AUTOCFG_FILES,HPAUTO_FILES
DataFile=HPBF511I.PMD
The lines in this typeface
above show the required change.
304 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW
The driver installed in this disabled case could result in no extra files being copied to the driver directory, and no Autoconfiguration is performed on that product. However, if existing HP bidirectional communication software is installed and running on the target system, the Update Now button is enabled, and the user can access that functionality from the driver UI.
ENWW Disabling Enterprise AutoConfiguration [INTERNAL] 305
Media attributes
This section includes the following information about media attributes:
● media sources and destinations
● media-tray configurations
● media-source commands
● media types and sizes
● PCL 6 custom media sizes
Media sources and destinations
The following table indicates the standard and optional media sources and destinations for the
HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer:
Table 7-1 HP Color LaserJet 4700 media sources and destinations
Media sources
Media destinations
100-sheet multipurpose tray (tray 1)
500-sheet paper tray (tray 2)
500-sheet paper tray (tray 3)
500-sheet paper tray (tray 4)
500-sheet paper tray (tray 5)
500-sheet paper tray (tray 6) standard left bin standard standard optional optional optional optional standard (not available when accessory output device is attached)
Media-source commands
The PCL 6 attribute for paper source is ubyte # MediaSource
or ubyte_array "string"
MediaSource
. See the following table for values of #. For example, " ubyte 4 MediaSource
" is the command for tray 2.
The PCL 5 escape sequence for media source is
Esc&l#H
(the "l" is a lowercase "L" rather than the numeral "1"). See the following table for values of #. For example,
Esc&l1H
is the command fortray 2.
Table 7-2 Media-source commands
Media source
Manual feed in tray 1
Tray 1 (100-sheet)
2
3
PCL 6 PCL 5 ubyte # MediaSource or ubyte_array
"string"
MediaSource
Esc&l#H
2
4
PostScript
/MediaPosition # /
ManualFeed true | false
or null
3 true
3 false
306 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-2 Media-source commands (continued)
Media source PCL 6 PCL 5 PostScript ubyte # MediaSource or ubyte_array
"string"
MediaSource
Esc&l#H /MediaPosition # /
ManualFeed true | false
or null
Tray 2 (500-sheet)
Tray 3 (500-sheet)
Tray 4 (500-sheet)
Tray 5 (500-sheet)
Tray 6 (500-sheet)
4
5
7 uint32 uint32
1
5
8
9
10
0 false
1 false
4 false
38 false
39 false
Automatically Select (HP unidrivers)
NA NA NA
1
Automatically Select (HP traditional PCL drivers) or
Printer Auto Select (HP unidrivers)
7 1 null false
For the string value, you must use include the quotation marks around the variable. For example, ubyte_array "TRAY2"
MediaSource
is the PCL 6 command for tray 2.
Media types and sizes
The tables in this section provide information about media features, media attributes, and mediahandling constraints for the HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer.
Driver features and attributes
The following table lists the features and attributes of various media listed under the Size Is: drop-down menu on the Paper tab. The list order can vary, depending on the product and operating system. The list contains all of the following sizes, and might contain sizes from other drivers.
Table 7-3 Supported media sizes and attributes
Letter
Statement
16K
8.5 x 13
A4
Width
216 mm
(8.5 inches)
215.9 mm
(8.5 inches)
197 mm
(7.75 inches)
216 mm
(8.5 inches)
210 mm
(8.27 inches)
Height
279 mm
(11.0 inches)
139.7 mm
(5.5 inches)
273 mm
(10.75 inches)
330 mm
(13 inches)
297 mm
(11.69 inches)
"LETTER"
"STATEMENT"
"ROC16K"
"8.5x13"
"A4"
Media attributes 307
Table 7-3 Supported media sizes and attributes (continued)
Paper sizes
A5
B5 (JIS)
Double Postscard (JIS)
Double Japan Postscard
Rotated
Envelope #10
Envelope B5
Envelope C5
Width
148 mm
(5.83 inches)
182 mm
(7.17 inches)
100 mm
(3.94 inches)
148 mm
(5.83 inches)
105 mm
(4.13 inches)
176 mm
(6.93 inches)
162 mm
(6.38 inches)
110 mm
Height
210 mm
(8.27 inches)
257 mm
(10.12 inches)
200 mm
(7.87 inches)
200 mm
(7.87 inches)
241 mm
(9.5 inches)
250 mm
(9.84 inches)
229 mm
(9.02 inches)
220 mm
PCL 6
"A5"
"JIS B5"
"JPOSTD"
“Double Postcard (JIS)”
"COM10"
"B5 ENV"
"C5"
Envelope DL "DL"
Envelope Monarch
Executive
Executive (JIS)
Legal
Custom
(4.33 inches)
99 mm
(3.88 inches)
185 mm
(7.25 inches)
216 mm
(8.5 inches)
216 mm
(8.5 inches)
Minimum:
127 mm
(8.66 inches)
190 mm
(7.5 inches)
266 mm
(10.5 inches)
330 mm
(12.99 inches)
355 mm
(14.0 inches)
Minimum:
76.2 mm
"MONARCH"
"EXEC"
"JISEXEC"
"LEGAL"
4
(5.0 inches)
Maximum:
(3.0 inches)
Maximum:
215.9 mm 355.6 mm
1
2
4
(8.5 inches) (14.0 inches)
For all paper sizes, the PCL 6 margins are 100 dots, at 600 dots per inch.
The PCL 6 command for paper size is ubyte_array “String” MediaSize. The values in this column are the values for "String."
For custom sizes, the PCL 6 Driver specifies actual dimensions, for example, for 8 by 9 inch custom size, "real32_xy 8.0 9.0
CustomMediaSize ubyte eInch CustomMediaSizeUnits."
308 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-4 Supported input media types
Media types
(command string)
Tray 1/top bin/stacker bin
Trays 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 (500-sheet)
Duplexing unit Manual duplexing HP 750-Sheet
Stapler/Stacker
Unspecified
Plain
Preprinted
Letterhead
Transparency
Prepunched
Labels
Bond
Recycled
Color
Light (60–75 g/m 2 , or
16.4 - 20.5 lb.)
Intermediate (90 -
104 g/m 2 , or 24.7 -
28.5 lb.)
Y
Y
Heavy (105 - 120 g/m 2 , or 28.8 - 32.9 lb.)
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y (20)
Extra Heavy (120 - 163 g/m 2 , or 32.9 - 44.7 lb.)
Y
Cardstock (164 - 220 g/ m 2 , or 45 - 60.3 lb.)
Y
Rough (90 - 105 g/m 2 , or 24.7 - 28.8 lb.)
Y
Glossy (75 - 120 g/m 2 , or 20.5 - 32.9 lb.)
Y
Heavy Glossy (120 -
160 g/m 2 , or 32.9 -
43.9 lb.)
Y
Extra Heavy Glossy
(160 - 220 g/m 2 , or 43.9
- 58 lb.)
Y
N
N
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
N
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y (20)
Y (20)
Y
Y (20)
Y (20)
Y (20)
Tough Paper (Glossy
Film)
Y Y N N N
1
2
Envelope Y N N N N
Staples a maximum of 30 pages weighing from 60 g/m 2 number).
to 220 g/m 2 (16 lb to 58 lb) except where listed as N (no) or Y (other
Use only HP LaserJet glossy media. Using HP Inkjet glossy media can cause permanent damage to your printer.
Media attributes 309
Custom paper sizes
The following table shows custom paper sizes that are available for the HP Color LaserJet 4700:
Table 7-5 PCL 6 custom media sizes
Tray
Tray 1 (100-sheet multipurpose)
Tray 2 (500-sheet)
Tray 3 (500-sheet)
Tray 4 (500-sheet)
Tray 5 (500-sheet)
Tray 6 (500-sheet)
Duplexing unit
Dimensions
Width
Height
Width
Height
Width
Height
Width
Height
Width
Height
Width
Height
Width
Height
Minimum
76.2 mm (3.0 inches)
127.0 mm (5.0 inches)
148.0 mm (5.83 inches)
210.0 mm (8.26 inches)
148.0 mm (5.83 inches)
210.0 mm (8.26 inches)
148.0 mm (5.83 inches)
210.0 mm (8.26 inches)
148.0 mm (5.83 inches)
210.0 mm (8.26 inches)
148.0 mm (5.83 inches)
210.0 mm (8.26 inches)
148.0 mm (5.83 inches)
210.0 mm (8.26 inches)
Maximum
215 mm (8.5 inches)
355.6 mm (14.0 inches)
215.9 mm (8.5 inches)
355.6 mm (14.0 inches)
215.9 mm (8.5 inches)
355.6 mm (14.0 inches)
215.9 mm (8.5 inches)
355.6 mm (14.0 inches)
215.9 mm (8.5 inches)
355.6 mm (14.0 inches)
215.9 mm (8.5 inches)
355.6 mm (14.0 inches)
215.9 mm (8.5 inches)
355.6 mm (14.0 inches)
Media-type commands
The PCL 5 escape sequence for paper type is "Esc&n#Wdpapertype", where "n#" is the number of characters in the paper type plus 1. For example, in the sequence "Esc&n6WdPlain", "Plain" has 5 letters plus 1, for a total of 6.
Table 7-6 Media-type commands
Esc&
Esc&
Esc&
Esc&
Esc&
Esc&
Esc&
Esc&
Esc&
Esc& n#
6
11
11
13
11
7
5
9
6
Wd
Wd
Wd
Wd
Wd
Wd
Wd
Wd
Wd
Wd
Paper type
Plain
Preprinted
Letterhead
Transparency
Prepunched
Labels
Bond
Recycled
Color
310 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW
Table 7-6 Media-type commands (continued)
Esc& n# Wd Paper type
Esc&
Esc&
Esc&
Esc&
Esc&
Esc&
Esc&
6
13
6
12
11
6
7
Wd
Wd
Wd
Wd
Wd
Wd
Wd
Light
Intermediate
Heavy
Extra Heavy
Rough
Glossy
Esc&
Esc&
13
19
Wd
Wd
Heavy Glossy
Extra Heavy Glossy
Esc& 12 Wd Tough Paper (Glossy Film)
1
2
Esc& 9 Wd Envelope
You must spell out the word "Transparency" in the string, although it is abbreviated as TRNSPRNCY on the control panel.
The correct command for cardstock is "Esc&n11WdCard Stock", with a space between the "d" and the "S", and with an uppercase "S".
ENWW Media attributes 311
HP Standalone Scrubber [INTERNAL]
The HP Standalone Scrubber (also known as the TCE Scrubber) removes files after canceled or failed plug-and-play installations to ensure the success of reinstallation.
Failures can occur when the device plug and play does not complete successfully, leaving the product in an incomplete state. In many such situations, the product does not generate another plug and play event, so reinstallation is not possible until the install enumeration has been removed. Some customers may know how to remove incomplete product enumerations from Device Manager, but many do not. In addition, depending on the point where plug and play fails, the device may not show up at all in device manager. In this case, cleanup by the user to allow reinstall is almost always impossible.
Another factor making installation susceptible to failure is the complexity of the technology of the
Microsoft Installer (MSI). The MSI, while helpful in managing an installation, can fail due to unforeseen conditions. Also, if the MSI database from a successful install (on the user’s system) becomes corrupt, the installation’s maintenance mode could become unmanageable.
The scrubber stops processes, deletes devices, removes files and folders, and deletes registry entries.
These and other actions can be configured through an INI file to meet the needs of your device. The configuration can be customized for different operating systems; for example, a single configuration file can specify what is to happen for several different operating systems.
Implementation [INTERNAL]
The scrubber attempts to remove the following items from the user’s system:
● The MSI package, if installed.
● Any printer objects that use the product drivers
● The print drivers for the product.
● Plug-and-play device enumerations and registry entries related to the product for all supported direct connection types.
● .INF files used by the product.
The scrubber does not attempt to remove shared components, such as the driver print processor or the driver language monitor. This ensures that the scrubber does not interfere with other product installations that might use the shared files.
Using the HP Standalone Scrubber [INTERNAL]
1.
Close any software programs except for your file browser.
2.
Insert the printing-system software disk. If the CD browser window appears, click exit to close it.
312 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW
ENWW
3.
Navigate to the following directory of the printing-system software CD:
<root>\Temp\tcescrbr
The Delete Printer Screen appears.
Figure 7-1 Delete Printer screen [INTERNAL]
4.
Click Cancel to close the HP Standalone Scrubber without completing the uninstall process.
Click Delete Printer to proceed with the uninstall process. A screen appears advising you to wait.
This can take several minutes.
Figure 7-2 Please wait screen [INTERNAL]
When the uninstall process is complete, a screen appears that requests that you disconnect any cables between your computer and the printer.
HP Standalone Scrubber [INTERNAL] 313
5.
Disconnect any cable between your computer and the printer and click Next. The When do you
want to reboot screen appears.
Figure 7-3 Delete Printer screen [INTERNAL]
6.
Click Later to close the HP Standalone Scrubber without completing the task (not recommended).
Click Now to restart your computer.
NOTE The HP Standalone Scrubber might not remove all components.
Customization [INTERNAL]
You can add support for a new language or change the text for a language again without recompiling the application. In Windows XP, the debug version of the scrubber supports dynamically switching the displayed language.
The debug version of the scrubber (running on Windows XP and Windows 2000) allows you to switch the language displayed by the scrubber without rebooting or switching operating systems. (The release version of the scrubber always uses the User Default Input Language.)
To switch languages in Windows XP, follow these steps:
1.
Make sure you have a debug version of the program.
2.
Click Start, then click Settings, and then click Control Panel.
3.
Click Regional and Language Options.
4.
Click the Languages tab
5.
Click the Details button.
6.
In the Default input language field, select the language that you want to use with the scrubber. If the language you want is not in the list, click the Add button and use the Add Input Language to select the language that you want.
NOTE You cannot change the order of actions or add a new dialog or popup.
Troubleshooting [INTERNAL]
To assist in troubleshooting the scrubber, an .HTML log file is generated when it is run. This log file tracks all the actions performed by the scrubber and an errors encountered. The location of the scrubber log file on a Windows 2000 system is as follows:
C:\Documents and Settings\%USER%\Application Data\HP\Install\scrblog.htm
314 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW
Remote firmware update
The HP Color LaserJet 4700 features remote firmware update (RFU) capability. The method for downloading remote firmware updates from the Web site is similar to that used to download the latest printing-system software and print drivers.
The process for remotely upgrading firmware involves three steps:
1.
Determine the current level of firmware that is installed on the printer.
2.
Go to the HP Web site and download the latest firmware to your computer.
3.
Download the new firmware to the product.
Determining the current level of firmware
To determine the current level of firmware, view the configuration page. To print a configuration page, follow these instructions.
1.
Press the select button (the one with the check mark) to open the menus.
2.
Press the up and down buttons to scroll to INFORMATION, and then press the select button.
3.
Press the up and down buttons to scroll to PRINT CONFIGURATION.
4.
Press the select button to print the configuration page.
5.
Look in the "Printer Information" section on the configuration page for the firmware date code. The firmware date code looks something like this: 20051002 07.000.0.
Downloading the new firmware from the HP Web site
The remote firmware update (.RFU) file and an associated readme file are packaged together as a selfextracting .EXE file. For detailed instructions about how to download the .EXE file, go to the following
URL: www.hp.com/go/clj4700_firmware
The .EXE file consists of a readme file and the .RFU file.
NOTE For UNIX systems, the remote firmware update file is a .TAR file.
Downloading the new firmware to the product
For support information about downloading new firmware from the Web, go to www.hp.com/support/ clj4700 .
The product can receive an RFU update to a product when the product is in a READY state. The product waits for all of the I/O channels to become idle before performing the update.
NOTE If the firmware update involves a change in the format of nonvolatile random-access memory (NVRAM), any menu settings that are changed from the default settings will return to default settings. The settings must be changed again if you want them to be different from the defaults. Examples of settings that are affected in this way are tray types, default symbol sets, and Web-access alerts.
ENWW Remote firmware update 315
The elapsed time for an update depends on the I/O transfer time, as well as the time that it takes for the product to reinitialize. The I/O transfer time depends on a number of things, including the speed of the host computer that is sending the update and the I/O method (parallel or network). The reinitialization time depends on the specific hardware configuration of the product, such as the number of EIO devices installed, the presence of external paper-handling devices, and the amount of memory that is installed.
Finally, any print jobs that are ahead of the RFU job in the queue are printed before the update is processed.
Use one of the methods described in this manual to update your product firmware.
Printer messages during the firmware update
The following table lists the causes and results of possible interruptions to the firmware update.
Table 7-7 Troubleshooting a firmware update
Cause Result
The job was cancelled from the control panel.
A break in the I/O stream occurred during send (for example, the parallel cable was removed).
No update has occurred.
No update has occurred.
A power cycle occurred during the RECEIVING UPGRADE process.
A power cycle occurred during the PERFORMING
UPGRADE process.
A power cycle occurred during the INITIALIZING process.
No update has occurred.
No update has occurred. Resend the update through a parallel port.
The update has been completed.
Print jobs that are sent to the product while an update is in process do not interrupt the update.
All HP LaserJet products leave the factory with the most recent firmware version installed. If a remote firmware update fails in a Windows OS, the .RFU file must be resent. For more information, see
If a remote firmware update fails in a Macintosh OS, contact support from an HP Customer Care Center.
The following table lists possible reasons for the failure of a remote firmware update and the corrective action required for each situation.
Table 7-8 Troubleshooting a firmware update failure
Reason for firmware update failure
The .RFU file is corrupted.
The wrong product is contained in the .RFU file.
Corrective action
The product recognizes that the file is corrupted and rejects the update. Download the file again and send the new file to the product. Download the file from www.hp.com/go/clj4700_firmware .
The product recognizes the printer mismatch and rejects the update. Download the correct file and send it to the product. Download the file from www.hp.com/go/ clj4700_firmware .
316 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-8 Troubleshooting a firmware update failure (continued)
Reason for firmware update failure Corrective action
The upgrade was interrupted.
A flash hardware failure occurred.
See
.
Although it is extremely unlikely, the product might have a hardware failure. Call technical support to address the problem (see the flyer that came with the product for a local telephone support list).
Three messages appear during a normal update process; a fourth (RESEND UPGRADE) appears only if the update process does not succeed.
Table 7-9 Update messages
Printer message
RECEIVING UPGRADE
PERFORMING UPGRADE
INITIALIZING
RESEND UPGRADE
RFU LOAD ERROR
SEND RFU UPGRADE
ON PARALLEL PORT
Explanation
This message appears from the time the product recognizes the beginning of an .RFU update until the time the product has verified the validity and integrity of the .RFU update.
NOTE If the remote firmware update process is interrupted before the firmware is downloaded (while RECEIVING UPGRADE appears on the control-panel display), the firmware file must be sent again. No message appears on the product control panel to indicate that the update was interrupted.
This message appears while the product is actually reprogramming the firmware.
NOTE If power is lost during the flash DIMM update (while
PERFORMING UPGRADE appears on the control-panel display), the update is interrupted and the message RESEND UPGRADE appears on the control-panel display.
This message appears from the time the product has finished reprogramming the
DIMM until the product reinitializes.
This message appears (in English only) if the firmware update fails because the
RFU process is interrupted. It can also occur if firmware for accessories (such as the duplex unit or an output device becomes is corrupted. Perform another update by any means that is supported by the printer, regardless of the connection
(network, parallel, or USB).
This message appears (in English only) if the firmware update fails because the print-engine firmware is corrupted.
If this message appears, the update must now be sent only by a computer that is attached to the parallel port of the product.
NOTE To verify that the firmware update succeeded, print a new configuration page from the control panel and verify that the firmware date code on the configuration page has changed.
Remote firmware update by using FTP through a browser
Complete the following steps to update the product firmware by using file transfer protocol (FTP) through a browser.
Remote firmware update 317
NOTE The following instructions can be used on Windows or Macintosh operating systems.
1.
Make note of the TCP/IP address on the EIO-Jetdirect page. The EIO-Jetdirect page is the second page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see
Determining the current level of firmware
2.
Open a browser window.
3.
In the address line of the browser, type ftp://<IPADDRESS>
, where <IPADDRESS> is the TCP/
IP address of your product. For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90, type
FTP://
192.168.0.90
4.
Locate the downloaded .RFU file for the product.
5.
Drag and drop the .RFU file onto the PORT1 icon or onto any open space in the browser window.
NOTE If the PORT1 icon does not appear as a folder name, you might have to enable folder viewing for FTP sites in your Web browser. In Microsoft Internet Explorer, use the following procedure to enable the folder view.
a.
Select Tools, then select Internet Options, and then select theAdvanced tab.
b.
Select the Enable folder view for FTP sites.
c.
Click OK to save the setting.
6.
The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take several minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or the computer. The messages described in the section
Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the
control panel.
NOTE The product automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the product or interfere with the update until you see this message.
7.
Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the current update.
Remote firmware update by using FTP on a direct network connection
If the HP Color LaserJet 4700 uses a direct network connection, use file transfer protocol (FTP) to update the firmware. Complete the following steps for your operating system.
Windows operating systems
1.
Make note of the TCP/IP address on the Embedded Jetdirect page. The HP Embedded Jetdirect page is the second page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see
Determining the current level of firmware
NOTE Before connecting to the product, make sure that the product is not in Powersave mode. Also make sure that any error messages are cleared from the control-panel display.
2.
Open a command window on your computer.
318 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW
ENWW
3.
Type ftp <TCP/IP printer ADDRESS>
. For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90, type
ftp 192.168.0.90
.
4.
Press Enter on the keyboard.
5.
When prompted for the user name, press Enter .
6.
When prompted for the password, press Enter .
7.
Type bin
at the command prompt.
8.
Press Enter . The message 200 Type set to I, Using binary mode to transfer files appears in the command window.
9.
Type put <FILENAME>
, where <FILENAME> is the name of the .RFU file that was downloaded from the Web, including the path. For example, type put C:\LJ\4700FW.RFU
, and then press
Enter .
NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type put "c:\My Documents\LJ\4700fw.rfu"
.
The following series of messages appears in the command window:
200 PORT command successful
150 Opening BINARY mode data connection
226 Ready
226 Processing Job
226 Transfer complete
After these messages appear, a message containing transfer-speed information appears.
10.
The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take several minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or the computer. The
messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the
control panel.
NOTE The product automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the product or interfere with the update until you see this message.
11.
Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the current update.
12.
At the command prompt, type bye
to exit the FTP command.
13.
At the command prompt, type exit
to return to the Windows interface.
Remote firmware update 319
Macintosh operating systems
1.
Make a note of the TCP/IP address on the EIO-Jetdirect page. The EIO-Jetdirect page is the second page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see
Determining the current level of firmware .
2.
Open a Terminal window on your Macintosh. You can find the Terminal program on the computer hard drive in the Applications/Utilities folder.
3.
Type
FTP <TCP/IP printer ADDRESS>
For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90, type
FTP 192.168.0.90
4.
Press Enter on the keyboard.
5.
When prompted for a user name and password, press Enter .
6.
Type put <path>
, where <path> is the location where the .RFU file was downloaded from the
Web, including the path. For example, type put /username/desktop/4700fw.rfu
, and then press Enter .
NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type put "/user name/desktop/4700FW.RFU".
To ensure that the entire path to the .RFU file is placed in the put
command, type put
and a space, and then drag and drop the .RFU file onto the terminal window. The complete path to the file is automatically placed after the put
command .
7.
The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take several minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or the computer. The messages described in the section
Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the
control panel.
NOTE The product automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the product or interfere with the update until you see this message.
8.
Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the current update.
Remote firmware update through a local Windows port
If the product is connected through a local port (parallel), then you can send the .RFU file directly to the product by using a
COPY
command from a command prompt or an MS-DOS window. At the command prompt, perform the following steps for your operating system.
320 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW
ENWW
Windows 98 or Windows Me
1.
From a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window, type the following:
Mode lpt1:,,p
NOTE If the product is attached to a parallel port other than LPT1, then substitute the correct LPT port number in the mode command.
2.
Press Enter on the keyboard. The response you receive should be similar to these examples:
> LPT1 Not Rerouted
> Resident portion of MODE loaded
> Infinite retry on parallel printer time-out
3.
At a command prompt, type copy /b <FILENAME> <PORTNAME>
, where <FILENAME> is the name of the .RFU file (including the path) and <PORTNAME> is the name of the appropriate product port (such as LPT1). For example, type the following:
C:\>copy /b c:\4700fw.rfu lpt1
NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type
C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents\4700fw.rfu" lpt1
4.
Press Enter on the keyboard.
5.
The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take several minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or the computer. The
messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the
control panel.
NOTE The product automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the product or interfere with the update until you see this message.
6.
Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the current update.
7.
Type exit
at the command prompt to close the command window.
Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003
The .RFU file can be sent directly to the product by typing a copy command at a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window.
Remote firmware update 321
Windows NT 4.0 does not support the HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer drivers, but it is possible to update the printer firmware in Windows NT 4.0.
1.
At a command prompt, type copy /b <FILENAME> <PORTNAME>
, where <FILENAME> is the name of the .RFU file (including the path) and <PORTNAME> is the name of the appropriate printer port (such as LPT1). For example, type the following:
C:\>copy /b c:\4700fw.rfu lpt1
NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type
C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents\4700fw.rfu" lpt1
2.
Press Enter on the keyboard.
3.
The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take several minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or the computer. The messages described in the section
Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the
control panel.
NOTE The product automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the product or interfere with the update until you see this message.
4.
Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the current update.
5.
At the command prompt, type exit
to close the command window.
Remote firmware update through a Windows network
If the product is shared on a Windows network, follow these instructions.
1.
From a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window, type copy /b <FILENAME> \
\<COMPUTERNAME>\<SHARENAME>
, where <FILENAME> is the name of the .RFU file (including the path), <COMPUTERNAME> is the name of the computer from which the product is being shared, and <SHARENAME> is the product share name. For example, type the following:
C:\>copy /b c:\4700fw.rfu \\your_server\your_computer
NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type
C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents\4700fw.rfu"
\\your_server\your_computer
2.
Press Enter on the keyboard. The messages described in the section
computer screen.
3.
The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take several minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or the computer. The messages described in the section
Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the
control panel.
322 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW
ENWW
NOTE The product automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the product or interfere with the update until you see this message.
4.
Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the current update.
Remote firmware update for UNIX systems
For UNIX systems, any command method that delivers the .TAR file to the product is acceptable, including the following:
1.
At the command prompt, type cp /home/yourmachine/FILENAME /dev/parallel>
, where
</home/yourmachine/FILENAME> is the location of the .TAR file.
2.
The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take several minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or the computer. The
messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the
control panel.
NOTE The product automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the product or interfere with the update until you see this message.
3.
Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the current update.
Remote firmware update by using the HP Printer Utility
Make sure that you have the tools and files that are necessary for the update. You will need the
HP Printer Utility and the 4700FW.RFU file, which is the firmware file for the product. The HP Printer
Utility is a software program that is available only for Mac OS X V10.2 or later.
The HP Printer Utility can be found on the HP Color LaserJet 4700 printing-system software CD-ROM that came with the product. If you do not have the CD-ROM, you can obtain the HP Printer Utility by downloading the latest product installer from www.hp.com/go/clj4700_software .
The firmware file (4700FW.RFU) can be downloaded from the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/ clj4700_firmware
See
Downloading the new firmware to the product for more information.
After you have the firmware file and the HP Printer Utility, you are ready to begin the update process.
Complete the following steps:
1.
Open the HP Printer Utility.
2.
Select Update Firmware, click Choose and browse to firmware upgrade file, and click Open.
3.
On the Update Firmware screen, click Update.
Remote firmware update 323
NOTE You may receive an error message on the screen indicating that the printer is offline.
Verify that the printer is turned on. If it is, ignore the message. The Updating screen appears and the update proceeds as expected.
4.
The update process can take several minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with
NOTE The product automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the product or interfere with the update until you see this message.
5.
Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the current update.
Remote firmware update by using the HP LaserJet Utility
(Mac OS 9.x only)
Make sure that you have the tools and files that are necessary for the update. You will need the
HP LaserJet Utility and the 4700FW.RFU file, which is the firmware file for the product.
The firmware file (4700FW.RFU) can be downloaded from the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/ clj4700_firmware
See
Downloading the new firmware to the product
for more information.
After you have the firmware file and the HP LaserJet Utility, you are ready to begin the update process.
Complete the following steps:
1.
Open the HP LaserJet Utility.
2.
Click Select Printer, select the product that you want to update on the network, and then click
OK. An information dialog box for the printer appears.
3.
On the left side of the information dialog box, click Files. A dialog box appears where you can select a file to be downloaded to the product.
4.
Click Select File.
5.
Locate the 4700FW.RFU file on your hard disk, and click the file name to highlight it. Click
Select. The Files dialog boxes are updated to show the 4700FW.RFU file under File to download.
6.
Click Download.
7.
The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take several minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or the computer. A progress bar in the HP LaserJet Utility shows how much of the file has been downloaded. The messages described in the section
Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the
control panel.
324 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW
ENWW
NOTE The product automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the product or interfere with the update until you see this message.
8.
Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the current update.
Remote firmware update by using the LPR command
NOTE This remote firmware update method is for use in Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000,
Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003.
Complete the following steps to update the firmware by using the LPR command.
1.
From a command window, type lpr -P <IPADDRESS> -S <IPADDRESS> -o l
<FILENAME>
-OR- lpr -S <IPADDRESS> -Pbinps <FILENAME>
, where <IPADDRESS> can be either the TCP/IP address or the hostname of the product, and where <FILENAME> is the filename of the .RFU file.
NOTE The parameter (-o l) consists of a lowercase "O", not a zero, and a lowercase "L", not the numeral 1. This parameter sets the transport protocol to binary mode.
2.
Press Enter on the keyboard. The messages described in the section
Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the control panel.
3.
The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take several minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or the computer. The
messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the
control panel.
NOTE The product automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the product or interfere with the update until you see this message.
4.
Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the current update.
5.
Type exit
at the command prompt to close the command window.
Remote firmware update through HP Web Jetadmin
This procedure requires that you install HP Web Jetadmin V7.8 or later on your computer. Complete the following steps to update a single product through HP Web Jetadmin after downloading the .RFU
file from the HP Web site.
1.
Start HP Web Jetadmin.
2.
Type the TCP/IP address or IP host name of the product in the Quick Device Find field, and then click Go. The product Status window opens.
3.
Open the Device Management folder in the drop-down list in the Navigation panel. Navigate to the Device Lists folder.
Remote firmware update 325
4.
Expand the Device Lists folder and select All Devices. Locate the product that you want to update in the list of products, and click to select it.
5.
Locate the drop-down box for Device Tools in the upper-right corner of the window. Select Update
Printer Firmware from the choose action list.
6.
If the name of the .RFU file is not listed in the All Available Images dialog box, click Browse in the Upload New Firmware Image dialog box and navigate to the location of the .RFU file that you downloaded from the Web at the start of this procedure. If the filename is listed, select it.
7.
Click Upload to move the .RFU file from your hard drive to the HP Web Jetadmin server.
8.
Refresh the browser.
9.
Select the .RFU file from the Printer Firmware Update drop-down menu.
10.
Click Update Firmware. HP Web Jetadmin sends the selected .RFU file to the product.
11.
The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take several minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or the computer. The messages described in the section
Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the
control panel.
NOTE The product automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the product or interfere with the update until you see this message.
12.
Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the current update.
HP Web Jetadmin V7.8 and later can also be used to perform multiple or unattended installations.
Complete the following steps for multiple or unattended installations.
1.
Start HP Web Jetadmin.
2.
Create a device group. A simple way to do this is to follow these steps: a. Click Device Management, and then click All Devices.
-orb. Shift-click to select products that you want to be included in the group, and then click OK.
-orc. When prompted, type a name for the new device group, and then click OK.
3.
To modify several products in a group, click the group name, and then click Open.
4.
The drop-down menu for Device Group Tools appears on the right side of the window. Scroll if necessary to view it.
5.
In the Device Group Tools drop-down box, select an action. Type the appropriate information.
Click Return to Device Group when finished.
326 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW
Printing print-ready documents
Several methods are available for printing documents independently of the original software program that was used to create the document. Normally, the document is printed by opening the original application and printing it to a file, or is printed by means of a distribution method such as internet downloading. The following print-ready file formats can be sent directly to the HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer without first opening the original software program:
● HP LaserJet Printer Control Language (.PCL)
● Portable Document Format (.PDF)
● Postscript (.PS)
● Text (.TXT)
Use one of the following methods to send print-ready files to your product.
NOTE The examples that are used in this section are for printing .PDF documents. However, any print-ready file type can be substituted.
Print-ready file printing by using FTP through a browser
Complete the following steps to print print-ready files directly by using FTP through a browser.
NOTE The following instructions can be used on Windows or Macintosh operating systems.
1.
Make note of the TCP/IP address on the Embedded Jetdirect page. The HP Embedded Jetdirect page is the second page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see
Determining the current level of firmware
.
2.
Open a browser window.
3.
In the address line of the browser, type ftp://<IPADDRESS>
. For example, if the TCP/IP address of your product is 192.168.0.90, type the following:
FTP:// 192.168.0.90
4.
Locate the print-ready file for the product.
5.
Drag and drop the print-ready file onto the PORT1 icon in the browser window.
NOTE If the PORT1icon does not appear as a folder name, you might have to enable folder viewing for FTP sites in your Web browser. In Microsoft Internet Explorer, use the following procedure to enable the folder view.
1.
Select Tools, then select Internet Options, and then select the Advanced tab.
2.
Select the Enable folder view for FTP sites.
3.
Click OK to save the setting.
Print-ready file printing by using FTP on a direct network connection
If the HP Color LaserJet 4700 uses a direct network connection, use file transfer protocol (FTP) to print a print-ready file. Complete the following steps for the operating system:
ENWW Printing print-ready documents 327
Windows operating systems
1.
Take note of the TCP/IP address on the Embedded Jetdirect page. The HP Embedded Jetdirect page is the second page of the Configuration page printout. To print a Configuration page, see
Determining the current level of firmware .
2.
Open a command window on your computer.
3.
Type ftp <TCP/IP printer ADDRESS>
. For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90, type the following: ftp 192.168.0.90
4.
Press Enter on the keyboard.
5.
When prompted for the user name, press Enter .
6.
When prompted for the password, press Enter .
7.
Type bin
at the command prompt.
8.
Press Enter . The message 200 Types set to I, Using binary mode to transfer files appears in the command window.
9.
Type put <FILENAME>
, where <FILENAME> is the name of the print-ready file to be printed, including the path. For example, type the following: put C:\LJ\4700FW.PDF
NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type put "c:\My Documents\LJ\4700FW.PDF"
The following series of messages appears in the command window:
200 PORT command successful
150 Opening BINARY mode data connection
226 Ready
226 Processing Job
10.
Press Enter on the keyboard.
11.
The print-ready file prints.
12.
At the command prompt, type bye
to exit the FTP command.
13.
At the command prompt, type exit
to return to the Windows interface.
328 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW
ENWW
Macintosh operating systems
1.
Make note of the TCP/IP address on the Embedded Jetdirect page. The HP Embedded Jetdirect page is the second page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see
Determining the current level of firmware
.
2.
Open a Terminal window on your Macintosh. You can find the Terminal program on the computer hard drive in the following folder:
System/Applications/Utilities/Terminal
3.
Type
FTP <TCP/IP printer ADDRESS>
. For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90, type the following:
FTP 192.168.0.90
4.
Press Enter on the keyboard.
5.
When prompted for a user name and password, press Enter .
6.
You can drag and drop the firmware file into the Terminal folder (System/Applications/Utilities/
Terminal). Alternatively, you can type put <path>
, where <path> is the location where the printready file was downloaded from the Web. For example, type the following: put /username/desktop/4700FW.PDF
NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type put "/user name/desktop/4700FW.PDF"
To ensure that the entire path to the print-ready file is placed in the put
command, type put
and a space, and then click and drag the print-ready file onto the terminal window. The complete path to the file is automatically placed after the put
command .
7.
Press Enter .
8.
The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take about five minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or computer.
9.
The product automatically turns off and on again to activate the update.
Print-ready printing by using a local Windows port
To print directly by using a local Windows port, follow the instructions in this section for your operating system.
Printing print-ready documents 329
Windows 98 or Windows Me
1.
From a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window, type the following:
Mode lpt1:,,p
NOTE If the product is attached to a parallel port other than LPT1, then substitute the correct LPT port number in the mode
command.
2.
Press Enter on the keyboard. The response you receive should be similar to these examples:
> LPT1 Not Rerouted
> Resident portion of MODE loaded
> Infinite retry on parallel printer time-out
3.
At a command prompt, type copy /b <FILENAME> <PORTNAME>
, where <FILENAME> is the name of the print-ready file (including the path) and <PORTNAME> is the name of the appropriate printer port (such as LPT1). For example, at the c:\>
command prompt, type the following: copy /b c:\4700FW.PDF lpt1
NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type
C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents\4700FW.PDF"
4.
Press Enter on the keyboard. The message PROCESSING JOB appears on the control panel, and the job prints.
5.
At the command prompt, type exit
to close the command window.
Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003
The print-ready file can be sent directly to the product by typing a copy
command at a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window.
1.
At a command prompt, type copy /b <FILENAME> <PORTNAME>
, where <FILENAME> is the name of the print-ready file (including the path) and <PORTNAME> is the name of the appropriate printer port (such as LPT1). For example, type the following:
C:\>copy /b c:\4700FW.PDF lpt1
2.
Press Enter on the keyboard.
NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type
C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents
\4700FW.PDF"
. The message PROCESSING JOB appears on the control panel, and the job prints.
3.
At the command prompt, type exit
to close the command window.
330 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW
ENWW
Print-ready file printing in a Windows network
If the product is shared on a Windows network, complete the following steps.
1.
From a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window, type copy /b <FILENAME> \
\<COMPUTERNAME>\<SHARENAME>
, where <FILENAME> is the name of the print-ready file
(including the path), <COMPUTERNAME> is the name of the computer from which the product is being shared, and <SHARENAME> is the product share name. For example, type the following:
C:\>copy /b c:\4700FW.PDF \\your_server\sharename
NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type
C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents\4700FW.PDF"
\\your_server\sharename
2.
Press Enter on the keyboard. The message PROCESSING JOB appears on the control panel, and the job prints. The message 1 file(s) copied appears on the computer screen.
Print-ready file printing in UNIX systems
For UNIX systems, any command method that delivers the print-ready file to the product is acceptable, including the following:
At the command prompt, type cp </home/yourmachine/FILENAME/ dev/parallel>
, where </home/yourmachine/FILENAME> is the location of the print-ready file.
Print-ready file printing by using the LPR command
NOTE This direct printing method is for use in Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003.
Complete the following steps to print a print-ready file by using the LPR command.
1.
Make note of the TCP/IP address on the Embedded Jetdirect page. The HP Embedded Jetdirect page is the second page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see
Determining the current level of firmware
.
2.
From a command window, type the following: lpr -P IPADDRESS -S IPADDRESS -o l FILENAME lpr -S <IPADDRESS> -Pbinps
<FILENAME> where IPADDRESS can be either the TCP/IP address or the host name of the product, and where
FILENAME is the file name of the print-ready file.
NOTE The parameter (-o l) consists of a lowercase "O", not a zero, and a lowercase "L", not the numeral 1. This parameter sets the transport protocol to binary mode.
3.
The file prints, but no messages appear in the command prompt window.
4.
Type exit
at the command prompt to close the command window.
Printing print-ready documents 331
Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems
The following tables detail the software features that are available for each driver type and for each supported operating system that the HP Color LaserJet 4700 supports. The printing-system drivers for
Windows 98 and Windows Me are the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver, HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver and
PS Emulation Driver. The printing-system drivers for Windows 2000, Windows XP, and
Windows Server 2003 are the new HP unidrivers, with a user interface look and feel that is consistent across the HP PCL 6 Unidriver, HP PCL 5 Unidriver, and PS Emulation Unidriver.
For more information about the HP traditional PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation drivers, see
HP traditional print drivers for Windows . For more information about the HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and
PS emulation unidrivers, see
HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows .
NOTE HP Color LaserJet 4700 print driver features are supported in Windows XP (both 32-bit and 64-bit) and Windows XP (both 32-bit and 64-bit ) operating systems.
HP Color LaserJet 4700 print driver features are supported in Mac OS 9 V9.2.2 and Mac OS X
V10.1.5 or later, except as otherwise noted.
Job stream output
Table 7-10 Driver support for job stream output feature
Operating system
Driver type
Driver
HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver support
PCL 6 support
PCL 6 pass-through support
PCL 6 XL Color
Postscript 3
Postscript 1, 2 x x x
Windows XP, Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
HP unidriver
PCL6 PCL 5 x
PS Emulation x
Windows 98, Me x x x
HP traditional driver
PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation x x
Macintosh x x
Macintosh
Postscript
PCL 6 raster compression
Table 7-11 PCL 6 color raster compression support
Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Driver type
Driver
PCL 6 color raster compression x
HP unidriver
PCL6 PCL 5 PS Emulation
Windows 98, Me
HP traditional driver
PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation x
Macintosh
Macintosh
Postscript
332 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW
PJL/PJL Encoding
Table 7-12 Printer Job Language (PJL) and PJL encoding
Operating system
Driver type
Driver
PJL support
UTF-8 encoding for PJL
(Unicode to 8-bit) x x
Windows XP, Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
HP unidriver
PCL 6 PCL 5 x x
PS Emulation x x
Windows 98, Me x x
HP traditional driver
PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation x x x
Macintosh
Macintosh
Postscript
Job tracking
Table 7-13 Driver support for job tracking
Operating system
Driver type
Driver
PRN file driver identification
Windows XP, Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
HP unidriver
PCL 6 PCL 5 x x
PS Emulation x
Job accounting information
Job accounting enhancements
(UUID)
Reliable Time Services – born on date (PJL DMINFO) x x Job Timestamp – born on date
(PJL TIMESTAMP)
Sending user name with every job x x x x x x x x x x x x x
Windows 98, Me x x x x
HP traditional driver
PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation x x x x x x x x
Macintosh
Macintosh
Postscript x
Connectivity/Printing
Table 7-14 Driver support for connectivity features
Operating system
Driver type
Driver
Parallel (direct connect)
Network — TCP/IP x x
Windows XP, Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
HP unidriver
PCL 6 PCL 5 x x
PS Emulation x x
Windows 98, Me x x
HP traditional driver
PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation x x x x
Macintosh
Macintosh
Postscript x
ENWW Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems 333
Table 7-14 Driver support for connectivity features (continued)
Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Driver type
Driver
HP unidriver
PCL 6
USB (Direct Connect) through
7.1.2 Port Monitor (MS USB
Print) (bidirectional) x
USB (Direct Connect) through
1284.4 Port Monitor (HP DOT4 /
7.1.3 ) (bidirectional) x
USB (Direct Connect) through
1284.4 Port Monitor (MS DOT4 /
7.1.3) (bidirectional) —
Windows XP only x
USB (Direct Connect) through
7.1.2 (Apple USB Print)
(bidirectional)
USB (Direct Connect) through
1284.4 (HP Hose DOT4 / 7.1.3 )
(bidirectional) Mac OS 9 only
USB (Direct Connect) through
1284.4 (HP CIA DOT4 / 7.1.3 )
(bidirectional) Mac OS X only
PCL 5 x x x
PS Emulation x x x x
Windows 98, Me
HP traditional driver
PCL 6 x
PCL 5 x
PS Emulation
Macintosh
Macintosh
Postscript x x x x
Bidirectional communication
Table 7-15 Driver support for bidirectional communication features
Operating System Windows XP, Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Driver type
Driver
EAC
Direct connect – parallel — LPT
— DOT4 stack
Network — TCP/IP
Automatic Configuration (other than EAC)
USB (through 1284.4 port monitor) x
USB (direct connect) through
1284.4 Port Monitor (MS DOT4 /
7.1.3) (bidirectional) — Win XP
Only x x x x
HP unidriver
PCL 6 PCL 5 x x x x x
PS Emulation x x x x x
Windows 98, Me x x x
HP traditional driver
PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation x x x x x x
Macintosh
Macintosh
Postscript
334 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW
Table 7-15 Driver support for bidirectional communication features (continued)
Operating System Windows XP, Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows 98, Me Macintosh
Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh
Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation Postscript
USB (direct connect) through
7.1.2 (Apple USB Print)
(bidirectional)
USB (direct connect) through
1284.4 (HP Hose DOT4 / 7.1.3 )
(bidirectional) Mac OS 9 only
USB (direct connect) through
1284.4 (HP CIA DOT4 / 7.1.3 )
(bidirectional) Mac OS 9 only x x x
Update Now x x x x x
1
x x
MasterMon, a pseudo-language monitor that is used for all HP LaserJet products for the duplex communication channel with bidirectional communication products and to insert PJL commands into the job stream. It loads TCPMON for TCP/IP ports.
HP Driver Preconfiguration
Table 7-16 Driver support for HP Driver Preconfiguration
Operating system
Driver type
Driver
HP Driver Preconfiguration
Feature lockout
Continuous export x x x
Windows XP, Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
HP unidriver
PCL 6 PCL 5 x x x
PS Emulation x x x
Windows 98, Me x x x
HP traditional driver
PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation x x x
Macintosh
Macintosh
Postscript
Bundle support
Table 7-17 Bundle support
Operating system
Driver type
Driver
Printer Bundle in UI
Windows XP, Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
HP unidriver
PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation
Windows 98, Me
HP traditional driver
PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation x x
Macintosh
Macintosh
Postscript
ENWW Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems 335
Tray and paper assignment
Table 7-18 Tray and paper assignment
Operating system
Driver type
Driver
Assign paper size to tray
Windows XP, Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
HP unidriver
PCL 6 PCL 5 x x
PS Emulation x
Windows 98 and Windows Me
HP traditional driver
PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation x
Macintosh
Macintosh
Postscript
Installable options
Table 7-19 Driver support for installable options
Operating system
Driver type
Driver
Duplexing unit
Manual duplex enable
Printer hard disk x x x
Windows XP, Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
HP unidriver
PCL 6 PCL 5 x x x
PS Emulation x x x
Total memory x x x
DWS (available memory)
Additional source trays
Additional destination bins
HP 750-Sheet Stapler/Stacker
Font DIMM/compact flash support
Font DIMM Installer
Mopier enabled
Job Storage enabled
Postscript passthrough x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
Windows 98, Me x x x x x x x x x x x
HP traditional driver
PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
Macintosh x x x
Macintosh
Postscript x
336 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW
Printer services
Table 7-20 Printer services (Services tab)
Operating system
Driver type
Driver
Internet Services Links/Launch product support Web site
Launch HP EWS features through TCP/IP port x
Windows XP, Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
HP unidriver
PCL 6 PCL 5 x x
PS Emulation x x x
Windows 98, Me
HP traditional driver
PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation
Macintosh
Macintosh
Postscript x
UI features
Table 7-21 Driver support for UI features
Operating system Windows XP,Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Driver type
Driver
UI tabs ("Panels" in Macintosh) x
UI extensions x x Page preview images
Printer image bitmaps with hot spots
Paper size dimensions
About . . .
Accessibility/Disability (JAWS) x x
HP unidriver
PCL 6 PCL 5 x x x x x
PS Emulation x x x x x
Accessibility architecture x x x x x x x x
Windows 98, Me
HP traditional driver
PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation x x x
Macintosh x x x
Macintosh
Postscript x x x x x x x x
(Mac OS X only) x x
Help features
Table 7-22 Driver support for Help features
Operating system
Driver type
Driver
What's this? Help (F1)
Windows XP, Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
HP unidriver
PCL 6 PCL 5 x x
PS Emulation x
Windows 98, Me
HP traditional driver
PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation x x x
Macintosh
Macintosh
Postscript
ENWW Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems 337
Table 7-22 Driver support for Help features (continued)
Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Driver type
Driver
Help button
Bubble Help
MS Windows "?" Help
Constraint Help x x
HP unidriver
PCL 6 x
PCL 5 x x x x x
PS Emulation x
Windows 98, Me
HP traditional driver
PCL 6 x x x x
PCL 5 x x x x
PS Emulation x x
Macintosh
Macintosh
Postscript
Quick Sets
Table 7-23 Driver support for Quick Sets
Operating system
Driver type
Driver
Print Task Quick Sets
User Defined Quick Sets x x
Windows XP, Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
HP unidriver
PCL 6 PCL 5 x x
PS Emulation x x
Windows 98, Me x x
HP traditional driver
PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation x x
Macintosh x
Macintosh
Postscript
Paper Sizes
Table 7-24 Driver support for paper sizes
Operating system
Driver type
Driver
Paper Size selection
User-defined custom paper
Custom paper dialog through driver UI x x x
Windows XP, Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
HP unidriver
PCL 6 PCL 5 x x x
PS Emulation x x x
Windows 98, Me x x x
HP traditional driver
PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation x x x x x
Macintosh x x x
Macintosh
Postscript
338 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW
Media Types
Table 7-25 Driver support for media types
Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Driver type
Driver
Media types appear in one list
User Defined Media Types
Combined Media Types &
Sources in program. (Always
ON, NO driver UI switch)
Combined Media Types and sources in program (optional, driver UI switch)
Combined Media Types and sources in program (in driver UI)
Alternative Letterhead mode x x x x
HP unidriver
PCL 6 PCL 5 x x x x
PS Emulation x x x x x x
Windows 98, Me x x
HP traditional driver
PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation x x x x
Macintosh x
Macintosh
Postscript x x x x x
Job storage
Table 7-26 Driver support for job-storage features
Operating system
Driver type
Driver
Proof and hold
Private job
Quick Copy
Stored Job
Job name
User name
PIN
Job storage pop-up
Automatic job and user name
Job Storage override x x x x x x x x x x
Windows XP, Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
HP unidriver
PCL 6 PCL 5 x x x x x x x x x x x x
PS Emulation x x x x x x x
Windows 98, Me x x x x x x x x x x
HP traditional driver
PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
Macintosh x x x x x x x
Macintosh
Postscript
ENWW Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems 339
Print quality and resolution
Table 7-27 Print-quality and resolution features
Operating system
Driver type
Driver
Print-quality options
Windows XP,Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
HP unidriver
PCL 6 PCL 5 x x
PS Emulation x
Print-quality — custom options recall
Print optimizations
Rendering mode (automatic) x x
Send graphics as vector
Send graphics as raster
Send page as raster
Color REt
x
Scale Patterns (WYSIWYG)
1
Image Mode x
Activated through the Edge Control option.
x x x x x x
Windows 98, Me x x x
HP traditional driver
PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation x x x x x x x x x x x x x
Macintosh
Macintosh
Postscript x x x
Reordering Options
Table 7-28 Driver support for reordering options
Operating system
Driver type
Windows XP, Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
HP unidriver
Driver PCL 6
Page order (based on output bin) x
Page order (reordering for job) x
PCL 5 x x
PS Emulation x x
Windows 98, Me
HP traditional driver
PCL 6 x
PCL 5 x
PS Emulation
Macintosh
Macintosh
Postscript x (Mac OS X only) x (Mac OS X only)
340 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW
Resizing options
Table 7-29 Resizing options
Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Driver type
Driver
Print Document On
Scale to Fit
Allow Scaling from Large Paper x
% of Normal Size x
Rotate by 180 degrees x x x
HP unidriver
PCL 6 PCL 5 x x x x x
PS Emulation x x x x x
Windows 98, Me x x x x x
HP traditional driver
PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation x x x x x x x x x
Macintosh
Macintosh
Postscript
Color settings
Table 7-30 Color settings
Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Driver type
Driver
Color Options x
Manual/automatic color options x
CMYK inks
Print in Grayscale
Color/monochrome switching
ICM (ink)/ColorSync (Macintosh) x x
ICM Method
ICM Intent x x
HP unidriver
PCL 6 PCL 5 x x x x x x
PS Emulation x x x x x x x
Windows 98, Me x x x x
HP traditional driver
PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation x x x x x x x x x
Mac
Mac
Postscript x x x x x x (Mac OS X only)
Watermarks
Table 7-31 Driver support for watermarks feature
Operating system
Driver type
Driver
Watermarks on/off
Windows XP, Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
HP unidriver
PCL 6 PCL 5 x x
PS Emulation x
Windows 98, Me
HP traditional driver
PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation x x x
Macintosh
Macintosh
Postscript x
ENWW Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems 341
Table 7-31 Driver support for watermarks feature (continued)
Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Driver type HP unidriver
Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation
First page only
Custom watermark definition
Watermark angle
Watermark font name
Watermark font color
Watermark font shading
Watermark font size x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
Watermark font style x x x
1
Locally defined watermarks x x x
Mac OS8.5 – 9.x only; not supported by Mac OS X or later.
x x x x
Windows 98, Me
HP traditional driver
PCL 6 x x x x x x x x x
PCL 5 x x x x x x x x x
PS Emulation x x x x x x x x
Macintosh
Postscript x x x x x x x x
Alternative source/paper type
Table 7-32 Driver support for alternate source/paper type feature
Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Driver type
Driver
All pages the same x
Use different paper (UI control) x x Front Cover (Blank Front Cover
Inserted)
First Page x
Other pages
Last Page
Back Cover — Blank Back Cover
Inserted x x x
HP unidriver
PCL 6 PCL 5 x x x x x x x
PS Emulation x x x x x x x
Windows 98, Me x x x x x x x
HP traditional driver
PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation x x x x x x x x x x
Macintosh x x
Macintosh
Postscript
342 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW
Printing destination
Table 7-33 Driver support for printing-destination feature
Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Driver type
Driver
Paper Destinations x
Custom Names for Mailbox Bins x
HP unidriver
PCL 6 PCL 5 x x
PS Emulation x x
Windows 98, Me x x
HP traditional driver
PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation x x
Macintosh x
Macintosh
Postscript
Finishing options and duplexing
Table 7-34 Duplexing
Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Driver type
Driver
Auto duplex/print on both sides x
Manual duplex x
Mixed duplex and simplex in single job x
Long Edge/Short Edge (Flip On) x
Pages per sheet (N-up) x
Page borders on/off
Page order (N-Up) x x x Booklet Printing (layout through software)
Booklet Target Size
Staple Options x x
HP unidriver
PCL 6 PCL 5 x x x x x x x x x x
PS Emulation x x x x x x x x x x
Windows 98, Me x x x x x x x x x x
HP traditional driver
PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
Macintosh x x
Macintosh
Postscript x x x x x x (Mac OS X only)
ENWW Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems 343
Other document options
Table 7-35 Other document options
Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Driver type
Driver
Orientation (portrait/landscape) x
Number of copies x
Ignore application collation
Collate x
Collate – feature in driver UI
Collate through mopy
Advanced printing features x x
HP unidriver
PCL 6 PCL 5 x x x x x
PS Emulation x x x x x
Windows 98, Me x x x x
HP traditional driver
PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation x x x x x x x x x x x
Macintosh x x x x x
Macintosh
Postscript
Font support
Table 7-36 Font support
Operating system
Driver type
Driver
General device font support
Font substitution
Font DIMM (on/off)
Send TrueType as Bitmap
TrueType Fonts (UI option)
Print Text as Black x x x
Windows XP, Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
HP unidriver
PCL 6 PCL 5 x x x
PS Emulation x x x x x x
Windows 98, Me x x x
HP traditional driver
PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation x x x x x x x x
Macintosh x x
Macintosh
Postscript
Postscript-specific features
Table 7-37 Driver support for postscript-specific features
Operating system
Driver
Postscript memory
Windows XP
HP unidriver
PS Emulation
Unidriver x
Windows 98, Me
PS Emulation
Driver x
Macintosh
Postscript
Postscript
344 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW
Table 7-37 Driver support for postscript-specific features (continued)
Operating system Windows XP
Driver
Output protocol
Send CTRL-D before each job
Send CTRL-D after each job
Convert gray text to postscript gray
Convert gray graphics to postscript gray
Add euro currency symbol
Job timeout
Wait timeout
Minimum font size to download as outline
Minimum font size to download as bitmap
Printing Preferences
Postscript language level
CMYK Inks
Postscript Language Level
Send postscript error handler
Mirrored output
Output options
Optimize for speed
Optimize for portability
Encapsulated postscript (EPS)
Archive format
Fit to Page
TrueType font download option
Automatic
Outline
Bitmap
Native TrueType x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
HP unidriver x x x x x x x x x x
PS Emulation
Unidriver x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
Windows 98, Me x x x
PS Emulation
Driver
Macintosh
Postscript
Postscript x x x
ENWW Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems 345
346 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW
Index
Symbols/Numerics
% of Normal Size setting
A
About button
accessibility
accessories, automatic
ADA (Americans with Disabilities
administrative users, HP
Adobe Acrobat Reader
printing PDF files without 327
Adobe RGB
Advanced Printing Features setting,
Allow Scaling from Large Paper,
Alternative Letterhead Mode
alternative source support 342
Americans with Disabilities Act
application settings
ASCII output protocol, PS
autoconfiguration. See Enterprise
AutoConfiguration
Automatic color settings
Automatic Configuration
B
Back button, Windows installation
Back Cover settings
Back to Front printing, unidrivers
Basics tab, PCL traditional drivers
bidirectional communication
Enterprise AutoConfiguration
binary output protocol, PS
binding settings
bins
black, printing all text as
PCL traditional drivers 91, 92
booklet printing settings
both sides, printing on
PCL traditional driver settings
C
Cancel button, Windows installation
cardstock, paper type commands
CD-ROM
installing Macintosh printing-
installing Windows printing-
Change Current Destination Folder
Check Cable Connection dialog
Choose Setup Language dialog
Client Driver Support dialog box,
Windows
ENWW Index 347
CMYK settings, PS Emulation
collation settings
Color Control, PS Emulation Driver
Color Options, PS Emulation Driver
Color printing
Image Color Management (ICM)
PANTONE*® Matching System
Color tab
Color Themes
command-line printing, Windows
command-line silent install for
commands, paper
Configuration Page, HP Embedded
Configure Device page, HP
Configure tab, PCL traditional
Confirm Changing Setting dialog
Confirm Settings dialog box,
connectivity bidirectional communication
Printer Connection dialog box,
Searching dialog box, Windows
Connector Type dialog box,
constraint messages
context-sensitive help
control panel settings
Copy Count settings
covers, use different paper settings
Custom Installation dialog box,
Custom Installer Location dialog
custom paper sizes
D default Print Task Quick Sets
Device Information page, HP
Device Settings tab
Device Status page, HP Embedded
dialog boxes, printing-system software installation
DIMMs, fonts
PCL traditional driver settings
direct printing
directory structure, software CD-
disabling
Enterprise AutoConfiguration
disk. See hard disk disk space requirements
Document Options
documentation
Print Task Quick Set for use guide, HP Traditional PCL 6
Print Task Quick Set for use
double-sided printing
PCL traditional driver settings
downloading
348 Index ENWW
Drive Configuration preconfigure driver dialog box, Customization
Driver Configuration dialog box,
drivers
availability by operating system
bidirectional communication
Enterprise AutoConfiguration
Enterprise AutoConfiguration,
HP Driver Preconfiguration
installable options support
PCL 6 color raster compression
Point and Print installation
Postcript-specific features 344
PS Emulation Driver features
duplexing unit
PCL traditional driver settings
PS Emulation Driver settings
E
E-mail Server page, HP Embedded
EAC. See Enterprise
Autoconfiguration
Edge Control settings
Edit Other Links page, HP
Effects tab
Embedded Jetdirect page, printing
embedded Web server. See HP
Embedded Web Server
Enterprise AutoConfiguration
Novell NetWare operating
Windows operating systems
envelopes, paper type commands
escape sequences
EWS. See HP Embedded Web
Server
exporting driver parameters 34
External Fonts settings, PCL
F
Features dialog box, Customization
Features dialog box, Windows
file layout for software CD-ROM
Finishing tab
firewalls dialog box, Windows
firmware
determining current level 315 downloading 315
HP Web Jetadmin updates
messages during update 316 troubleshooting updates 316
Windows network updates
Windows, local port update
First Page paper settings
ENWW Index 349
Fit to Page settings
Flip Pages Up
Font Substitution Table, PS
fonts
DIMM settings, PCL traditional
PS Emulation Driver settings
Send TrueType as Bitmap, PCL
Send TrueType as Bitmap, PCL
substitution table, PS Emulation
substitution table, unidrivers
TrueType download option
Form to Tray Assignment,
Front Cover settings
FTP
Windows firmware updates
G
Graphic settings
PCL traditional drivers 90, 92
Graphics tab, PS Emulation Driver
grayscale printing
guides. See documentation
H
Halftone settings
hard disk
PS Emulation Driver settings
heavy paper, paper type commands
help
operating systems supported
Help button, Windows installation
HP Device Installer Customization
HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check
HP Driver Preconfiguration
operating systems and drivers
status, PCL traditional drivers
HP Embedded Web Server
ordering supplies page,
HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide
HP Jetdirect page, printing 39
HP LaserJet Utility, Macintosh
HP Network Registry Agent
HP PCL traditional drivers. See PCL traditional drivers
HP PCL unidrivers. See PCL unidrivers
HP Printer Utility, Macintosh 56,
HP PS 3 Emulation Unidriver. See
PS Emulation Unidriver
HP Software License Agreement
HP Traditional Postscript 3
Emulation Driver. See PS
Emulation Driver
HP Web Jetadmin
Driver Preconfiguration Plugin
HP Embedded Web Server
HPNRA (HP Network Registry
350 Index ENWW
I
IBM operating systems, supported
Ignore Application Collation, PCL
Image Color Management (ICM)
Include types in application source
Incompatible Print Settings messages. See constraint messages
INF file, Enterprise
Information tab, HP Embedded
input trays. See trays
Installable Options
installation
dialog boxes, Mac OS Classic
Installer Customization Wizard
Macintosh printing-system
plug and play, scrubber utility
system requirements for
Macintosh and Linux operating
system requirements for
Windows operating systems
Windows printing-system
Installation Type dialog box,
installers availability by operating system
Installing dialog box, Customization
Installing dialog box, Windows
J
Jetadmin. See HP Web Jetadmin
Jetdirect Administrator's Guide
Job Storage enabling in PCL traditional
operating systems supported
L landscape orientation settings
Language dialog box,
languages
Choose Setup Language dialog
HP Embedded Web Server
large paper, allowing scaling 136
Layout Options, unidrivers 176
letterhead, alternative mode
license agreement dialog box,
links
HP Embedded Web Server
Linux operating systems
local port command line printing,
lockable features, drivers 34, 66
login process, HP Embedded Web
LPR commands
M
Macintosh operating systems
dialog boxes, Mac OS Classic printing-system software
dialog boxes, Mac OS X printingsystem software installation
directory structure, software CD-
HP Embedded Web Server
installing printing-system
ENWW Index 351
setting up products with Mac OS
uninstalling printing-system
Manual color settings
manuals. See documentation margins
media. See paper memory
installation requirements for
Macintosh and Linux operating
installation requirements for
Windows operating systems
PCL traditional driver settings
PS Emulation Driver settings
PS Emulation Unidriver settings
messages, constraint
Microsoft Point and Print installation
mirror image, PS Emulation Driver
models
PCL traditional driver settings
Mopier settings
More Configuration Options, PCL
N name printer dialog box
negative image, PS Emulation
Networking tab, HP Embedded
networks bidirectional communication
Embedded Jetdirect page,
HP Jetdirect Administrator's
Point and Print installation
Set Protocols, Windows
Windows printing-system
Neutral Grays settings
Notice about Firewalls dialog box,
Novell NetWare operating systems,
Enterprise AutoConfiguration
number of copies, setting
O online help. See help operating systems availability of software
bidirectional communication
Enterprise AutoConfiguration
HP Driver Preconfiguration
PCL 6 color raster compression
Postscript feature support 344
standalone drivers 8 supported 8
Optimizations option, PCL
Optional Paper Sources, PCL
orientation settings
Other Pages paper settings
output bins. See bins
Output Protocol settings, PS
Output Settings, PCL traditional
Output tab
P
Page Order settings
page orientation settings
Page Setup tab, PS Emulation
352 Index ENWW
Pages per Sheet settings
paper
Alternative Letterhead Mode
custom sizes, PCL driver
custom sizes, PCL traditional
custom sizes, PCL unidriver
Include types in application
Pages per Sheet settings, PCL
Pages per Sheet settings,
Print Document On settings,
Print Document On settings,
Print on Both Sides settings,
Print on Both Sides, PCL
PS Emulation Driver settings
Size is settings, PCL traditional
Size is settings, unidrivers
Source is settings, PCL
Source is settings, unidrivers
Type is: settings, PCL traditional
Type is: settings, unidrivers
types and sizes supported
Paper Handling Options, PCL
Paper Options
Paper/Output settings
Paper/Quality tab, unidrivers 177
passwords, HP Embedded Web
PCL 6 raster compression support
PCL files, command-line printing
PCL traditional drivers
Allow Scaling from Large Paper
Alternative Letterhead Mode
alternative source support
bidirectional communication
Enterprise AutoConfiguration,
HP Driver Preconfiguration
Ignore Application Collation
Include types in application
installable options support
More Configuration Options
operating systems supported
PCL 6 color raster compression
Print Quality Details settings
quality settings 340 reordering options 340
ENWW Index 353
PCL unidrivers
Advanced Printing Features
Alternative Letterhead Mode
alternative source support
bidirectional communication
document preview image
HP Driver Preconfiguration
Image Color Management (ICM)
installable options support
operating systems supported
PCL 6 color raster compression
Print Optimizations option 174
PDEs (Printer Dialog Extensions)
PDF files
Macintosh, File Upload
printing using HP Embedded
Percentage of Normal Size setting
PINs, Job Storage
Please use the Add Printer Wizard
plug and play scrubber utility 312
Point and Print installation,
Windows printing-system
port selection dialog box, Windows
portrait orientation settings
PostScript Device settings, PS
postscript documents, printing 40
PostScript Options, unidrivers
Postscript printer description (PPD)
PostScript tab
Ctrl-D settings 163 data format 163
error information 161 header 161
PPD (postscript printer description)
pre-existing installation, modifying
Preparing to Install dialog box,
354 Index ENWW
Print All Text as Black
PCL traditional drivers 91, 92
Print Document On settings
Print on Both Sides
PCL traditional driver settings
Print Optimizations option, PCL
Print Page Borders settings
Print Quality Details, PCL traditional
Print Task Quick Sets, PCL traditional drivers
Print Task Quick Sets, unidrivers
print-ready files
printing using HP Embedded
Printer Connection dialog box,
printer control panel settings
Printer Dialog Extensions (PDEs)
Printer Features, unidrivers 175
Printer Found dialog box, Windows
Printer Location and Comment dialog box, Windows
Printer Model
PCL traditional driver settings
Printer Name dialog box, Windows
Printer Not Found dialog box,
Printer Port dialog box,
Printer Settings dialog box,
Printer Sharing dialog box,
Windows
printing
printing files using HP Embedded
Private job settings
PRN files, printing 40 product support 40
Proof and Hold job settings
protected system, HP Embedded
protocols
Windows installation dialog box
PS Emulation Driver
alternative source support
bidirectional communication
HP Driver Preconfiguration
installable options support
operating systems supported
Printer features group box
quality settings 340 reordering options 340
ENWW Index 355
Window duplexing unit settings
PS Emulation Unidriver
Advanced Printing Features
Alternative Letterhead Mode
alternative source support
bidirectional communication
document preview image
HP Driver Preconfiguration
Image Color Management (ICM)
installable options support
operating systems supported
PostScript Device settings
PostScript Memory settings
PS files, command-line printing
Q
Quick Copy job settings
Quick Sets. See Print Task Quick
Sets
R raster compression
Ready to Install dialog box,
regional versions for printing-
releasing Job Storage jobs 120,
remote firmware updates
determining current firmware
messages 316 troubleshooting 316
Rendezvous Setting, Macintosh
Resizing Options
resolution
PCL traditional driver settings
PS Emulation Driver settings
356 Index ENWW
RFU. See remote firmware updates
RGB settings
S
Scale Patterns (WYSIWYG) feature
Scale to Fit setting
Scaling control, PS Emulation
screen-readable documentation
Searching dialog box, Windows
Security page, HP Embedded Web
Send TrueType as Bitmaps
PCL traditional drivers 91, 92
service maintenance users, HP
Set Network Protocols dialog box,
Set Port Name dialog box, Windows
settings
continuous export 34 locking 34
Print Task Quick Sets,
Print Task Quick Sets, unidrivers
Settings tab, HP Embedded Web
sharing setup dialog box, Windows
silent installation
sizes, paper
PCL Traditional Driver settings
Print on Both Sides settings,
Print on Both sides, PCL
PS Emulation Driver settings
Source is settings
sources, paper. See trays
Specify Printer dialog box,
Specify Printer dialog box, Windows
sRGB settings
Stapling Options, PS Emulation
status
storage, job enabling in PCL traditional
operating systems supported
Stored job settings
substitution table for fonts, PS
supplies
AutoSend page, HP Embedded
viewing status 40 support, product 40
system requirements
T
TBCP output protocol, PS
text files, command-line printing
text, printing all as black
PCL traditional drivers 91, 92
time settings, HP Embedded Web
traditional drivers. See PCL traditional drivers; PS Emulation
Driver transparencies, paper type
trays
Alternative Letterhead Mode
Installable Options, PS
PCL traditional driver settings
Source is settings, PCL
ENWW Index 357
Source is settings, unidrivers
unidriver Form to Tray
troubleshooting
HP driver Diagnostic Printer
TrueType font settings
Send as Bitmap, PCL traditional
Send as Bitmap, PCL unidrivers
substitution table, PS Emulation
two-sided printing
PCL traditional driver settings
TXT files, command-line printing
types, paper
Include in application source list
PCL traditional drivers settings
Print on Both Sides settings,
Print on Both sides, PCL
Typical Installation
U unattended installation
unidrivers
Advanced Printing Features
Alternative Letterhead Mode
alternative source support
bidirectional communication
document preview image
Font DIMM Installer 228 font settings 228
Image Color Management (ICM)
operating systems supported
PCL 6 color raster compression
quality settings 340 reordering options 340
uninstallation
Macintosh printing system
UNIX operating systems
Unprintable Area, PS Emulation
unprotected system, HP Embedded
Update Now feature 32, 33, 137
updating firmware remotely. See remote firmware update
358 Index ENWW
Use Different Paper, PCL traditional
Use Different Paper/Covers,
W
Wait Timeout settings 162, 232
Watermarks settings
Web Jetadmin. See HP Web
Jetadmin
Web sites
HP Embedded Web Server
HP Embedded Web Server links
links, HP Embedded Web
Welcome dialog box, Windows
What's this? Help
Windows operating systems availability of software
custom installation, printing-
dialog boxes, Typical Installation
direct printing, local port 329
directory structure, software CD-
Enterprise AutoConfiguration
HP Driver Preconfiguration
Installer Customization Wizard
installing printing software
PCL traditional drivers features
Point and Print installation
PS Emulation Driver features
PS emulation fonts supported
ENWW Index 359
360 Index ENWW
© 2005 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P.
www.hp.com
Scarica
Link pubblico aggiornato
Il link pubblico alla tua chat è stato aggiornato. Puoi visualizzare e gestire i tuoi link di chat dopo la registrazione qui.
Link pubblico del documento
Pubblicità